-------
In such cases, the concentrations cited above are appropriate in only the
near-surface zones of water bodies. The molar oxidant concentrations are
input to TOXIWASP using parameter OXRADG(ISBG).
Bacterial Degradation
Bacterial degradation, sometimes referred to as microbial transformation,
biodegradation or biolysis, is the breakdown of a compound by the enzyme
systems in bacteria. Examples are given in Figure 46. Although these trans-
formations can detoxify and mineralize toxins and defuse potential toxins,
they can also activate potential toxins.
Two general types of biodegradation are recognized—growth metabolism
and cometaboliSKI. Growth metobolism occurs when the organic compound serves
as a food source for the bacteria. Adaptation times from 2 to 50 days are
generally required. Bacterial adaptation is faster for chronic exposure and
higher microbial poulations. Adaptation is slower for low populations or
when easily degradable carbon sources are present. Following adaptation,
biodegradation proceeds at fast first-order rates. Cometabolism occurs when
the organic compound is not a food source for the bacteria. Adaptation is
seldom necessary, and the transformation rates are slow compared with growth
metabolism.
In TOXIWASP, biodegradation is limited to cometabolism. It is assumed
that bacterial populations are unaffected by the presence of the compound at
low concentrations. Second-order kinetics for dissolved, sorbed, and bio-
sorbed chemical in the water column and the bed are considered:
KBW " Pbac ' fB • i kBw • ai 148
P f Y V1- n 149
pbac * rB ' 2. XBS * ai 14y
where:
Kg^ = net biodegradation rate constant in water segment, hr
Kg^ = net biodegradation rate constant in benthic segment, hr
ki^ = second order biodegradation rate constant for phase i in
water segments, ml/cell-hr
ki^ = second order biodegradation rate constant for phase i in
benthic segments, ml/cell-hr
pbac * bacterial population density in segment, cell/ml
fg = fraction of population actively degrading organic compound
120
-------
(Potential Toxin)
O(CH2)3COOH
r-CI
(Less Toxic Substance)
OH
r- Cl
Cl
OCH2CH2OS03H
-Cl
Cl
(Potential Toxin)
Cl
Figure 46. Microbial transformations of toxic chemicals
(Alexander 1980).
TOXIWASP biodegradation data specifications are summarized in Figure
47. The three second order rate constants for water and for bed segments
can be specified as constants 25-27 and 31-33. Temperature correction
factors can be left at 0. If the user wants TOXIWASP to correct the rate
constants for ambient segment temperatures, then nonzero temperature
correction factors specified as constants 28-30 and 34-36 will invoke the
following modification for each rate constant kg.
kBw(T)
kBs(T)
QT£
(T-20J/10
(T-20)/10
150
151
121
-------
i PARAMETERS
6 BACTDGCJ) Bacterial population
cells/ml (water)
cells/lOOg (bed)
7 ACBACCJ) Active fraction
of bacteria
H« CONSTANTS
25,26,27 KBACWGG,!) Water-column rate
constant, nl/cell
28,29,30 QTBAVGCU) Temperature correction
factor
31,32,33 KBACSG Benthlc rate constant,
ml/cell-hr
34,35,36 QTBASG Temperature correction
factor
Figure 47. TOXIWASP bacterial degradation parameters.
where:
QTW = "Q-10" temperature correction factor for biodegradation in
water
QTS = "Q-10" temperature correction factor for biodegradation in
benthic segments
T = ambient temperature in segment, °C
The temperature correction factors represent the increase in the biodegra-
dation rate constants resulting from a 10°C temperature increase. Values
in the range of 1.5 to 2 are common.
122
-------
Total bacterial populations for water and benthic segments are input
using parameter BACTOG(ISEG). Typical population size ranges are given
in Table 14. Note that input units for benthic segments are cells/100 g
dry weight. These are corrected to cells/ml internally. The total
population counts are reduced by the spatially variable active bacterial
fraction, input through parameter ACBAC(ISEG).
TABLE 14. SIZE OF TYPICAL BACTERIAL POPULATIONS IN NATURAL WATERS
Water Body Type
Bacterial Numbers (cells/ml)
Ref.
Oligotrophic Lake
Mesotrophic Lake
Eutrophic Lake
Eutrophic Reservoir
Dystrophic Lake
Lake Surficial Sediments
40 Surface Waters
Stream Sediments
Rur River (winter)
50 - 300
450 - 1,400
2000 - 12,000
1000 - 58,000
400 - 2,300
8x109 - 5x10*0 cells/g dry wt
500 - 1x106
107 - 108 cells/g
3x104
a
a
b
c
d
References:
aWetzel (1975). Enumeration techniques unclear.
kparis jst al^. (1981). Bacterial enumeration using plate counts.
cHerbes & Schwa11 (1978). Bacterial enumeration using plate counts.
^Larson et al. (1981). Bacterial enumeration using plate counts.
123
-------
Environmental factors other than temperature and population size can
limit bacterial rates. Potential reduction factors must be considered
externally by the user, and input through parameter ACBAC(ISEG). Nutrient
limitation can be important in oligotrophic environments. The following
reduction factor was used by Ward and Brock (1976) to describe phosphate
limitation of hydrocarbon degradation:
0.0277 . CpQ4
fpo4 = 152
1 + 0.0277 .
where:
CPO4 = dissolved inorganic phosphorus concentration, ug/L
Low concentrations of dissolved oxygen can cause reductions in biodegradation
rates. Below DO concentrations of about 1 mg/L, the rates start to decrease.
When anoxic conditions prevail, most organic substances are biodegraded more
slowly. Because biodegradation reactions are generally more difficult to
predict than physical and chemical reactions, site-specific calibration be-
comes more important. TOXIWASP allows several methods to correct rates to
reflect field data.
Volatilization
Volatilization is the movement of chemical across the air-water inter-
face. The dissolved neutral concentration attempts to equilibrate with the
gas phase partial pressure, as illustrated in Figure 48. The equation in
this figure shows that equilibrium occurs when the dissolved concentration
equals the partial pressure divided by Henry's Law Constant. In most cases,
organic toxicants in the atmosphere are at much lower levels than partial
pressures equilibrated with water concentrations. Consequently, volatiliza-
tion reduces to a first-order process with a rate proportional to the con-
ductivity and surface area divided by volume:
K« = ky . —•• . ot-i — k*^ . ~— 153
V D
where:
K = net volatilization rate constant, hr~1
kv = conductivity of the chemical through the water segment, m/hr
A = surface area of water segment, m
S
V = volume of the water segment, m^
D = average depth of the segment, m
124
-------
- k* f p _
D V^
Cw = DISSOLVED CONCENTRATION, ng/l
P = PARTIAL PRESSURE, atn
H = HENRY'S LAW CONSTANT,
D = DEPTH, n
kv = RATE CONSTANT, n/hr (conductivity)
Figure 48. Volatilization.
ot
dissolved fraction of the chemical
The value of ky, the conductivity, depends on the intensity of
turbulence in a water body and in the overlying atmosphere. Mackay and
Leinonen (1975) have discussed conditions under which the value of kv is
primarily determined by the intensity of turbulence in the water. As the
Henry's Law coefficient increases, the conductivity tends to be increasingly
influenced by the intensity of turbulence in water. As the Henry's Law
coefficient decreases, the value of the conductivity tends to be increasingly
influenced by the intensity of atmospheric turbulence.
Because Henry's Law coefficient generally increases with increasing
vapor pressure of a compound and generally decreases with increasing
solubility of a compound, highly volatile low solubility compounds are
most likely to exhibit mass transfer limitations in water and relatively
125
-------
nonvolatile high solubility compounds are more likely to exhibit mass
transfer limitations in the air. Volatilization is usually of relatively
less magnitude in lakes and reservoirs than in rivers and streams.
In cases where it is likely that the volatilization rate is regulated
by turbulence level in the water phase, estimates of volatilization can
be obtained from results of laboratory experiments. As discussed by Mill
et al. (1982), small flasks containing a solution of a pesticide dissolved
in water that have been stripped of oxygen can be shaken for specified
periods of time. The amount of pollutant lost and oxygen gained through
volatilization can be measured and the ratio of conductivities (KVOB) for
pollutants and oxygen can be calculated. As shown by Tsivoglou and Wallace
(1972), this ratio should be constant irrespective of the turbulence in a
water body. Thus, if the reaeration coefficient for a receiving water body
is known or can be estimated and the ratio of the conductivity for the pollu-
tant to reaeration coefficient has been measured, the pollutant conductivity
can be estimated.
In TOXIWASP, the dissolved concentration of a compound in a surface
water column segment can volatilize at a rate determined by the two-layer
resistance model (Whitman, 1923), where the conductivity is the reciprocal
of the total resistance:
kv (RL + RG)-1 154
where:
RL = liquid phase resistance, hr/m
RQ = gas phase resistance, hr/m
The two-resistance method assumes that two "stagnant films" are bounded
on either side by well mixed compartments. Concentration differences serve
as the driving force for the water layer diffusion. Pressure differences
drive the diffusion for the air layer. Prom mass balance considerations, it
is obvious that the same mass must pass through both films, thus the two
resistances combine in series. There is actually yet another resistance
involved, the transport resistance between the two interfaces, but it is
assumed to be negligible. This may not be true in two cases: very turbulent
conditions and in the presence of surfaceactive contaminants. Although this
two-resistance method, the Whitman model, is rather simplied in its assump-
tion of uniform layers,'it has been shown to be as accurate as more complex
models. Laboratory studies of volatilization of organic chemicals confirm
the validity of the method as an accurate predictive tool (Burns et al.,
1982).
In TOXIWASP, the liquid phase resistance to the compound is assumed to
be proportional to the transfer rate of oxygen, which is limited by the
liquid phase only:
126
-------
RL = 155
where :
KO2 = temperature corrected reaeration velocity, m/hr
MW = molecular weight of the compound, g/mole
32 = molecular weight of oxygen, g/mole
If a measured proportionality factor KVOG is available, it is used in
place of /3 2/MW . The gas phase resistance to the compound is assumed
to be proportional to the transfer rate of water vapor, which is limited
by the gas phase only:
1
R = - • ------ 156
H . WAT . /T8/MW
RTk
where:
WAT = water vapor exchange velocity, m/hr
18 = molecular weight of water, g/mole
H = Henry's Law constant, atin-m^/mole
R = ideal gas constant = 8.206 x 1 0~5 m3-atm/mol°K
Tfc = water temperature, °K
The reaeration and water vapor exchange velocities vary with stream reach
and time of year. They can be calculated using one of several empirical
formulations .
TOXIWASP calculates flow-induced reaeration based on the Covar method
(Covar, 1976). This method calculates reaeration as a function of velocity
and depth by 6ne of three formulas, Owens, Churchill, or O'Connor-Dobbins,
respectively:
K2Q = 0.276 . v°'67 . D~°'85 157
K2Q = 0.148 . v°*969 . D~°'673 158
or = 0.164 . V0'5 . D~°*5 159
where:
V = average segment velocity, ft/sec
127
-------
D = average segment depth, ft
K20 = reaeration velocity at 20°C, m/hr
The Owens formula is automatically selected for segments with depth less than
2 feet. For segments deeper than 2 feet, the O'Connor-Dobbins or Churchill
formula is selected based on a consideration of depth and velocity. Deeper,
slowly moving rivers require O'Connor-Dobbins; moderately shallow, faster
moving streams require Churchill.
Whenever the volatilization rate is calculated during a simulation,
wind-induced reaeration is determined by
K20 = 0.0046 . W + 0.00136 , w2 160
where:
W = time-varying windspeed at 1 0 cm above surface, m/sec
A minimum value of 0.02 m/hr is imposed on K20. Windspeed affects reaeration,
then, above 6 m/sec. The reaeration velocity used to compute volatilization
is either the flow-induced reaeration or the wind-induced reaeration, which-
ever is larger. Segment temperatures are used to adjust K20 by the standard
formula
K02 =
K20 * 1.024(T~20>) 161
The water vapor exchange velocity used in R^ is calculated using wind speed
and a regression proposed by Liss (1973):
WAT = 0.1857 + 11.36 . W 162
where:
W = wind speed at 10 cm above surface, m/sec
Wind speed measured above 1 0 cm must be adjusted to the 10-cm height by the
user assuming a logarithmic velocity profile and a roughness height of 1 mm
(Israelsen and Hanson, 1962):
W = Wz . log (0.1/0.001)/log (z/0.001) 163
where:
Wz = wind speed at height z, m/sec
z = measurement height, m
Although there are many calculations involved in determining volatili-
zation, most are performed internally using a small set of data. TOXIWASP
volatilization data specifications are summarized in Figure 49. Not all of
the constants are required. If Henry's Law constant is unknown, it will be
128
-------
! PARAMETERS
3 v VELQC(J) Average water velocity,
ft/sec
4 V WINDGCJ) Average wind speed @ 10 en,
n/sec
J CONSTANTS
44 H
45
46
49
50
HENRYG
VAPRG
KVDG
EVPRG
EHENG
Henry's Law constant,
atn-n3/nol
Vapor pressure of chenlcal,
torr
Ratio of liquid resistance to
reaeratlon rate (measured)
Molar heat of vaporation,
kcal/nole
Tenperature correction for H,
kcal/nole
L KINETIC FUNCTIONS
E VINDN Normalized wind speed
Figure 49. TOXIWASP volatilization data.
calculated internally from vapor pressure and solubility, if KVOG is not
measured, it will be calculated internally from molecular weight.
1.5.4 Heavy Metals
Although TOXIWASP was designed explicitly for organic chemicals, it
can be used to simulate metals with judicious specification of certain
key parameters. Because of the inherent complexity of metals behavior,
site-specific calibration is required. Physical processes affecting the
fate of metals in rivers are illustrated in Figure 50.
129
-------
SORPTION
-DCSORPTION
WITH SEDIMENTS
Figure 50. Processes influencing the fate of metals in rivers
(Mills et al. 1985).
Heavy metals in the aquatic environment can form soluble complexes with
organic and inorganic ligands, sorb onto organic and inorganic particulates,
and precipitate or dissolve (Figure 51). Geochemical models such as MINTEQ
(Felmy et al., 1984) can be used to predict metal speciation for a set of
chemical conditions. TOXIWASP lumps all soluble complexes with the free Lon
to give the dissolved metal concentration. Precipitated metal is lumped with
all sorbed species to give particulate "sorbed" metal concentration. A
spatially variable lumped partition coefficient Kp describes the two phases.
There is no general consistency in reported Kp values for particular metals
in the natural environment, so site-specific values should be used when pos-
sible. Table 15 summarizes Kp values reported in Delos et al. (1984 ) for
eight metals. These values are generally high, and are provided as a starting
130
-------
SOLUBLE COMPLEXES
WITH ORGANIC LIGANDS
SOLUBLE COMPLEXES
WITH INORGANIC
LIGANDS
ADSORBED SPECIES
• ADSORPTtON/COPRECIPITATION ON
HYDROUS IRON/MANGANESE OXIDES
•ION EXCHANGE
• ADSORPTION TO CLAYS. SILICATES.
OTHER MINERALS
• ADSORPTION TO ORGANIC SOLIDS
Figure 51. Speciation of metals in aquatic
environment (Felmy et al. 1984).
point for the user. Spatially-variable Kp values can be input to TOXIWASP
using parameter OCS(ISEG). Constant KOC should be set to 1.0.
1.5.5 Summary of Data Requirements
TOXIWASP adds several specific transport and transformation processes
to the basic WASP mass transport equations. These additional processes
require the specification of several environmental parameters, chemical
constants, and environmental time functions, which were discussed in the
preceding sections. This section provides a summary.
The environmental data required for a chemical simulation depend upon
which transformation processes are important. Table 16 gives the environmen-
tal properties influencing each process in TOXIWASP,and a range of expected
values. For a series of simulations involving many compounds, approximate
values for all environmental properties should be specified. For those pro-
cesses found to be most important, better estimates of the relevant environ-
mental properties can be provided in a second round of simulations.
131
-------
TABLE 15. SPECIATION OF PRIORITY METALS BETWEEN DISSOLVED AND ADSORBED
PHASES AS A JUNCTION OF SUSPENDED SOLIDS CONCENTRATIONS IN STREAMS
Metal
Arsenic
Cadmium
Chromium
Copper
Lead
Mercury
Nickel
Zinc
SS(mg/L)
1
10
100
1000
1
10
100
1000
1
10
100
1000
1
10
100
1000
1
10
100
1000
1
10
100
1000
1
10
100
1000
1
10
100
1000
Kp(l/kg)
5.105
9.104
2.104
3.103
4.106
3.105
2.104
2.103
3.106
4.105
5.104
5.103
1.106
2.105
3.104
6.103
3.105
2.105
1.105
9.104
3.106
2.105
2.104
1.103
5.105
1.105
4.104
9.103
1 .106
2.105
t.1Q4
1.1 04
%Dissolved
70
50
30
24
20
25
30
40
25
20
17
15
50
30
25
14
75
30
10
1
25
30
30
45
70
50
20
10
40
30
17
10
%Adsorbed
30
50
70
76
80
75
70
60
75
80
83
85
50
70
75
86
25
70
90
99
75
70
70
55
30
50
80
90
60
70
83
90
132
-------
TABLE 16. ENVIRONMENTAL PROPERTIES AFFECTING INTERPHASE TRANSPORT
AND TRANSFORMATION PROCESSES
Environmental Property
(1)
Sediment Concentrations:
Suspended, in mg/L
Benthic, in kg/L
Organic Carbon Fraction:
Suspended Sediment
Benthic Sediment
Sediment Settling Velocity,
in m/day: clays
fine silts
Bed Sediment Re suspension
Velocity, in cm/yr
Pore Water Diffusion, in cm^/sec
Benthos Mixing Factor
Surf icial Sediment Depth, in cm
Water Column Depth, in m
Water Column Temperature, in °C
Average Water velocity, in m/sec
Wind Speed at 1 0 cm, in m/sec
pH and pOH, Standard Units
Concentration of Oxidants, in
moles/L
Surface Light Intensity, in
Lang leys/day
Cloud Cover, tenths of sky
Light Extinction Coefficient,
in per meter
Active Bacterial Populations:
Suspended, in cells/ml
Benthic, in cells/1 OOg
Input Value
(2)
5-500
1.2-1.7
.01-. 10
.01-. 10
0-0.3
0.1-10
0-50
1 0-5-1 O-6
0-1
0.1-10
0.5-100
4-30
0-2
0-20
5-9
10-9-10-12
300-700
0-10
.1-5
103-106
103-106
Environmental Process
KD KS *V KH KO KP ^B
(3) (4) (5) (6) (7) (8) (9)
X X
X X
X X
X X
X
X
X
X
X
XX X
X X X X X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
(3) Sorption; (4) Benthos-Water Column Exchange; (5) Volatilization; (6)
Hydrolysis; (7) Oxidation; (8) Photolysis; (9) Bacterial Degradation
133
-------
The chemical properties of each compound control that transformation
processes are important in a particular environment. Table 17 summarizes
chemical properties influencing each process in TOXIWASP. Although the model
allows specification of different rates for the dissolved, sorbed, and bio-
sorbed chemical phases, such data are not generally available. Measured rate
constants are often assigned to the dissolved chemical phase. The model also
allows specification of temperature correction parameters for each process.
Such data are often difficult to find without special studies, and need not
be input except for very hot or cold conditions, or where seasonal variability
is being studied.
Time variable functions can be used to study diurnal or seasonal effects
on pollutant behavior. The five time-variable environmental forcing functions
are summarized in Table 18. As shown, some of these time functions are
multiplied by spatially variable parameters within TOXIWASP to produce t.Lme-
and spatially-variable environmental conditions.
Although the amount and variety of data potentially used by TOXIWASP is
large, data requirements for any particular simulation can be quite small.
Usually only sorption and one or two transformation processes will signifi-
cantly affect a particular chemical. To simulate the transport of many
soluble compounds in the water column, even sorption can often be disregarded.
Indeed, for empirical studies -, all chemical constants, time functions, and
environmental parameters can be ignored except the user-specified transforma-
tion rate constant TOTKG(ISEG) and, if desired, the partition coefficient-
organic fraction pair of KOC and OCS(ISEG). Thus, TOXIWASP can be used as a
first-order water pollutant model to conduct standard simulations of dye
tracers, salinity intrusion, or coliform die-off. What is gained by the
second-order process functions and resulting input data burden is the ability
to extrapolate more confidently to future conditions. The user must determine
the optimum amount of empirical calibration and process specification for
each application.
134
-------
TABLE 17. BASIC CHEMICAL PROPERTIES AFFECTING INTERPHASE
TRANSPORT AND TRANSFORMATION PROCESSES
Variable Name
GENERAL
MWTG
SOLG
Chemical Property
Molecular weight
Solubility
Units
g/mole
mg/L
SORPTION
ROW
KOC
Octanol-water partition coefficient
Organic carbon partition coefficient
VOLATILIZATION
HENRYG
VAPRG
KVOG
Henry's Law constant
Vapor pressure
Liquid phase volatilization/reaeration
ratio
m3-atm/mole
torr
HYDROLYSIS
KAHG(I)
KBHG(I)
KNHG(I)
Acid-catalysis rate constant for phase I L/mole-hr
Base-catalysis rate constant for phase I L/mole-hr
Neutral rate constant for phase I hr~1
OXIDATION
KOXG(I)
Second order rate constant for phase I
L/mole-hr
PHOTOLYSIS
KDPG
QUANTG(I)
Near surface, reference rate constant
Reaction yield for phase I
hr-1
BIODEGRADATION
KBACWG(I)
Second order rate constant in water for ml/cell-hr
phase I
KBACSG(I) Second order rate constant in benthos for ml/cell-hr
phase I
135
-------
TABLE 18. TIME VARIABLE ENVIRONMENTAL FORCING FUNCTIONS
Time Function
Parameter
Environmental Property
TEMPN
(Unitless)
or (°C)
WINDN
(unitless)
or (m/sec)
TEMPM(ISEG)
(°C)
(unitless)
WINDG(ISEG)
{m/sec)
(unitless)
PHN x PHG(ISEG)
(unitless) (log activity)
or (log activity) (unitless)
POHN x POHG(ISEG)
(unitless) (log activity)
or (log activity) (unitless)
LIGHTN
(unitless)
Water temperature (x,t)
°C
°C
Wind speed at 10 cm above
surface (x,t)
(m/sec)
(m/sec)
Average pH (x,t)
(log activity)
(log activity)
Average pOH (x,t)
(log activity)
(log activity)
Average normalized light
intensity at water
surface (t)
(unitless)
136
-------
SECTION 2
WASPS USER'S MANUAL
2.1 OVERVIEW
To run the WASPS or DYNHYD3 models, an input data set must be specified.
These data sets are catalogued into input data groups (formerly "card groups")
and are read into the programs in batch mode. For convenience, the data sets
are separated according to subject matter.
Each card group contains several "records" or lines. Records are usually
one 80-space line, but in a few instances a record will constitute as many
lines as needed to complete the data group. Records are always input sequen-
tially and each record begins on a new line. Do not skip lines between
records unless a "blank" record is specifically instructed. Likewise, do not
enter blank lines between data groups; the models simply read from one line
to the next.
The introduction in each section gives an overview for each of the data
group's subject matter. The data group descriptions give detailed informa-
tion of all records and detailed definitions for all variables in that group.
The data group tables provide quick reference to record structure, variable
format, and definition. The variable definition section supplies an alphabe-
tical listing with definitions for all variables (of that particular model).
This manual consists of a section for each of four models—the hydro-
dynamic model, the basic water quality model, the eutrophication model, and
the toxics model, within each section, there is an introduction, description
of data groups, data group tables, and variable definitions. For the basic
water quality section, the variable definitions are provided for the common
blocks only. Within the eutrophication and toxics sections, only those data
group descriptions specifically pertaining to EUTRWASP or TOXIWASP are pro-
vided.
2.2 THE HYDRODYNAMIC MODEL
2.2.1 Introduction
This section describes the input required to run the DYNHYD3 hydro-
dynamics program. To arrange the input into a logical format, the data are
divided into eight groups:
137
-------
A - Simulation Control
B - Printout Control
C - Hydraulic Summary
D - Junction Data
E - Channel Data
F - Inflow Data
G - Seaward Boundary Data
H - Wind Data
The following is a brief explanation of each data group.
Data Group A consists of preliminary data, such as network parameters
(number of channels, number of junctions), simulation time step, and the
beginning and ending day of simulation.
Data Group B allows the user to specify printing options.
Data Group C is responsible for the storage of flows and volumes. The
stored file created by this-data group can be used as an input data set for
the water quality model.
Data Group D describes the model network and initial conditions at each
junction.
Data Group E describes the model network and initial conditions at each
channel.
Data Group F lists all inflows into the model system. Flows may be
constant or variable. Inflows are considered to be negative, and outflows
are positive.
Data Group G describes the seaward boundaries. The maximum number of
seaward boundaries has been set to five, but can be respecified by the user.
There are two types of tidal inputs: average tide, and variable tide. The
average tide is a smooth, repetitive curve that fits the equation:
Head = A1 + A2 sin(ut) (160)
Aj sin(2o)t)
A4 sin(3u>t)
A5 cos(u)t)
A6 cos(2wt)
A7 cos(3(*)t)
The variable tide is a 1/2 sine wave that has highs and lows as specified by
the data set.
138
-------
Data Group G has three options for defining the tidal cycle, option 1,
the user specifies the coefficients in equation 160 for an average tide.
Option 2, the user specifies data and the model calculates the coefficients
in equation 160 which define the average tide. Option 3, the user specifies
the highs and lows of a variable tide and the model fits a half sine curve
through the points.
Data Group H lists wind speeds and directions.
2.2.2 DYNHYD3 Data Group Descriptions
2.2.2.1 DATA GROUP A: Simulation Control—
VARIABLES
Records 1, 2—Model Identification
ALPHA(J)
alphanumeric characters to identify the system,
date and run number.
Record 3—Data Group Identification
HEADER =
alphanumeric characters to identify the data
group, "PROGRAM CONTROL DATA."
Record 4—Simulation Control Data
NJ
NC
NCYC
DELT
ICRD
ZDAY
ZHR
ZMIN
EDAY
EHR
number of junctions in the model network.
number of channels in the model network.
total number of time steps for execution (number
of cycles). If equal to zero, the model will
compute NCYC internally (cycles).
time interval used in execution (sec).
file containing the initial conditions for
junctions and channels. If equal to 0 or 5, data
set is read. If equal to 8, a file 8, previously
created by subroutine RESTART, is read.
beginning day of simulation (day).
beginning hour of simulation (hr).
beginning minute of simulation (min).
ending day of simulation (day).
ending hour of simulation (hr).
139
-------
EMIN = ending minute of simulation (min).
ALPHAd), ALPHA(2), and HEADER assist the user in maintaining a log of
computer simulations, but are not actually used by the DYNHYD3 program.
ORGANIZATION OF RECORDS
Each record in Data Group A is input once; therefore, Data Group A
consists of 4 lines of data. Data Group B starts on the 5th line (no blank
line).
2.2.2.2 DATA GROUP B: Printout Control—
VARIABLES
Record 1—Data Group Identification
HEADER = alphanumeric characters to identify the data
group, "PRINTOUT CONTROL DATA."
Record 2—Output Control Information
PPRINT = time for printout to begin (hr).
PINTVL = time interval between printouts (hr).
NOPRT = number of junctions for which printouts (results)
are desired, can be 1 through NJ.
Record 3—List of Junctions
JPRT(I) = junction number for results to be printed.
There will be NOPRT entries in Record 3 (I = 1 to NOPRT).
ORGANIZATION OF RECORDS
Records 1 and 2 are entered once. Record 3 may contain several liness
depending upon NOPRT. One line may contain up to 16 entries. Therefore,
if NOPRT is equal to 1-16, then Record 3 will consist of 1 line. If NOPRT
is equal to 17-32, then Record 3 will consist of 2 lines, etc. The total
number of lines for Data Group B equals 2 + (1 + INT((NOPRT-1)/16))).
140
-------
2.2.2.3 DATA GROUP C: Hydraulic Summary—
VARIABLES
Record 1—Data Group Identification
HEADER = alphanumeric characters to identify the data group
"Summary Control Data."
Record 2--Summary Control Data
SUMRY = option number that controls how the hydrodynamic
scratch file (file 2) is processed to create a
permanent summary file (file 4) for the water
quality model to read. If equal to zero, then no
summary file will be created, if equal to 1 , an
unformatted file will be created, which is unlegi-
ble, but quicker and saves space. If equal to 2, a
formatted file will be created which is legible.
TDAY = day to begin storing parameters to file (day).
THR = hour to begin storing parameters to file (hr).
TMIN = minute to begin storing parameters to file (min).
NODYN = number of hydraulic time steps per quality time
steps desired.
ORGANIZATION OF RECORDS
Records 1 and 2 are entered once. Therefore, Data Group C consists of
two lines.
2.2.2.4 DATA GROUP D: Junction Data—
VARIABLES
Record 1—Data Group Identification
HEADER = alphanumeric characters to identify the data group,
"JUNCTION DATA."
Record 2—Junction Parameters
JJ = junction number.
-------
Y(J) » initial head (or surface elevation) in reference to
a horizontal model datum, at junction JJ (ft).
SURF(J) = surface area at junction JJ (ft2).
BELEV(J) = bottom elevation above (or below) the horizontal da-
tum plane (usually taken to be mean sea level) (ft).
NCHAN(J,I)= channel number entering junction JJ. Maximum number
of channels entering any one junction is five (I =
1-5). Start list with lowest channel number.
ORGANIZATION OF RECORDS
Record 1 is entered once in Data Group D. Record 2 is entered NJ times
(NJ = number of junctions). One line is used for each junction. Therefore,
Data Group D consists of 1 + NJ lines.
2.2.2.5 DATA GROUP E: Channel Data—
VARIABLES
Record 1—Data Group Identification
HEADER = alphanumeric characters to identify the data group,
"CHANNEL DATA."
Record 2—Channel Parameters
NN = channel number.
CLEN(N) = length of channel NN (ft).
B(N) » width of channel NN (ft).
R(N) « hydraulic radius or depth of channel NN (ft).
CDIR(N) = channel direction, or angle in degrees measured from
true north. The channel direction points in the
direction of positive flow, from the higher junction
number to the lower junction number (degrees)
CN(N) • Manning roughness coefficient for channel NN (sec
. m~1/3). Ranges from 0.01 to 0.08.
V(N) « the initial mean velocity in channel NN, ft/sec.
NJUNC(N,1)=» the connecting junction at the lower end of channel
NN.
142
-------
NJUNC(N,2)= the connecting junction at the higher end of
channel NN.
A channel may only connect two junctions. Therefore, only NJUNC(N,1)
and NJUNC(N,2) exists.
ORGANIZATION OF RECORDS
Record 1 is entered only once in Data Group E. Record 2 is entered NC
times (NC = number of channels). One line is used for each channel.
Therefore, Data Group E consists of 1 + NC lines.
2.2.2.6 DATA GROUP F: Inflow Data—
VARIABLES
Record 1—Data Group Identification
HEADER = alphanumeric characters to identify the data
group and type of inflows, "CONSTANT INFLOW DATA."
Record 2—Constant Inflow Number
NCFLOW = the number of constant inflows that will be read.
Record 3—Constant Inflow Data
JRCF(I) = junction that will be receiving the following
inflow.
CFLOW(l) = the value of the constant inflow into junction
JRCF(I) (ft3/sec). Value will be negative for
inflow, positive for outflow.
Record 4—Data Group Identification
HEADER = alphanumeric characters to identify the type of
inflows, "VARIABLE INFLOW DATA."
Record 5—Variable Inflow Number
NVFLOW = the number of variable inflows that will be read
•
Record 6--Variable Inflow Breaks
JRVF(I) = junction that will be receiving the following
variable inflows.
-------
NINCR(I) = number of data points (breaks) for variable
inflow into junction JRVP(I).
Record 7—Variable Inflow Data
DAY(K) = day of VFLOW(I,K) (day).
HR(K) = hour of VFLOW(I,K) (hr).
MIN(K) = minute of VFLOW(I,K) (min).
VFLOW(I,K)= value of the variable flow corresponding to DAY(K),
HR(K), and MIN(K) (ft3/sec). Value will be negative
for inflow, positive for outflow.
ORGANIZATION OF RECORDS
Records 1 and 2 are entered once in Data Group F. Record 3 is entered
NCFLOW times with one junction number and one flow per line. Records 4 and
5 are entered once in Data Group F. Record 6 is entered NVFLOW times, but
not consecutively. Record 6 should be entered (one junction, one number of
breaks), then Record 7 with 4 flows per line until NINCR(I) flows have been
entered. Then Record 6 entered again followed by Record 7. The number of
lines for Data Group F is equal to
4 + NCFLOW + NVFLOW (1 + INT((NOPRT-1)/16))
2.2.2.7 DATA GROUP G: Seaward Boundary Data—
VARIABLES
Record 1—Data Group Identification
HEADER = alphanumeric characters to identify the data
group, "SEAWARD BOUNDARY DATA."
Record 2—Seaward Boundary Number
NSEA = number of seaward boundaries on model network.
If NSEA >0, proceed to Record 3. If NSEA = 0, go to Data
Group H.
Record 3—Seaward Boundary Parameters
JJ = junction number receiving the tidal input.
NDATA = number of data points (or breaks) to calculate the
coefficients to the curve:
-------
NTV(J)
MAXIT
MAXRES
TSHIFT
PSHIFT
YSCALE
Head = A1(J,1) + A2(J,2) sin(wt)
+ A3(J,3) sin(2ut)
+ A4(J,4) sin(3u)t)
+ A5(J,5) cos(wt)
+ A6(J,6) cos(2o)t)
+ A7(J,7) cos(3wt)
number of data points (breaks) used to describe
the variable tide.
maximum number of iterations allowed to calculate
average tide.
maximum error allowed in calculation of average
tide (calculates coefficients to describe tidal
cycle).
allows tidal cycle to be shifted on the time
scale. Therefore, if all data have been entered
and error of 6.5 hours has been made in time scale,
one can enter 6.5 for TSHIFT (hr). Usually equal
to zero.
allows tidal cycle to be shifted on the phase
angle scale (radians). Usually equal to zero.
scale factor for observed heads, B(HEAD) = B(HEAD)
* YSCALE.
If NTV(J) = 0 and NDATA >0, use Records 4 and 5 => calculates
coefficients for average tide.
If NTV(J) = 0 and NDATA = 0, use Records 4 and 6 => coefficients
for average tide are given.
If NTV(J) >), use Record 5 => variable tide is calculated.
Record 4—Tidal Parameters
PERIOD(J) = tidal period (hr).
TSTART(J) = starting time for tidal input (hr).
Record 5—Tidal Data
DAY(I) = day corresponding to BHEAD(I) (day).
HR(I) = hour corresponding to BHEAD(I) (hr).
MIN(I) = minute corresponding to BHEAD(I) (min).
ms
-------
BHEAD(I) = tidal elevation (head) at time DAY(I), HR(I),
and MIN(I) (ft).
Record 6—Coefficients
A1(J,1) = 1st Coefficient.
A1(J,2) = 2nd Coefficient
A1(J,3) = 3rd Coefficient.
A1(J,4) = 4th Coefficient.
A1(J,5) = 5th Coefficient.
A1(J,6) = 6th Coefficient.
A1(J,7) = 7th Coefficient.
These coefficients describe the curve with the following equation:
Head = A1(J,1) + A2(J,2) sin(wt)
+ A3(J,3) sin(2wt)
+ A4(J,4) sin(3uit)
+ A5(J,5) cos(u>t)
+ A6(J,6) cos(2o)t)
+ A7(J,7) cos(3wt)
ORGANIZATION OF RECORDS
As discussed in Section 2.2.1, three options for describing the tidal
cycle exists: 1) give coefficients for average tide, 2) calculate coefficients
for average tide, or 3) give highs and lows for variable tide. For all
three options, records 1, 2, and 3 are entered once. For Option 1 (NTV=0,
NDATA=0 => records 4 and 6): Record 4 and Record 6 are entered once.
For Option 2 (NTV=0, NDATA>0 => records 4 and 5): Record 4 is entered
once, and Record 5 is entered as many times as needed with 4 tidal elevations
on each line.
For Option 3 (NTV >0, NDATA = 0 => Record 5): Record 5 is entered as
many times as needed with 4 tidal elevations on each line.
The total number of lines is 2 + a set tor each of NSEA tidal boundaries.
For Option 1, the set will include 1 + 1 + 1 + INT((NDATA-1)/4).
For Option 2, the set will include 1+1+1.
For Option 3, the set will include 1 + 1 + INT((NTV-1)/4).
146
-------
2.2.2.8 DATA GROUP H: Wind Data—
Record 1—Data
HEADER
Record 2—Wind
NOBSW
Record 3—Wind
DAY(K)
HR(K)
MIN(K)
WINDS(K)
WDIR(K)
VARIABLES
Group Identification
= alphanumeric characters to identify the data group,
"WIND DATA."
Data Number
= number of wind data points (or breaks)
Data
= day corresponding to the following wind speed
and wind direction (day).
= hour corresponding to the following wind speed
and wind direction (hr).
= minute corresponding to the following wind
speed and wind direction (min).
= wind speed measured at a distance of 10 meters
above the water system (ft/sec).
= wind direction measured at a distance of 10 meters
above the water system. Must be measured from
True North (degrees).
ORGANIZATION OF RECORDS
Records 1 and 2 are entered once for Data Group H. Record 3 is entered
as many times as needed with 4 wind speeds on each line. The total number of
lines in Data Group H is equal to 2 + (1 + INT((NOBSW-1)/4).
147
-------
2.2.3 DYNHYD3 Data Group Tables
DATA GROUP A: Simulation Control
RECORD
1,2
3
4
VARIABLE
ALPHA(J)
HEADER
NJ
NC
NCYC
DELT
ICRD
3)AY
ZHR
ZMIN
EDAY
EHR
EMIN
COLUMN
1-80
1-80
1-5
6-10
1 1-15
16-20
21-25
26-30
32-33
34-35
36-40
42-43
44-45
FORMAT
20A4
20A4
15
15
15
F5.0
15
F5.0
1X,F2.0
F2.0
F5.0
1X,F2.0
F2.0
SHORT DEFINITION
Two records to identify the system,
date, and run number.
Title: "PROGRAM CONTROL DATA"
Number of junctions in network.
Number of channels in network.
Total number of time steps.
Time interval used in solution (sec).
File containing initial conditions.
Beginning day of simulation (day) .
Beg. hour of simulation (hr).
Beg. minute of simulation (min).
Final day of simulation (day) .
Final hour of simulation (hr).
Final minute of simulation (min) .
DATA GROUP B: Printout Control
RECORD
1
2
3
VARIABLE
HEADER
FPRINT
PINTVL
NOPRT
JPRT(1 )
JPRT(2)
.
•
JPRT( NOPRT)
COLUMN
1-80
1-10
1 1-20
21-25
1-5
6-10
.
76-80
1-5
FORMAT
20A4
F10.0
F10.0
15
15
15
.
•
15
SHORT DEFINITION
Title: "PRINTOUT CONTROL DATA"
Time used for first printout (hr) .
Time interval between printout (hr) .
Number of junctions to be printed.
First junction number for results to
be printed.
Second junction number for results
to be printed.
(Use as many 80-space lines as
needed to enter NOPRT values)
148
-------
DATA GROUP C: Hydraulic Summary
RECORD
1
2
VARIABLE
HEADER
SUMRY
TDAY
THR
TMIN
NODYN
COLUMN
1-80
1-5
6-10
12-13
14-15
16-20
FORMAT
20A4
15
F5.0
1X,F2.0
F2.0
15
SHORT DEFINITION
Title - "Summary Control Data"
= 0, 1, or 2. See definition.
Day to begin storing parameters (day) .
Hour to begin storing parameters (hr) .
Minute to begin storing parameters
(min) .
No. time steps/ quality time steps.
DATA GROUP D: Junction Data
RECORD
1
2
NJ
VARIABLE
HEADER
JJ
Y(J)
SURF(J)
BELEV(J)
NCHAN(J,1)
NCHAN(J,2)
NCHAN(J,3)
NCHAN(J,4)
NCHAN(J,5)
•
JJ
Y(J)
SURF(J)
BELEV(J)
NCHAN(J,1)
NCHAN(J,2)
NCHAN(J,5)
COLUMN
1-80
1-5
6-15
16-25
26-35
36-40
41-45
46-50
51-55
56-60
•
.
.
.
FORMAT
20A4
15
F10.0
F10.0
F10.0
15
15
15
15
15
•
.
.
.
SHORT DEFINITION
Title: "JUNCTION DATA"
J = 1
Junction number.
Head at junction J (ft).
Surface area at junction J (ft2).
Bottom elevation at junction J (ft).
First channel entering junction J.
Second channel entering junction J.
.
.
Fifth channel entering junction J.
*
J = NJ
Use as many lines as needed,
repeating the above format, until
NJ lines have been entered.
149
-------
DATA GROUP E: Channel Data
RECORD
1
2
NC
VARIABLE
HEADER
NN
CLEN(N)
B(N)
R(N)
CDIR(N)
CN(N)
V(N)
NJUNC(N,1)
NJUNC(N,2)
•
NN
CLEN(N)
B(N)(J)
R(N)V(J)
CDIR(N),1)
CN(N)(J,2)
V(N)(J,5)
NJUNC(N,1)
NJUNC(N,2)
COLUMN
1-80
1-5
6-15
16-25
26-35
36-45
46-55
56-65
66-70
71-75
•
*
.
.
FORMAT
20A4
15
F10.0
F10.0
F10.0
F10.0
F10.0
F10.0
15
15
•
.
.
.
SHORT DEFINITION
Title: "CHANNEL DATA"
N = 1
Channel number.
Length of channel N (f t) .
Width of channel N (ft) .
Hydraulic radius (or depth) (ft) .
Channel direction (degrees) .
Manning coeff. for channel N.
Mean velocity in channel N (ft/sec).
Lower jnct. number entering channel.
Higher jnct. no. entering channel.
j
N = NC
Use as many lines as needed,
repeating the above format, until
NJ lines have been entered.
DATA GROUP F: Inflow Data
RECORD
1
2
3
4
5
VARIABLE
HEADER
NCFLOW
JRCF( I )
CFLOW(I)
HEADER
NVFLOW
COLUMN
1-80
1-5
1-10
11-20
4-80
1-5
FORMAT
20A4
15
110
F10.0
20A4
15
SHORT DEFINITION
Title: "CONSTANT INFLOW DATA"
Number of constant flow inputs.
Junction receiving constant flow I.
Cnst. inflow (-) or outflow (+) I
(ft^/sec). (One line per flow)
Title: "VARIABLE INFLOW DATA"
Number of variable flow inputs.
Continued
150
-------
DATA GROUP F: Inflow Data (Continued)
RECORD
6
7
VARIABLE
JRVF(I)
NINCR(I)
DAY(K)
HR(K)
MIN(K)
VFLOW(.I,K)
DAY(K)
HR(K)
MIN(K)
VFLOW(I,K)
DAY(K)
HR(K)
MIN(K)
VFLOW(I^,K)
DAY(K)
HR(K)
MIN(K)
VFLOW(I,K)
•
•
•
DAY(K)
HR(K)
MIN(K)
VFLOW(I,K)
COLUMN
1-10
11-20
1-5
7-8
9-10
11-20
21-25
27-28
29-30
31-40
41-45
47-48
49-50
51-60
61-65
67-68
69-70
71-80
1-5
7-8
9-10
1 1-20
21-25
27-28
29-30
31-40
FORMAT
no
no
F5.0
1X,F2.0
F2.0
F10.0
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
*
F5.0
F2.0
F2.0
F10.0
SHORT DEFINITION
Jnct. receiving variable flow I.
Number of data points for variable
inflow in junction I.
Day corresponding to VFLOW(1,1)
(day) .
Hour corresponding to VFLOW(1,1)
(hr).
Minute corresponding to VFLOW(1,1)
(min) .
Variable flow (f t3/sec) .
K=2
K=3
K=4
(Uses as many 80-space lines as
needed to input NFLOW sets of
data, repeating the format above) .
K=NVFLOW
151
-------
DATA GROUP G: Seaward Boundary Data
RECORD
1
2
3
VARIABLE
HEADER
NSEA
COLUMN
1-80
1-5
FORMAT
20A4
15
SHORT DEFINITION
Title: "SEAWARD BOUNDARY DATA"
Number of seaward boundaries
If NSEA > 0, proceed to record 3. If NSEA = 0, go to Data Group H.
JJ
NDATA
NTV(J)
MAXIT
MAXRES
TSHIFT
PSHIFT
YSCALE
1-5
6-10
11-15
16-20
21-25
26-30
31-35
36-40
15
15
15
15
15
F5.0
F5.0
F5.0
Junction number
No. data pts. to find average tide.
No. data pts. for variable tide.
Max. iters. to calculate ave. tide.
Max. error allowed in calculation.
Shifts time scale (hr) .
Shifts phase angle (radians).
Scale factor for observed B(HEAD).
(Option 1) If NTV(J) = 0 and NDATA = 0, use records 4 and 5.
(Option 2) If NTV(J) = 0 and NDATA > 0, use records 4 and 6.
(Option 3) If NTV(J) > 0, use record 5.
4
5
PERIOD (J)
TSTART(J)
DAY(I)
HR(I)
MIN(I)
BHEAD(I)
DAY(I)
HR(I)
MIN(I)
BHEAD(I)
*
DAY(I)
HR(I)
MIN(I)
BHEADd)^
.
.
.
DAY(I)
HR(I)
MIN(I)
BHEAD(I)
1-10
11-20
1-5
6-8
9-10
11-20
21-25
26-28
29-30
31-40
•
61-65
67-68
69-70
71-80
.
.
.
.
.
F10.0
F10.0
F5.0
1X,F2.0
F2.0
F10.0
F5.0
1X,F2.0
F2.0
F10.0
•
F5.0
1X,F2.0
F2.0
F10.0
.
.
.
.
.
Period of tidal input (hr) .
Starting time for tidal input (hr) .
1=1
Day corresponding to BHEAD(1) (day).
Hour corresponding to BHEAD(1) (hr) .
Minute corresponding the BHEAD( 1 )
(min) .
Tidal elevation (feet)
1=2
1=3
1=4
Use as many lines as needed,
repeating the above format, until
NDATA sets (of time and head) are
entered.
I=NDATA
152
-------
DATA GROUP G: Seaward Boundry Data (Continued)
RECORD
6
VARIABLE
A1(J,1)
A1(J,2)
A1(J,3)
A1(J,4)
A1(J,5)
A1(J,6)
A1(J,7)
COLUMN
1-10
1 1-20
21-30
31-40
41-50
51-60
61-70
FORMAT
F10.0
F10.0
F10.0
F10.0
F10.0
F10.0
F10.0
SHORT DEFINITION
Head = A1 ( J , 1 )
+ A2(J,2) sin(u>t)
+ A3(J,3) sin(2u)t)
+ A4(J,4) sin(3o)t)
+ A5(J,5) cos(u>t)
+ A6(J,6) cos(2ut)
+ A7(J,7) cos(30)t)
DATA GROUP H: Wind Data
RECORD
1
2
3
VARIABLE
HEADER
NOBSW
DAY(K)
HR(K)
MIN(K)
WINDS(K)
WDIR(K)
•
•
•
•
DAY(K)
HR(K)
MIN(K)
WINDS (K)
WDIR(K)
•
•
*
DAY(K)
HR(K)
MIN(K)
WINDS(K)
WDIR(K)
COLUMN
1-80
1-5
1-5
7-8
9-10
11-15
16-20
•
•
•
•
61-65
67-68
69-70
71-75
76-80
•
•
•
1-5
7-8
9-10
11-15
16-20
FORMAT
20A4
15
F5.0
1X,F2.0
F2.0
F5.0
F5.0
•
•
•
•
F5.0
1X,F2.0
F2.0
F5.0
F5.0
•
•
•
F5.0
1X,F2.0
F2.0
F5.0
F5.0
SHORT DEFINITION
Title: "WIND DATA"
Number of data points.
K=1
Day corresponding to WINDS (K) (day).
Hour corresponding to WINDS(K) (hr) .
Min corresponding to WIND(K) (min) .
Wind speed (ft/sec).
Wind direction (degrees) .
K=4
Repeat as necessary, using above
format, until NOBSW groups of DAY,
HR, MIN are entered.
K=NOBSW
153
-------
2.2.4 DYNHYD3 Variable Definitions
VARIABLE
POUND IN
SUBROUTINE
DEFINITION
UNITS
AK(N)
*ALPHA(I)
AREA(N)
AREAT
AVGD
AVGDEP
AVGQIN
AVGVEL
*A1(J,
*BELEV(J)
*BHEAD(J,L)
kB(N)
DYNHY2
RUNKUT
DYNHYD
DYNHYD
RUNKUT
RESTRT
SUMRY1 ,2
RUNKUT
DYNHYD
SUMRY1,2
SUMRY1,2
SUMRY1,2
SEAWRD
DYNHYD
SEAWRD
REGAN
RUNKUT
DYNHYD
RUNKUT
RESTRT
SUMRY1,2
Friction coefficient for channel N.
Alphanumeric identifier to be printed as
part of output, (1=1,80)
Cross-sectional area of channel N, corre-
sponding to junction heads specified at
each end of the channel.
Cross-sectional area of channel N during
half time step.
Average depth of the channel used to cal
culate average volume of connecting
junction.
Average channel depth; calculated by sub-
routine MEAN.
Average flow in channel.
Average velocity in channel.
Value of the I-th tidal coefficient
(I = 1,7) for seaward boundary J,
obtained from program REGAN.
Bottom elevation above (or below) the
horizontal datum plane (usually)
taken to be mean sea level).
Head at junction J, at time DAY(L), HR(L),
MIN(L). Used for variable tides.
Width of channel N.
ft1/3
unit-
less
ft*
ft2
ft
ft
ft*/
sec
ft/
sec
uni t-
less
ft
ft
ft
*Denotes input variables
154
-------
VARIABLE
POUND IN
SUBROUTINE
DEFINITION
UNITS
BTIME(J,L)
BTMP
*CDIR(N)
*CFLOW(I)
*CLEN(N)
*CN(N)
CQIN(J)
CVOL
*DAY(K)
DEL
*DELT
SEAWRD
RUNKUT
DYNHYD
DYNHYD
WIND
DYNHYD
SUMRY1,2
DYNHYD
RUNKUT
RESTRT
SUMRY1,2
DYNHYD
RESTRT
DYNHYD
RUNKUT
DYNHYD
DYNHYD
WIND
REGAN
DYNHYD
DEAWRD
WIND
RUNKUT
RESTRT
SUMRY1,2
Time in seconds; calculated from DAY(L),
HR(L), and MIN(L) at junction J.
Corresponds to variable head (BHEAD(J,
K)).
Accumulative bottom elevation above (or
below) the horizontal datum plane
(usually taken to be mean sea level).
Channel direction, or angle in degrees
from the north. The channel direc-
tion points in the direction of posi-
tive flow, from the higher junction
number to the lower junction number.
Constant inflow (negative) or outflow
(positive) I.
Length of channel N.
Manning roughness coefficient for channel
N.
Constant inflow for junction J.
Channel volume (area * depth).
Day of tidal data point.
Residual error for calculating
Time interval used in solution.
sec
ft
degrees
ft3/
sec
ft
sec/
ft3/
sec
ft3
days
unit-
less
sec
155
-------
VARIABLE
DELTQ
DEP(N,1 )
DIFF
DT
DT2
DTIME(J)
DVDT
DVDT1
DVDT2
DVDT3
DVDT4
DVDX
DVOL
DY
DYDT
DYDX
POUND IN
SUBROUTINE
SUMRY1 , 2
SUMRY1 , 2
REGAN
DYNHYD
SEAWRD
RUNKUT
DYNHYD
SEAWRD
RUNKUT
SEAWRD
RUNKUT
RUNKUT
RUNKUT
RUNKUT
RUNKUT
RUNKUT
RUNKUT
RUNKUT
RUNKUT
RUNKUT
RUNKUT
DEFINITION
Time step for the quality program (DELTQ =
DELT * NODYN/3600) .
Hydraulic radius of channel N.
Difference in actual and predicted value of
tidal height.
Full time interval.
1/2 time interval.
Range between last variable tide data point
and first variable tide data point.
Total acceleration term.
Momentum acceleration term.
Friction acceleration term.
Gravity acceleration term.
Wind acceleration term.
Velocity gradient ( Av/Ax) in a
channel.
Differential junction volume for 1/2 time
step.
The average change in channel head over 1/2
time step.
The average rate of change of head in a
channel over 1/2 time step.
The water surface slope over a channel at
a 1/2 time step.
UNITS
hr
ft
ft
sec
sec
sec
ft/
sec2
ft/
sec2
ft/
see2
ft/
sec2
ft/
sec2
ft/
sec- ft
ft3
ft
ft/
sec:
ft/ft
156
-------
VARIABLE
*EDAY
*EHR
*EMIN
FLO(N,1)
*FPRINT
FW(N)
G
*HEADER
*ICRD
INTRVL
I PRINT
IREADW
ITAPE
IW
*JJ
*JPRT(I)
*JRCF(I)
FOUND IN
SUBROUTINE
DYNHYD
SUMRY1 , 2
DYNHYD
WIND
RUNKUT
DYNHYD
DYNHYD
SEAWRD
WIND
DYNHYD
DYNHYD
DYNHYD
DYNHYD
WIND
DYNHYD
SUMRY1 ,2
WIND
DYNHYD
SEAWRD
DYNHYD
DYNHYD
SUMRY1 , 2
DEFINITION
Ending day of simulation.
Ending hour of simulation.
Ending minute of simulation.
Flow at channel N.
Time which the first printout is desired.
Wind acceleration term.
Acceleration due to gravity (32.1739
ft/sec2) .
Alphanumeric identifier for each data group.
File containing initial conditions for junc-
tions and channels (defaults to Unit 5) .
Interval (in cycles) between printouts.
Printed output begins at this cycle, and each
INTRVL cycle thereafter.
Switch to read in wind data once.
Hydraulic parameters are stored on Unit 2
beginning at this cycle.
Counter
Junction number.
Specified junction for which printout is
desired (1=1, NOPRT) .
Junction receiving constant flow I.
UNITS
day
hr
min
ft3/
sec
hr
ft/
sec2
ft/
sec2
unit-
less
unit-
less
cycles
cycles
unit-
less
cycles
unit-
less
junc-
tion
junc-
tion
junc-
tion
157
-------
VARIABLE
*JRVF(I)
*J1-J5
KT
KT2
LTAPE
*MAXIT
*MAXRES
MIN(K)
MXCH
MXJU
MXNR
*NC
*NCFLOW
*NCHAN
(J,K)
POUND IN
SUBROUTINE
DYNHYD
SUMRY1 , 2
DYNHYD
SUMRY1 , 2
RUNKUT
RUNKUT
DYNHYD
SUMRY1 , 2
SEAWRD
REGAN
SEAWRD
REGAN
DYNHYD
WIND
SUMRY1 ,2
SUMRY1 , 2
SUMRY1 ,2
DYNHYD
WIND
RUNKUT
SUMRY1 , 2
DYNHYD
SUMRY1 ,2
DYNHYD
RUNKUT
RESTRT
SUMRY1 , 2
DEFINITION
Junction receiving variable flow I.
Specified junctions for results to be
printed.
Friction coefficient during full time step.
Friction coefficient during half time step.
Last hydraulic time step written to TAPE
Maximum number of iterations desired in the
run.
Maximum value of the residual allowed. Will
not be exceeded unless the number of
iterations reaches MAXIT before the resi-
dual reaches MAXRES. A value of 0.0001
is typically used.
Minute for data point.
Maximum number of rows in matrix transferred
to x. Another name is MXROW.
Maximum number of rows in matrix transferred
to x. Another name is MXROW.
Maximum number of columns in matrix trans-
ferred to x. Another name is MXCOL.
Number of channels in model network.
Number of constant flow inputs.
Channel number entering junction J. Maximum
number of channels entering a junction
equals 5 (K-1-5) .
UNITS
junc-
tion
junc-
tion
1/ft
1/ft
cycles
unit-
less
unit-
V
min
unit-
less
unit-
less
uni t-
less
chan-
nels
unit-
less
chan-
nel
158
-------
VARIABLE
POUND IN
SUBROUTINE
DEFINITION
UNITS
NCOEFF
NCOL
*NCYC
*NDATA
NH
*NINCR(I)
NINL
*NJ
*NJUNC
(N,K)
NK
NL
*NN
*NOBSW
*NODYN
REGAN
MEAN
DYNHYD
RESTRT
SEAWRD
REGAN
SUMRY1,2
DYNHYD
REGAN
DYNHYD
SUMRY1 ,2
SEAWRD
RUNKUT
DYNHYD
RUNKUT
SUMRY1,2
DYNHYD
RUNKUT
SUMRY1,2
SEAWRD
RUNKUT
DYNHYD
RUNKUT
DYNHYD
RESTRT
WIND
DYNHYD
SUMRY1,2
Number of coefficients used to describe
average tide (=7).
Number of columns in matrix X. Corre-
sponds to the number of data points.
Must be odd if NOPT = 1.
Total number of time steps (cycles to
be executed). If 0, is calculated
internally.
Number of input data points over a tidal
cycle. This information is used to
calculate the coefficients describing
the tide. Use as many data points as
possible.
Lower of the two junction numbers of each
end of channel N.
Number of increments in variable flow
record I.
Number of seaward boundaries plus one.
Number of junctions in the model network.
K = 1: Lower of the two junction numbers
at each end of channel N.
K = 2: Higher of the two junction numbers
at the end of channel N.
Number of coefficients used to specify tidal
input (= 7).
Higher of the two junction numbers at each
end of channel N.
Channel number.
Number of wind observations (number of wind
data sets).
Number of hydraulic time steps per quality
time step.
unit-
less
unit-
less
unit-
less
junc-
tion
unit-
less
unit-
less
junc-
tion
junc-
tion
unit-
less
junc-
tion
channel
unit-
less
unit-
less
159
-------
VARIABLE
*NOPRT
NRSTRT
NS
*NSEA
NTIDES
*NTV(J)
NX
NZERO
*N1-N5
*PERIOD(J)
*PINTVL
FRED
*PSHIFT
QCYC(I,K)
QINSAV(J)
POUND IN
SUBROUTINE
DYNHYD
DYNHYD
RESTRT
SEAWRD
RUNKUT
SEAWRD
RUNKUT
SEAWRD
SEAWRD
RUNKUT
DYNHYD
DYNHYD
DYNHYD
SEAWRD
DYNHLYD
REGAN
SEAWRD
REGAN
DYNHYD
SUMRY1 ,2
SUMRY1,2
DEFINITION UNITS
Number of junctions for which output is
desired.
Time at which SUMRY should start writing
flows and heads to tape for water quali-
ty simulation. Claculated from day, hr,
min.
NK/2. Number of sine and cosine terms in
relationship defining tidal input.
Number of seaward boundaries.
Number of tidal periods in simulation.
Number of variable tide data points. Use
only the highs and lows of a tiday
cycle, and be sure the first and last
are the same.
Number of data points for variable inflows
in junction I.
NRSTRT plus one.
Specified channels for DYNHYD check printout.
Tidal period. PERIOD is read in as hours,
but transformed to seconds within the
program.
Time interval between printouts.
Predicted value of tidal input.
Variable which shifts the phase angle in
the trigonometric relationship
(usually - 0) .
Hydrodynamic cycle (time step) at incre-
ment K in variable flow record I.
Inflow into junction j.
unit-
less
sec
unit-
less
unit-
less
periods
unit-
less
unit-
less
sec
channel
hr
hr
ft
radians
cycles
ft3/
sec
160
-------
VARIABLE
QINS(J,1 )
QTIME
RANGE(J)
RESID
*R(N)
RT(I)
SAREA
SASUM
SUM
*SUMRY
SUMQ
*SURF(J)
SXX(F,J)
SXY(J)
POUND IN
SUBROUTINE
SUMRY1 ,2
DYNHYD
SEAWRD
REGAN
DYNHYD
RUNKUT
SUMRY1 ,2
REGAN
DYNHYD
DYNHYD
REGAN
DYNHYD
SUMRY1
RUNKUT
DYNHYD
RUNKUT
REGAN
REGAN
DEFINITION
Inflow into junction J.
An intermediate variable giving the time in
seconds corresponding to a variable flow
VFLOW (I,K) .
Tidal range at junction J (RANGE(J) =
YMAX(J)- YMIN(J).
Residuals.
Hydraulic radius of channel N, taken as
the channel depth.
Time of the i^h specified data point on
the input tide (1=1, NDATA) .
Channel surface area (length * width).
Total channel surface area connected to
junction J.
Coefficients used in describing tidal
cycle (= A(K) ) .
Controls how hydrodynamic file 2 is pro-
cessed to create a permanent summary
file 4. If 0, no file created. If 1,
transient conditions are saved in a
formatted file. If 2, an unformatted
file is created.
Net flow into or out of a junction.
Surface area of junction J.
Sum of X squared in normalized regression
analysis equations.
Sum of x times Y in normalized regression
analysis equations.
UNITS
ft?/
sec
sec
ft
unit-
less
ft
hr
ft2
ft2
unit-
less
unit-
less
ft3/
sec
ft2
unit-
less
ft
161
-------
VARIABLE
POUND IN
SUBROUTINE
DEFINITION
UNITS
T2
TEND
TIME
TNEXTC
TREP(J)
TREPW
TRSTRT
*TSHIFT
*TSTART(J)
TVEL
(N,NA)
TZERO
VEL(N,1)
*VFLOW
DYNHYD
DYNHYD
RUNKUT
DYNHYD
SEAWRD
DYNHYD
RUNKUT
SEAWRD
WIND
DYNHYD
RESTRT
SEAWRD
REGAN
SEAWRD
RUNKUT
SUMRY1
DYNHYD
SEAWRD
WIND
SUMRY1,2
DYNHYD
SUMRY2
Total elapsed time, initialized to equal
TZERO and is incremented by DELT at the
start of each time step.
Total elapsed time for one half step
computation.
Ending time of simulation.
Total time.
Counter. Determines if tidal cycle should
start over.
Number of times the tidal cycle has been
repeated.
Number of times wind data has been
repeated.
Total elapsed time.
Variable that allows the time scale for
the inputs to be shifted (usually = 0).
Starting time for tidal input.
Average velocity in channel N.
(=AVGVEL).
Time at which computations begin. Allows
starting point to be anywhere on tidal
cycle.
Velocity at channel N.
Flow value at increment K in variable
flow record I. Negative values in-
dicate inflow. Linear interpolation
is used to derive flow values be-
tween increment K and K + 1.
sec
sec
hr
sec
sec
rep
rep
sec
hr
hr
ft/
sec
hr
ft/
sec
ft?/
sec
162
-------
VARIABLE
*V(N)
VOL(J)
VQ(I,J)
VQIN(J)
VT(N)
WANGL
WDELTA
WDELTS
WDELTT
*WDIR(I)
WINDA
WINDL
*WINDS(I)
WRSQ
W(SB)
WSLOPA
WSLOPS
FOUND IN
SUBROUTINE
DYNHYD
WIND
RUNKUT
SUMRY1 ,2
DYNHYD
RUNKUT
SUMRY1 ,2
DYNHYD
DYNHYD
RUNKUT
RUNKUT
WIND
WIND
WIND
WIND
WIND
WIND
WIND
WIND
WIND
SEAWRD
WIND
WIND
DEFINITION
Mean velocity in channel N.
Volume of junction J (average depth *
surface area) .
Incremental flow in junction.
Sum of variable flows into each junction.
2/PERIOD.
Wind direction relative to channel
direction.
Angle change between two consecutive wind
data points.
Wind speed change between two consecutive
data points.
Time change between two consecutive data
points.
Wind direction (degrees from North) .
Local interpolated wind angle.
Local interpolated wind speed.
Wind speed.
Relative wind speed (squared) .
Frequency (2 * TLY/tidal period).
Slope of line connecting two consecutive
wind angle data points.
Slope of line connecting two consecutive
wind speed data points.
UNITS
ft/sec
ft3
ft?/
sec
ft3/
sec
hr-1
radians
radians
ft/sec
sec
degrees
degrees
ft/sec
ft/sec
ft?/
sec
hr-1
unit-
less
unit-
less
163
-------
VARIABLE
WTIM(I)
X(J)
*Y(J)
*YSCALE
YSOM
YT(J)
YTMPS
*ZDAY
*ZHR
*ZMIN
POUND IN
SUBROUTINE
WIND
REGAN
REGAN
MEAN
SEAWRD
REGAN
MEAN
DYNHYD
RUNKUT
DYNHYD
DYNHYD
DYNHYD
DYNHYD
DEFINITION
Time corresponding to WINDS(I) and WDIR(I).
Coefficients for tidal cycle equation.
Initial head for junction J in reference
to a datum.
Scale factor; defaults to 1 .
Summation of transformed head.
Head at junction J during one-half time
step.
Sum of all heads for each junction.
Beginning day of simulation.
Beginning hour of simulation.
Beginning minute of simulation.
UNITS
sec
unit-
less
ft:
unit-
less
ft
ft
ft
day
hr
min
2.3. THE BASIC WATER QUALITY MODEL
2.3.1 Introduction
This section describes the input required to run the WASP water-quality
program. To arrange the input into a logical format, the data are divided
into 16 groups, A through P.
A - Model identification and System Bypass
B - Exchange Coefficients
C - Volumes
D - Flows
E - Boundary Concentrations
F - Waste Loads
G - Environmental Parameters
H - Chemical Constants
I - Time Functions
J - initial Concentrations
K - Stability and Accuracy Criteria
L - Intermediate Print Control
-------
M - integration Control
N - Print Tables
0 - Time Plots
P - Spatial Plots
The following is a brief explanation of each data group:
DATA GROUP A is generally for model identification and contains system
bypass options. The user must specify the number of segments and the number
of systems (EUTKWASP-8 systems, TOXIWASP-2 systems), refer to Table 19 for
listings. Also, Data Group A contains information concerning location of
Initial concentration and volume data.
TABLE 19. EUTROWASP SYSTEMS
1 . AMMONIA NITROGEN
2. NITRATE NITROGEN
3. ORTHO-PHOSPHATE PHOSPHORUS
4. PHYTOPLANKTON CARBON
5. CARBONACEOUS BOD
6. DISSOLVED OXYGEN
7. ORGANIC NITROGEN
8. ORGANIC PHOSPHORUS
TOXIWASP SYSTEMS
1. CHEMICAL
2. SEDIMENT
DATA GROUP B contains dispersive exchange coefficient information.
Dispersion occurs between segments and along a characteristic length.
DATA GROUP C supplies initial segment volume information.
DATA GROUP D supplies flow information between segments. Flows may
be constant or variable.
DATA GROUP E is a listing of concentrations for each system at the
boundaries. All system concentrations must be supplied for each boundary.
DATA GROUP F defines the waste loads and segments that receive the waste
loads. Loads may represent point or diffuse sources, and may be constant or
variable.
DATA GROUP G contains appropriate environmental characteristics of the
water body. TOXIWASP requires 18 parameters per segment, and EUTKWASP
requires 13. These parameters are spatially variable.
165
-------
DATA GROUP H contains appropriate chemical characteristics or constants.
TOXIWASP requires 66 constants, and EUTRWASP requires 48 constants.
DATA GROUP I contains appropriate environmental or kinetic time
functions. TOXIWASP requires 5 time functions, and EUTRWASP requires 14.
DATA GROUP J is a listing of initial concentrations for each segment and
each system.
DATA GROUP K contains maximum and minimum concentrations for each
system. If the system concentration exceeds this specification, the model
will shut down and notify the user.
DATA GROUP L allows the user to have tables printed during the simula-
tion. The system, segment and time interval must be specified.
DATA GROUP M supplies the program with the time step and ending time.
The program allows different time steps throughout simulation. User must
specify number of time steps to be used, step size, and period of time this
time step applies.
DATA GROUP N controls the tabular output. EUTRWASP has 4 display vari-
ables per system, and TOXIWASP has 8 display variables per system. Refer to
Tables 20 and 21 for a listing. These display variables may be printed for
any of the segments.
DATA GROUP O allows the user to plot any variable against time for any
segment. The maximum number of time curves on any one plot is 5, and one may
have as many plots as desired.
DATA GROUP P allows user to plot and overlay predicted and observed
variable data for any specific time. The maximum number of curves on any one
spatial plots is 5.
2.3.2 WASP3 Data Group Descriptions
2.3.2.1 DATA GROUP A: Model Identification and System Bypass Option—
VARIABLES
Record 1—Model Identification
MODEL = model designation.
ISER = series designation.
IRON = run number.
NOSEG = number of model segments.
166
-------
TABLE 20. EUTRWASP DISPLAY VARIABLES
SYSTEM _1
1. NH3: Ammonia, mg/L
2. FLOW: Flow, MCF/day
3. STP: Ambient segment temperature, °C
4. PNH3GI: Ammonia preference factor
SYSTEM 2
1 . NO3: Nitrate plus nitrate nitrogen, mg/L
2. TN: Total nitrogen, mg/L
3. TIN: Total inorganic nitrogen, mg/L
4. XEMP1: Nitrogen limitation factor for phytoplankton growth
SYSTEM 3
1. OPO4: Total ortho-phosphate phosphorus, mg/L
2. TP: Total phosphorus, mg/L
3. LIMIT: Nutrient limitation indicator
("+" = nitrogen, "-" = phosphorus)
4. XEMP2: Phosphorus limitation factor for phytoplankton
growth
SYSTEM 4
1 . TCHLAX: Phytoplankton chlorophyll a, ug/L
2. PHYT: Phytoplankton carbon, mg/L
3. RLIGHT: Light limitation factor for phytoplankton growth
4. RNUTR: Nutrient limitation factor for phytoplankton
growth
167
-------
TABLE 20. EUTRWASP DISPLAY VARIABLES (Continued)
SYSTEM 5
1 . CBOD: Carbonaceous BOD, mg/L
2. UBOD: Ultimate (30 day) BOD, mg/L
3. SOD: Sediment oxygen demand, g/m2.day
4. BODS: Five day BOD, mg/L
SYSTEM 6
1. DO: Dissolved oxygen, mg/L
2. DODEF: Dissolved oxygen deficit, mg/L
3. DOMIN: Minimum diurnal DO value, mg/L
4. DOMAX: Maximum diurnal DO value, mg/L
SYSTEM 7
1. ON: Organic nitrogen, mg/L
2. TON: Total organic nitrogen, mg/L
3. KA: Reaeration rate constant, day~1
4. GPP: Ambient phytoplankton growth rate, day1
SYSTEM 8
1. OP: Organic phosphorus, mg/L
2. TOP: Total organic phosphorus, mg/L
3. RATIO: Inorganic nitrogen to phosphorus ratio
4. SKE: Ambient light extinction coefficient, ft"1
168
-------
TABLE 21. TOXIWASP DISPLAY TABLES
SYSTEM 1
1 . CHEM: Chemical concentration, mg/L
2. CHEM1 : Chemical dissolved in water phase, mg/L
3. CHEMS: Chemical sorbed onto sediment, mg/L
4. CHEMB: Chemical sorbed onto biological phase, mg/L
5. ALPHACI): Dissolved fraction
6. ALPHA(2): Sorbed (sediment) fraction
7. XMASS: Mass of chemical in segment, kg
8. BMASS: Mass of chemical lost from segment due to burial or
volatilization, kg
SYSTEM 2
1 . SED: Sediment concentration, mg/L
2. DEPTHG: Segment depth, ft
3. TOTKL: Total first-order decay rate constant, day"1
4. PHOTKLs Photolysis decay rate constant, hr~1
5. HYDRKL: Hydrolysis decay rate constant, hr~1
6. BIOLKL: Biodegradation decay rate constant, hr"1
7. OXIDKL: Oxidation decay rate constant, hr"1
8. VOLKL: Volatilization decay rate constant, hr"1
169
-------
NOSYS
LISTG
LISTC
ICRD
DAY
HR
MIN
TITLE
number of systems.
0, print input data for exchange coefficients, volumes,
flows, and boundary conditions on the principal output
device.
1, do not print input data for exchange coefficients,
volumes, flows, and boundary conditions.
0, print input data for forcing functions, segment para-
meters, constants, miscellaneous time functions, and
initial conditions on the principal output device.
1, do not print input for forcing functions, segment
parameters, constants, miscellaneous time functions,
and initial conditions.
file number containing initial conditions, if equal
to 5, concentrations are read from data set. If
equal to 8, concentrations are read from a file
created by Subroutine RESTART from a previous run.
beginning day of simulation (day).
beginning hour of simulation (hour).
beginning minute of simulation (min).
Name of data group.
MODEL, ISER, IRON and TITLE assist the user in maintaining a log of computer
simulations, but are not actually used by the WASP program.
TITLE
TITLE
SYSBY(K) =
Record 2—Title information
Description of the water body (to be printed on
the output).
Record 3—Simulation Option
Description of simulation (to be printed on the
output) .
Record 4—Systems Bypass Option
0, perform the kinetic and transport phenomena
associated with system K (numerically integrate the
differential equations).
1, bypass all kinetic and transport phenomena associated
with system K (concentrations read as initial conditions
170
-------
There will be NOSYS entries in Record 4 (K » 1, NOSYS).
ORGANIZATION OF RECORDS
Each record in Data Group A is input once; therefore, Data Group A
will consist of the first four lines of data. Because Record 4 can contain
40 entries (12 format), all NOSYS entries for SYSBY(K) will fit on one line.
2.3.2.2 DATA GROUP B: Exchange Coefficients
The exchange coefficients may be input in one of two basic ways. The
first reads in bulk exchange rates directly whereas the second calculates
them from input dispersion coefficients and accompanying cross-sectional
areas and characteristic lengths. There are six data input options. Records
1 and 2, described below, are identical in all six data group options. The
variable IROPT, in Record 1, determines which option to use. The remaining
records are described under each data group.
VARIABLES
Record 1—Data Input Option
IROPT « 1, constant exchange rates.
= 2, all exchange rates proportional to one piecewise
linear approximation.
» 3, each exchange rate represented by its own piecewise
linear approximation.
« 4, constant exchange rates calculated from the dispersion
coefficient, cross-sectional area, and characteristic
lengths specified for each interface.
= 5, all exchange coefficients proportional to one piece-
wise linear approximation, calculated from a piecewise
linear dispersion coefficient approximation, respective
cross-sectional areas, and characteristic lengths.
= 6, each exchange rate proportional to its own piecewise
linear approximation, calculated from a piecewise linear
approximation for the dispersion coefficients, cross-
sectional areas, and characteristic length specified for
each interface.
NOR = number of exchange rates.
If no exchange rates are to be read, set NOR equal to zero, and continue
with DATA Group C.
171
-------
TITLE
Name of data group.
SCALR
CONVR
Record 2—Scale and Conversion Factors
scale factor for exchange coefficients. All exchange
coefficients will be multiplied by this factor.
units conversion factor for exchange coefficients.
Exchange coefficients are expected to be in million
cubic feet per day in options 1, 2 and 3 (B.1, B.2 and
B.3). If the exchange coefficients are given in SI units
(cubic meters per second), this factor will be 3.051.
Options B.4, B.5 and B.6 require the dispersion
coefficient to be in square miles per day, the area in
square feet, and the length in feet. The conversion of
sq. mi. - feet/day to MCF/day for options 4, 5, and 6 is
handled internally in WASP. If the dispersion coeffi-
cient, area and length are given in square meters per
day, square meters and meters, respectively, CONVR will
be 1.267 x 10-6.
2.3.2.2.1 DATA GROUP B.1
VARIABLES
Record 3—Exchange Coefficients
BR(K)
IR(K), JR(K)
exchange coefficient between segments IR(K) and
JR(K) in million cubic feet per day.
segments between which exchange takes place. The
order of the segments is not important; if a segment
exchanges with a boundary, the boundary is specified
as zero.
1 , NOR
RBY(K)
Record 4—Exchange Bypass Option
0, exchange phenomena occurs in system K.
1, bypass exchange phenomena for system K (effectively
set all exchange coefficients equal to zero for system K)
K = 1 , NOSYS
172
-------
ORGANIZATION OP RECORDS
Records 1 and 2 are entered once in Data Group B.1, occupying one line
each. Record 3, however, is repeated as many times as needed to satisfy NOR
sets of BR(K), IR(K) and JR(K). For example, if NOR = 4, Record 3 would
occupy one line of data, since four entries fit on one 80-space line. NOR =
10 would require three lines of data. No matter how many physical lines are
used to complete NOR entries, all the lines are considered "Record 3".
After NOR entries have been entered in Record 3, the following line
begins Record 4. All NOSYS entries will fit on one line.
2.3.2.2.2 DATA GROUP B.2
VARIABLES
Record 3—-Exchange Coefficient Data
BR(K) = ratio of the exchange coefficient between segments
IR(K) and JR (K) to the piecewise linear approxima-
tion.
IR(K), JR(K) = segments between which exchange takes place.
The order of the segments is not important; if a
segment exchanges with a boundary, the boundary is
specified as zero.
K = 1 , NOR
Record 4—Number of Breaks
NOBRK = number of values and times used to describe the piece-
wise linear approximation to the time function.
Record 5—Piecewise Linear Approximation
RT(K) = value of the approximation at time T(K), in million cubic
feet per day.
T(K) = time in days; if the length of the simulation exceeds
T(NOBRK), the piecewise linear approximation will repeat
itself, starting at time T(1); i.e., the approximation is
assumed to be periodic with period equal to T(NOBRK),
this holds true for all piecewise linear functions time.
K = 1 , NOBRK
Record 6—Exchange Bypass Option
RBY(K) = 0, exchange phenomena occurs in system K.
173
-------
1, bypass exchange phenomena for system K (effectively
set all exchange coefficients equal to zero for system K)
1 , NO SYS
ORGANIZATION OF RECORDS
In Data Group B.2, Records 1 and 2 are entered once. Record 3, however,
will be repeated until NOR sets of BR(K), IR(K) and JR(K) are satisfied.
Four sets will fit on one 80-space line (see the format listed for Record 3
in the accompaning tables). All the physical lines containing the BR(K),
IR(K) and JR(K) data are considered "Record 3", even though more than one
"record" (line) may actually be used.
After NOR sets have been entered, input Record 4 on the next line.
Record 5, starting on the line after Record 4, will continue as Record 3 did,
repeating until NOBRK sets of RT(K) and T(K) are entered. Four sets will
fit on one 80-space line, as indicated in the table.
When NOBRK sets have been entered, input record 6 on the following
line. Record 6 will have NOSYS entries.
2.3.2.2.3 DATA GROUP B.3
VARIABLES
Record 3—-Exchange Placement
IR(K), JR(K) «• segments between which exchange takes place. The order
of the segments is not important; if a segment exchanges
with a boundary, the boundary is specified as zero.
NOBRK = number of values and times used to describe the
piecewise linear approximation. All exchanges must
have the same number of breaks, and all breaks must
occur at the same time relative to each other.
K = 1 , NOR
Record 4—Piecewise Linear Approximation
RT(K) « value of the piecewise linear approximation at time T(K)
in million cubic feet per day.
T(K) = time in days. 'All break times must agree for all seg
ments, i.e., T(1) must be the same for all exchanges,
T(2) must be the same for all exch'anges, etc.
K = 1 , NOBRK
174
-------
Record 5—Exchange Bypass Options
RBY(K) = 0, exchange phenomena occur in system K.
= 1, bypass exchange phenomena for system K (effectively
set all exchange coefficients equal to zero for system K).
K = 1 , NOSYS
ORGANIZATION OF RECORDS
Records 1 and 2 are entered once in Data Group B.3 in the format listed
in Table B.3. Records 3 and 4, grouped together, are repeated until NOR pairs
have been entered. Within each Record 3-Record 4 set, Record 3 is input once
and Record 4 is repeated, as necessary, until NOBRK sets of RT(K) and T(K)
have been entered. Four sets of RT(K) and T(K) will fit on each 80-space
line.
After NOR sets of Records 3 (with accompanying Record 4's) have been
input, enter record 5. Record 5 will occupy one line and have NOSYS entries.
2.3.2.2.3 DATA GROUP B.4
Record 3—Data to Calculate Exchange Coefficients
E(K) = dispersion coefficient for the interface between segment
IR(K), and JR(K) in square, miles/day.
A(K) = the interfacial cross-sectional area between segments
IR(K) and JR(K), in square feet.
IL(K) = the length of segment IR(K), with respect to the IL(K)-
JL(K) interface, in feet.
JL(K) = the length of segment JR(K) in the relation to the
IR(K)-JR(K) interface, in feet. If a segment exchanges
with a boundary, the characteristic length of the
boundary should be set equal to the length of the
segment with which it is exchanging.
IR(K), JR(K) = segments between which exchange takes place. The order
of the segments is not important; if a segment exchanges
with a boundary, the boundary is specified as zero.
K = 1 , NOR
Record 4—Exchange Bypass Option
RBY(K) = 0, exchange phenomena occurs in system K.
175
-------
1, bypass exchange phenomena for system K (effectively
set all exchange coefficients equal to zero for system K,
K = 1, NOSYS
ORGANIZATION OF RECORDS
As in all the B data groups, Records 1 and 2 are entered once in Delta
Group B.4. Record 3 is repeated as necessary until NOR sets of E(K), A(K),
IL(K), JL(K), IR(K) and JR(K) have been entered (two sets per line). After
NOR sets are input, enter record 4 on the following line. Record 4 has
NOSYS entries.
2.3.2.2.5 DATA GROUP B.5
VARIABLES
Record 3—Data to Calculate Exchange Coefficients
E(K) = the ratio of the dispersion coefficient between segment
IR(K) and JR(K) to the piecewise linear approximation.
A(K) = the interfacial cross-sectional area between segments
IR(K) and JR(K), in square feet.
IL(K) = the length of segment IR(K) in relation to the IR(K)-
JR(K), in square feet.
JL(K) = the length of segment JR(K) in relation to the IR(K)-
JR(K) interface, in feet. If a segment exchanges with a
boundary, the characteristic length of the boundary
should be set equal to the length of the segment with
which it is exchanging.
IR(K), JK(K) = segments between which exchange takes place. The order
of the segments is not important.
K = 1 , NOR
Record 4—Number of Breaks
NOBRK = number of values and times used to describe the pieceswise
linear approximation to the time function.
Record 5—Piecewise Linear Approximation
RT(K) = value of the piecewise linear approximation at time T(K),
in square miles/day.
T(K) = time in days.
176
-------
K = 1, NOBRK
Record 6—Exchange Bypass Option
RBY(K) = 0, exchange phenomena occurs in system K.
= 1, bypass exchange phenomena for system K (effectively
sets all exchange coefficients equal to zero for system
K).
K = 1, NOSYS
ORGANIZATION OF RECORDS
Records 1 and 2 are entered once in Data Group B.5. Record 3 uses as
many lines as needed to input NOR sets of E(K), A(K), IL(K), JL(K), IR(K)
and JR(K). Two sets will fit on each 80-space line. Record 4, following
Record 3, occupies one line. Record 5 uses as many lines as needed to enter
NOBRK sets of RT(K)and T(K). Four RT(K)-T(K) pairs can be entered on each
line. After NOBRK sets have been entered, input record 6 on the following
line. Record 6 has NOSYS entries.
2.3.2.2.6 DATA GROUP B.6
VARIABLES
Record 3—Exchange Data
IR(K), JR(K) = segments between which exchange takes place. The order
of the segments is not important.
NOBRK = number of values and times used to describe the piecewise
linear approximation. All NOR exchanges must have the
same number of breaks, and all breaks must occur at the
same time relative to one another.
K = 1 , NOR
Record 4—Piecewise Linear Approximation
RT(K) = value of the piecewise linear approximation at time T(K) ,
in square miles/day.
T(K) = time in days; all break times must agree for all segments,
i.e., T(1) must be the same for all exchanges, T(2) must
be the same for all exchanges, etc.
K = 1 , NOBRK
177
-------
Record 5—Cross-Sectional Area, Characteristic Lengths
A(K) = the interfacial cross-sectional area between segment
IR(K) and JR(K) in square feet.
IL(K) = the length of segment IR(K) in relation to the IR(K)-
JR(K) interface, in feet.
JL(K) = the length of segment JR(K) in relation to the IR(K)-
JR(K) interface in feet.
K = 1, NOR
If a segment exchanges with a boundary, the characteristic length of the
boundary should be set equal to the length of the segment with which it is
exchangi ng.
Record 6—Exchange Bypass Option
RBY(K) = 0, exchange occurs in system K.
= 1, bypass exchange phenomena for system K (effectively
set for all exchange coefficients equal to zero for
system K).
ORGANIATION OF RECORDS
Records 1 and 2 are entered once in Data Group B.6. Records 3, 4 and
5 are a set and are repeated NOR times, within each set, Record 3 will be
entered once (i.e., occupy one line) and record 5 will be entered once.
Record 4, having NOBRK entries, will use multiple lines. Four entries will
fit on each 80-space line. Records 3, 4 and 5 are input sequentially in
each NOR set.
After NOR sets of Records 3, 4 and 5 have been entered, input Record 6
on the following line. Record 6 has NOSYS entries.
2.3.2.3 DATA GROUP C: Volumes
VARIABLES
Record 1 —Preliminary Data
IVOPT = 1, constant volumes.
= 2, 3 volumes adjusted to maintain flow continuity.
TITLE = Name of data group.
178
-------
Record 2—Scale Factor for Volumes
SCALV = scale factor for volumes. All volumes will be multiplied
by this factor.
CONVV = scale factor for volumes. Volumes are expected in
million cubic feet (MCF). If volumes are given in SI
units (cubic meters), this factor will be 3.531 x
10-5.
Record 3—Volumes of Segments
VOL(K) = volumes of segment K, in million cubic feet.
K = 1 , NOSBG (from Card Group A)
ORGANIZATION OF RECORDS
Records 1 and 2 are entered once in Data Group C. Record 3 is repeated,
as needed, until NOSEG entries are input. Eight entries will fit on one 80-
space line, if ICRD = 8 in Data Group A, then volumes are read from the
restart file (RESTART.OUT), and Record 3 should not be included in the input
data set.
2.3.2.4 DATA GROUP D: Flows
Data Group D consists of the flows that are used in the model. There
are four options available (D.1, D.2, D.3, and D.5). Records 1 and 2,
discussed first, are the same in all four options. IQOPT, in Record 1,
determines which option to use. The remaining records are explained under
each data group.
VARIABLES
Record 1—Data Input Option; Number of Flows
IQOPT = 1, constant flows.
= 2, all flows proportional to one piecewise linear
approximation.
= 3, each flow is represented by its own piecewise linear
approximation.
= 4, flows are read in from an unformatted file (SUMRY2.
OUT) created by DYNHYD3.
= 5, flows are read in from an unformatted file created by
DYNHYD3 (SUMRY2.OUT).
179
-------
NOQ = number of flows.
TITLE = name of data group.
If no flows are to be input, set NOQ to zero, and go to Card Group E.
Record 2 — Scale Factor for Flows
SCALQ = scale factor for flows. All flows will be multiplied
by this factor.
CONVQ = units conversion factor for flows. Flows are expected
to be in cubic feet per second (cfs). If flows are
given in SI units (cubic meters per second), this factor
will be 35.31.
2.3.2.3.1 DATA GROUP D.1
VARIABLES
Record 3—Flow Routing
B.Q(K) = flow between segment IQ(K) and JQ(K) in cfs. WASP
convention is: if the flow value is positive, then flow
is from segment JQ(K) to IQ(K).
IQ(K) = upstream segment.
JQ(K) = downstream segment.
K = 1 , NOQ
If flow is from a segment to a boundary, then JQ(K) is set equal to
zero; if a flow is from a boundary to a segment, then IQ(K) is set equal
to zero.
Record 4—Flow Bypass Option
QBY(K) = 0, flow tranport occurs in system K.
= 1, bypass the flow transport for system K (effectively
set all flows equal to zero in system K).
K = 1, NOSYS
The flow bypass option permits the flow transport to be set equal to
zero in one or more systems, while maintaining the flow regime in the
remaining systems.
180
-------
ORGANIZATION OF RECORDS
Records 1 and 2 are entered once in D.1, occupying one 80-space line
each. Record 3 uses as many lines are needed to enter NOQ sets of BQ(K),
IQ(K) and JQ(K). Four sets will fit on each line. Record 4 has NOSYS
entries and occupies one line.
2.3.2.4.2 DATA GROUP D.2
BQ(K)
IQ(K)
JQ(K)
VARIABLES
Record 3 — Flow Routing
ratio of the flow between segments IQ(K) and JQ(K) to
the piecewise linear flow approximation.
upstream segment.
downstream segment.
1 , NOQ
If flow is from a segment to a boundary, then JQ(K) is set equal to zero;
if a flow is from a boundary to a segment, then IQ(K) is set equal to zero.
Record 4 — Number of Breaks
NOBRK = number of values and times used to describe the piecewise
linear approximation.
Record 5 — Piecewise Linear Flow
QT(K) = value of the piecewise linear approximation at time T(K) ,
in cubic feet per second.
T(K) = time in days. If the length of the simulation exceeds
T(NOBRK), the broken line function will repeat itself,
starting at time T(1), i.e., the approximation is assumed
to be periodic, with period equal to T(NOBRK).
K ~ 1 , NOBRK
Record 6 — Flow Bypass Option
QBY(K) = 0, flow tranport occurs in system K.
= 1, bypass the flow transport for system K (effectively
sets all flows equal to zero in system K) .
1 , NOSYS
181
-------
The flow bypass option permits the flow transport to be set equal to
zero in one or more systems, while maintaining the flow regime in the
remaining systems.
ORGANIZATION OF RECORDS
Record 1 and 2 are input once in D.2. Record 3 uses as many 80-space
lines as needed to enter NOQ sets of BQ(K), IQ(K) and JQ(K). Four sets
will fit on one line. After NOQ sets have been input, enter Record 4 on
the following line. Record 5 will have NOBRK sets of QT(K)-T(K) and uses
as many lines as necessary to enter them (four sets per line). Record 6
occupies one line and will have NOSYS entries.
2.3.2.4.3 DATA GROUP D.3
VARIABLES
Record 3—Flow Routing
IQ(K) = upstream segment flow from segment IQ(K) to JQ(K),
assuming positive flow.
JQ(K) = downstream segment flow from segment JQ(K), assuming
positive flow.
NOBRK = number of values and times used to describe the broken
line approximation. All NOQ flows must have the same
number of breaks, and all breaks must occur at the same
time relative to one another.
K = 1 , NOQ
Record 4—Piecewise Linear Approximation
QT(K) = value of the piecewise linear flow approximation at time
T(K) in cfs.
T(K) = time in days. If the length of the simulation exceeds
T(NOBRK), the broken line function will repeat itself,
stating at time, T(1). All break times must agree for
all flows, i.e., T(1) must be the same for all flows,
T(2) must be the same, etc.
K = 1, NOBRK
182
-------
Record 5—Flow Bypass Option
QBY(K) = 0, flow transport occurs in system K.
= 1, bypass the flow transport for system K (effectively
sets all flows equal to zero in system K).
K = 1, NOSYS
The flow bypass option permits the flow transport to be set equal to
zero in one or more systems, while maintaining the flow regime in the
remaining systems.
ORGANIZATION OP RECORDS
As in the other D data groups, Records 1 and 2 are entered once in Data
Group D.3, using one 80-space line for each record. Records 3 and 4 are then
grouped together and repeated NOQ times. Within each set, Record 3 is input
once (using one line) and Record 4 uses as many lines as needed to enter
NOBRK sets of QT(K)-T(K). Four QT(K)-T(K) sets will fit on one line.
After NOQ sets of Record 3 - Record 4 have been input, enter Record 5
on the following line. Record 5 will have NOSYS entries.
2.3.2.4.4 DATA GROUP D.5
VARIABLES
Record 3—Seaward Boundaries
NSEA
JSEA(I)
JUNSEG(I)
QBY(K)
number of downstream (seaward) boundary segments (same as
in hydrodynamic simulation).
segment numbers for downstream boundary segments.
1=1, NSEA
Record 4—Junction-Segment Map
segment number corresponding to hydrodynamic junction I.
I = 1 , NJ
Record 5—Flow Bypass Option
0, flow transport occurs in system K.
1, bypass the flow transport for system K (effectively
set all flows equal to zero in system K).
183
-------
ORGANIZATION OF RECORDS
As in other D data groups, Records 1 and 2 are entered once in Data
Group D.5, using one 80-space line for each record. Records 3, 4, 5 and 6
follow in order. Record 4 will be repeated enough times to handle NJ
entries. Record 5 will have NOSYS entries.
2.3.2.5 DATA GROUP E: Boundary Concentrations
Data Group E is repeated, in its entirety, NOSYS times. There are three
options for Data Group E (E.1, E.2 and E.3). Each time E is repeated, a
different option may be used.
Records 1 and 2 are identical in all three options. IBCOP(K), in Record
1, determines the option for each system.
VARIABLES
Record 1—Data Input Option—number of Boundary Conditions
IBCOP(K) = 1, constant boundary conditions.
= 2, all boundary conditions proportional to one piecewise
linear approximation.
= 3, each boundary condition represented by its own
piecewise linear approximation.
NOBC(K) = number of boundary conditions used for system K.
TITLE = name of data group
K « 1, NOSYS
If no boundary conditions are to be input, set NOBC(K) equal to zero
and either continue with the next system or go to the next card group.
Record 2—Scale Factor for Boundary Conditions
SCALE = scale factor for boundary conditions. All boundary
conditions will be multiplied by this factor.
CONVB = unit conversion factor for boundary conditions.
Boundary conditions are expected to be in milligrams
per liter (mg/1). If boundary conditions are given in
SI units (grams ber cubic meter), CONVB will be 1.0.
-------
2.3.2.5.1 DATA GROUP E.1
VARIABLES
Record 3—Boundary Conditions
BBC(K) = boundary condition of segment IBC(K) in mg/1.
IBC(K) = segment number to which boundary condition BBC(K) is to
be applied.
K = 1, NOBC
ORGANIZATION OF RECORDS
Records 1 and 2 are input once in E.1. Record 3 has NOBC entries and is
repeated as necessary until all are entered (five entries per 80-space line).
2.3.2.5.2 DATA GROUP E.2
VARIABLES
Record 3—Boundary Conditions
BBC(K) = ratio of the boundary condition for segment IBC(K) to the
piecewise linear approximation.
IBC(K) - segment number.
K = 1 , NOBC
Record 4—Number of Breaks
NOBRK = number of values and times used to describe the piecewise
linear approximation.
Record 5—Piecewise Linear Boundary Conditions (Approx)
BCT(K) = value of the broken line approximation at time T(K) in
mg/1.
T(K) = time at breaks in broken line approximation, in days.
K = 1, NOBRK
If the length of the simulation exceeds T(NOBRK), the piecewise linear
approximation is repeated, starting at T(1), i.e., the approximation is
assumed to be period equal to T(NOBRK).
185
-------
ORGANIZATION OF RECORDS
In E.2, Records 1 and 2 are entered once. Record 3, having NOBC entries,
uses as many 80-space lines as needed to input all entries. Five entries (one
entry is one BBC(K)-IBC(K) set) will fit on one line. Record 4 uses one line.
Record 5 has NOBRK entries and is repeated as necessary until all are entered.
Four pairs of BCT(K)-T(K) will fit on each line.
2.3.2.5.3 DATA GROUP E.3
VARIABLES
Record 3—Boundary Conditions
IBC(K) = boundary segment number.
NOBRK(K) = number of values and times used to describe the brokesn
line approximation. The number of breaks must be equal
for all boundary conditions within a system.
K = 1, NOBC
Record 4—Piecewise Linear Bound. Cond. (Approx.)
BCT(K) = value of the boundary approximation at time T(K) in mg/1.
T(K) = time in days. If the length of the simulation exceeds
T(NOBRK), the broken line approximation is repeated,
starting at T(1), i.e., the approximation is assumed
to be periodic, with period equation to T(NOBRK). All
break times must agree for all segment, i.e., T(1) must
be the same for all exchanges, T(2) must be the same for
all exchanges, etc.
K = 1 , NOBRK
ORGANIZATION OF RECORDS
Records 1 and 2 are entered once in E.3. Records 3 and 4 are a set and
are repeated NOBC times. Within each NOBC set, Record 3 is entered once and
Record 4 is repeated until NOBRK entries are input. Four entries (four
BCT(K)-T(K) pairs) will fit on each 80-space line.
2.3.2.6 DATA GROUP F: Waste Loads
Data Group F contains the loads used in the model. Like Data Group E,
Data Group F is repeated NOSYS times for point source loads. F.1, F.2 or F.3
may be used each time F is repeated. Records 1 and 2 are identical in all
186
-------
three data groups; IWKOP(K) in Record 1 determines the data group used.
Following complete specification of point source loads, nonpoint
source loads will be read from Data Group F.4 if LOPT was set greater than
zero.
VARIABLES
Record 1—Data Input Option; No. of Forcing Functions
IWKOP(ISYS) = 1, constant forcing functions.
= 2, all forcing functions are proportional to one piece-
wise linear approximation.
= 3, each forcing function represented by its own piecewise
linear approximation.
NOWK(ISYS) = number of forcing functions used for system ISYS. Forc-
ing functions may also be considered as sources (loads)
or sinks of a water quality constituent. If no forcing
functions are to be input, set NOWK(ISYS) to zero, and
continue with next system or go to next data group.
LOPT = option to read in Data Group F.4 for nonpoint source
loads. If LOPT is greater than zero, then Data Group
F.4 will be read following completion of F.1 , F.2, or
F.3 for all systems. LOPT is entered for ISYS=1 only.
TITLE = name of data group.
Record 2—Scale Factor for Forcing Functions
SCALW = scale factor for forcing functions. All forcing
functions will be multiplied by this factor.
CONVW = unit conversion factor for forcing functions.
Forcing functions are expected to be in pounds per day.
If forcing functions are given in SI units (kilograms per
day), this factor will be 2.205.
2.3.2.6.1 DATA GROUP F.1
VARIABLES
Record 3—Forcing Functions
BWK(K) = forcing function of segment IWK(K), in pounds/day.
187
-------
IWK(K) = segment number to which forcing function BWK(K) is to
be applied.
K = 1, NOWK
ORGANIZATION OF RECORDS
Records 1 and 2 are entered once in F.1. Record 3 has NOWK entries
and uses as many 80-space lines as needed to enter all NOWK entries. Five
entries (five BWK(K)-IWK(K) pairs) will fit on one line.
2.3.2.6.2 DATA GROUP F.2
VARIABLES
Record 3—Forcing Functions
BWK(K) = ratio of the forcing function for segment IWK(K) to the
piecewise linear approximation.
IWK(K) = segment number to which forcing function BWK(K) is to be
applied.
K = 1, NOWK
Record 4—Number of Breaks
NOBRK = number of values and times used to describe the piecewise
linear approximation.
Record 5—piecewise Linear Approximation
WKT(K) = value of the forcing function at time T(K), in pounds/day.
T(K) = time in days. If the length of the simulation exceeds
T(NOBRK), the forcing function approximation is repeated,
starting at T(1), i.e., the approximation is assumed to
be periodic, with period equal to T(NOBRK).
K = 1, NOBRK
ORGANIZATION OF RECORDS
In F.2, Records 1, 2 and 4 are entered once. Record 3 (entered before
Record 4) has NOWK entries and will be repeated until all are input. Five
entries (BWK(K)-IWK(K) pairs) will fit on one 80-space line. Record 5 has
NOBRK entries and will be repeated until all are entered. Four entries
(WKT(K)-T(K) pairs) will fit on each 80-space line.
188
-------
2.3.2.6.3 DATA GROUP F.3
VARIABLES
Record 3—Forcing Functions
IWK(K) = segment number that has forcing function BWK(K).
NOBRK(K) = number of breaks used to describe the forcing function
approximation. The number of breaks must be equal for
all forcing functions within a system.
K = 1, NOWK
Record 4—Piecewise Linear Approximation
WKT(K) = value of the forcing function at time T(K), in pounds/day.
T(K) = time in days. If the length of the simulation exceeds
T(NOBRK), the approximation is repeated, starting at
T(1), i.e., the approximation is assumed to be periodic
with period equal to T(NOBRK). All break times must
agree for all segments; i.e., T(1) must be the same for
all boundary conditions, T(2) must be the same for all
boun. cond., etc.
K = 1, NOBRK
ORGANIZATION OF RECORDS
In F.3, Records 1 and 2 are input once. Records 3 and 4 are a set and
are repeated (as a set) NOWK times, within each set, Record 3 is entered
once and Record 4 is repeated until all NOBRK entries are entered. Four
entries (WKT(K)-T(K) pairs) will fit on each 80-space line.
2.3.2.6.4 DATA GROUP F.4
VARIABLES
Record 1—Number of Runoff Loads, Initial Day
NOWKS = number of segments receiving runoff loads.
NPSDAY = the time in the runoff file corresponding to the initial
simulation time, in days.
189
-------
Record 2—Scale Factor for Runoff Loads
SCALN = scale factor for runoff loads. All runoff loads will be
multiplied by this factor.
CONVN = unit conversion factor for runoff loads. Runoff loads
are expected in pounds per day. if runoff loads are
given in SI units (kilograms per day), this factor will
be 2.205.
Record 3—Runoff Segments
INPS(J) = segment number to which runoff load J is applied.
J = 1,NOWKS
Record 4—Print Specifications
KT1 = initial day for which nonzero runoff loads from file
NPS.DAT will be printed.
KT2 = final day for which nonzero runoff loads from file
NPS.DAT will be printed.
KPRT(I) = indicator specifying whether nonzero runoff loads will be
printed for each system. If KPRT(I) is greater than
zero, then runoff loads will be printed for system I,
I = 1 ,NOSYS
ORGANIZATION OF RECORDS
Records 1 and 2 are entered once in Data Group F.4. Record 3 has NOWKS
entries and uses as many 80-space lines as needed to enter all NOWKS segment
numbers. Sixteen entries will fit on one line. Record 4 is entered once.
2.3.2.7 DATA GROUP G: Parameters
The definition of the parameters will vary, depending upon the structure
and kinetics of the systems comprising each model. The input format, however,
is constant.
VARIABLES
Record 1 -—Number of Parameters
NOPAM = number of parameters required by the model, if no
parameters are to be input, set NOPAM to zero and go to
Data Group H.
190
-------
TITLE = name of data group.
Record 2—Scale Factors for Parameters
SCALP(K) = scale factor for parameter K.
K = 1 , NOPAM
Record 3—-Segment Parameters.
ANAME(K) = an optional one to five alphanumeric character
descriptive name for parameter PARAM(ISEG,K).
PARAM(ISEG,K) = the value of parameter ANAME(K) in segment ISEG.
K = 1, NOPAM
ISEG = 1, NOSEG
ORGANIZATION OF RECORDS
Record 1 is input once in Data Group G, occupying one line. Record 2
has NOPAM entries. Eight entries will fit on one line; thus, Record 2 uses
as many 80-space lines as needed to enter all NOPAM entries. Record 3 also
has NOPAM entries and uses multiple lines. Five entries will fit per line.
2.3.2.8 DATA GROUP H: Constants—
The definition of the constants will vary, depending upon the structure
and kinetics of the systems comprising each model.
VARIABLES
Record 1 —Number of Constants
NCONS = number of constants required by the model.
TITLE = name of data group.
If no constants are to be input, set NCONS equal to zero and continue
with the Data Group I.
Record 2—Constants
ANAME(K) = an optional one to five alpha-numeric character
descriptive name for constant CONST(K).
CONST(K) = the value of constant ANAME(K).
191
-------
K = 1 , NCONS
ORGANIZATION OF RECORDS
Record 1 is entered once in Cata Group H. Record 2 has NCONS entries
and uses as many 80-space lines as needed to input all NCONS entries. Five
entries (ANAME(K)-CONST(K) pairs) will fit per line.
2.3.2.9 DATA GROUP I: Miscellaneous Time Functions—
The definition of the miscellaneous time function will vary depending
upon the structure and the kinetics of the systems comprising each model.
The input format, however, is constant.
VARIABLES
Record 1 —Number of Time Functions
NFUNC = number of time functions required by the model, if no
time functions are to be input, set NFUNC equal to zero
and go to Card Group K.
TITLE = name of data group.
Record 2—Time Function Descriptions
ANAME(K) = an optional one to five alphanumeric character
descriptive name for the time function K.
NOBRK(K) = number of breaks used to describe the time function K.
K = 1, NFUNC
Record 3—Time Functions
VALT(K) = value of the function at time T(K).
T(K) = time in days. If the length of the simulation exceeds
T(NOBRK), the time function will repeat itself,
starting atT(1), i.e., the approximation is assumed
to be periodic, with period equal to T(NOBRK).
K = 1, NOBRK
ORGANIZATION OF RECORDS
Record 1 in entered once in Data Group I. Records 2 and 3, as a set,
are repeated NFUNC times. Within each NFUNC set, Record 2 is input once and
192
-------
Record 3 uses as many 80-space lines as needed to input NOBRK entries. Four
entries (four VALK(K)-T(K) pairs) will fit on each 80-space line.
2.3.2.10 DATA GROUP J: Initial Concentrations—
The initial conditions are the segment concentration for the state
variables at time zero (or the start of the simulation).
VARIABLES
Record 1—Title
TITLE = name of data group
Record 2—Initial Conditions
ANAME(K) = an optional one to five alpha-numeric character
descriptive name for the initial condition in segment
K of system ISYS.
C(ISYS,K) = initial concentration in segment K of system ISYS in the
appropriate units (normally mg/1 or ppm).
K = 1, NOSEG
ISYS = 1, NOSYS
ORGANIZATION OF RECORDS
Record 1 is input once in Data Group J. Record 2 is a set and will
be repeated NOSYS times. Within each NOSYS set, there are NOSEG entries.
Each NOSYS set will use as many 80-space lines as needed to input NOSEG
entries. Five entries (ANAME(K)-C(ISYS,K) pairs) will fit one line. After
NOSEG entries have been entered in a NOSYS set, begin the next NOSYS set on
the following line.
Each NOSYS system must have initial conditions, even if the system is
bypassed or the initial conditions are zero. If ICRD = 8 in Data Group A,
then initial conditions are read from the restart file (RESTART.OUT), and
Record 2 should not be included in the input data set.
193
-------
2.3.2.11 DATA GROUP K: Stability and Accuracy Criteria—
VARIABLES
Record 1—Stability Criteria
CMAX(K) = stability criteria for system K, i.e., the maximum
concentration (normal units mg/1 or ppm) for system K
which if exceeded by any segments in system K indicates
that the numerical integration procedure has become
unstable. If instability occurs, an appropriate message
is printed and the integration procedure is terminated
and a call is made to the display subroutines.
K = 1, NOSYS
Record 2—Accuracy Criteria
CMIN(K) = 0.0 for each system.
K = 1, NOSYS
ORGANIZATION OP RECORDS
In Data Group K, Records 1 and 2 each have NOSYS entries. Each record
will use as many 80-space lines as needed to enter all NOSYS entries. Eight
entries (CMAX(K) in Record 1; CMIN(K) in Record 2) will fit on one line.
2.3.2.12 DATA GROUP L: Intermediate Print Control—
There are two options for Data Group L (L.1 and L.2). Records 1 and
2 are identical in the two options. ISYSd), in Record 3, determines the
option. If ISYSd) = 0, then option 2 is invoked. Otherwise, option 1 is
used.
VARIABLES
Record 1—Number of Print Intervals
NPRINT = number of print intervals. NOTE: The maximum number
of print outs = total prototype time/print interval +
1 (for time zero) must be equal to or less than the
FORTRAN parameter MP that was used when compiling the
program.
TITLE = name of data group.
194
-------
Record 2—Print intervals
PRINT(I) = print interval (day).
TPRINT(I) = final time for application of PRINT(I) (day).
I = 1,NPRINT
2.3.2.12.1 DATA GROUP L.1
VARIABLES
Record 3—Compartments (system - segment) to be Displayed
ISYS(K), = system, segment combinations that the user wishes
ISEG(K) to have displayed during simulation - user may select
a maximum of 8. All system-segment concentrations as
well as other miscellaneous calculations may be displayed
at the end of the simulation; see Card Group N.
K = 1, 8
ORGANIZATION OF RECORDS
In Data Group L.1, Record 1 is entered once. Record 2 contains four
print interval-final time combinations per line. This record is repeated
(NPRINT/4) + 1 times. Record 3 will have up to eight entries and use one
80-space line.
2.3.2.12.2 DATA GROUP L.2
VARIABLES
Record 3—Mass Check
IMCHK = 0 to invoke mass check option.
MSYS = system number for which a total mass balance analysis
will be performed.
195
-------
2.3.2.13 DATA GROUP M: Integration Control—
VARIABLES
Record 1—Integration Option - Negative Solution Option
INTYP = 1, user wishes the WASP program to determine the
integration step size (based upon its own accuracy
criteria). This option is not recommended.
= 2, the user will supply the integration step sizes that
WASP will use. This option is recommended.
NEGSLN
TITLE
0, a user wishes to restrict integration to the positive
plane only - this is the normal option selected.
1, user will permit the integration procedure to go
negative - used for special applications (es. , DO
deficit, pH - alkalinity) .
name of data group.
Record 2—Time Warp Scale Factor - Starting simulation Time
SCALT = time warp scale factor - not used.
TZERO = prototype time for start of simulation. This is usually
equal to zero, but user may start at time other than zero
(used to initialize any of the piecewise linear time
functions). If DAY, HR, MIN are entered in Data Group A,
this value is ignored.
Record 3—Number of Integration Step Sizes
NOSTEP = number of integration step sizes to be used in the
simulation.
Record 4—integration Step Size History
DT(K) - integration step size (normal units-days).
TIME(K) = time until which step size DT(K) will be used, then
switching to DT(K+1) until TIME(K+1).
K = 1 , NOSTEP
ORGANIZATION OF RECORDS
Records 1, 2 and 3 are input once in Data Group M, occupying one 80-
space line each. Record 4 will use as many lines as needed to enter NOSTEP
196
-------
2.3.2.14 DATA GROUP N: Print Tables—
This card group controls the output data.
VARIABLES
Record 1 —Variable Names
ANAME(K) = a one to eight alpha-numeric character descriptive name
for display variable K. The order of these names is
determined via the assignment order in the user's kinetic
subroutine.
TITLE = name of data group
K = 1 ,8
Record 2—Variable Number - Segment Numbers
VARNO = the position of the desired variables, to be displayed,
in the WRITE file statement in the kinetic subroutine
(see previous note).
SEG(K) = segment number to be displayed. Order of display is
unimportant, i.e., need not be sequential.
K = 1, NOSEG
Record 3—Blank
Blank record.
ORGANIZATION OF RECORDS
Data Group N is repeated in its entirety NOSYS times, within each
NOSYS set, Record 1 is entered once. Record 2 may then be repeated as many
times as the user wishes. Each record 2 entered will output a table of data
for the variable designated in VARNO and the eight corresponding SEG(K)'s.
The same variable may be used for VARNO again if the user wants to print data
on eight more segments under that variable. The user may repeat this process
for each of the eight variables listed in Record 1.
The variables in Record 2 do not have to be entered sequentially; for
example, in the first "Record 2" entered, VARNO can equal 4 and the next
"Record 2" can have VARNO = 2 or any other number one through eight. Thus,
the user can arrange the output tables anyway he or she wishes.
The systems, however, must be input sequentially. After Record 1 and
all the Record 2's the user wants displayed are input for NOSYS = 1, enter
the blank line (Record 3) and then enter Record 1 for NOSYS = 2. Continue
197
-------
with the Record 2's for that system and the blank Record 3. Again, Record 2
in each NOSYS system can be repeated an infinite number of times and the
blank record must be input between each subsequent NOSYS set.
2.3.2.15 DATA GROUP O: Printer Plot Display Cards (Time Plots)—
VARIABLES
Record 1—Number of Segments and Variables for Plot
NSPLT
VARNO
TITLE
PMIN,
PMAX
SEG(K)
number of segments to be plotted (maximum of five).
the position of the desired variable to be plotted,
in the WRITE file statement in the kinetic subroutine.
name of data group.
Record 2—Plotting Scales
minimum and maximum values, respectively, to be used for
this plot.
Record 3—Segment to be Plotted
segment numbers to be plotted (a maximum of five segments
per plot allowed)
Record 4—Blank
Blank record.
ORGANIZATION OF RECORDS
Data Group 0 will be entered once for each system 1 through NOSYS.
Within each system, Records 1-3 are repeated for each plot the user wants
to print from that system. Two plots are printed per page; therefore,
Records 1-3 should be entered an even number of times within each NOSYS
group. Each record will occupy one line.
After all sets of Records 1-3 have been input for NOSYS = 1, enter the
blank Record 4 and then the data (Records 1-3) for NOSYS = 2. Continue in
this manner until all systems have plotting data.
198
-------
2.3.2.16 DATA GROUP P: Spatial Plots—
Card Group P controls plots from both predicted data and observed data.
RM1, RM2
VARIABLES
Record 1 —Spatial Scale
minimum and maximum river mile values, respectively, to
be used for all spatial plots.
TITLE
SEG(K)
RM(K)
MXTIM
IVAR
YSTR,
YSTP
= name of data group.
Record 2—Segment River Miles to be Plotted
= segment number to be plotted.
river mile value for SEG(K).
K = 1 , NOSEG
Record 3—predicted Variable Plot Control Information
= number of time selections to be included on this plot
(maximum of 5).
= the position of the desired variable to be plotted in
the WRITE file statement in the kinetic subroutine.
= minimum and maximum values, respectively, to be used
for the Y-axis of this plot.
SYSOPT
OVRLAY
TITL1
system number of the desired variable to be plotted.
flag to cause this plot to be overlaid with the
following plots:
0, causes this plot to be printed along (or with
preceding plot, if OVRLAY on the preceding plot cards
is set to 1).
1, causes this plot to be overlaid on the following
plot. (Note: Although any number of plots can be
overlaid, we suggest a maximum of three; YSTR and
YSTP values should be compatible for overlaid plots.)
title for plot, when overlaying plots, the first two
titles and the last title will be printed.
199
-------
Record 4—Predicted Variable Plot Control information
TIM(K) = time selections for this plot (1-MXTIM).
SYMTAB(K) = plot symbol associated with time TIM(K).
Record 5—Observed Data Plot Control Information
FLAG = flag to indicate observed data.
= 99999, plot the observed data.
IUNIT = unit device number where observed data are to be found
(default = 5; optional unit numbers are 82-89).
YSTR, = minimum and maximum values, respectively, to use for
YSTP the Y-axis of this plot.
NOOBS = number of observed data points for this plot.
OVRLAY = 0, causes this plot to be printed alone (or with
preceeding plot, if OVRLAY on the preceding plot
cards is 1).
= 1, causes this plot to be overlaid on the following plot.
TITL1 = title for this plot.
OBSSYM = plot symbol associated with observed data for this plot.
Record 6—River Mile - Observed Data Values
RIVMIL(K) = river mile location for observed data point "K".
VALUE(K) = observed value of variable at RIVMIL(K).
K « 1, NOOBS
Record 7—Format Specification for Data on "IUNIT"
PMT = format specification for observed river mile - observed
data values on auxiliary input file IUNIT (specified
on Record 5). Must begin and end with parentheses
and contain valid formats, such as (2F5.0), (16F5.0)
or (F5.0/F5.0).
200
-------
ORGANIZATION OF RECORDS
Record 1 is entered once, occupying one line. Record 2 will use as
many lines as needed to input NOSBG pairs of SEG(K)-RM(K); eight pairs may be
entered per line. Records 3 and 4 are for plots from predicted data. Each
will be entered once and occupy one line apiece. Any number of plots from
predicted data can be printed by repeating Records 3 and 4.
To print plots from observed data, skip Records 3 and 4 and input
Record 5. Record 5 is entered once and occupies one line. If IUNIT equals
five or zero, use Record 6 and skip Record 7. Record 6 will use as many
lines as necessary to enter NOOBS pairs of RIVMIL(K)-VALUE(K) (four pairs per
line). If IUNIT equals 82-89, skip Record 6 and use Record 7. Record 7 will
be entered once. Any number of plots from observed data can be printed by
repeating Card Groups 5 and 6 or 5 and 7.
2.3.3 WASP3 Data Group Tables
DATA GROUP A
RECORD
1
2
3
4
VARIABLE
MODEL
ISER
I RUN
NOSBG
NOSYS
LISTG
LISTC
ICRD
DAY
HR
MIN
TITLE
TITLE
TITLE
SYSBY(1 )
SYSBY(2)
•
•
•
SYSBY(K)
FORMAT
15
15
15
15
15
15
15
15
F5.0
1X,F2.0
F2.0
5A4
20A4
20A4
12
12
•
•
*
12
COLUMN
1-5
6-10
1 1-15
16-20
21-25
26-30
31-35
36-40
41-45
47-48
49-50
61-80
1-80
1-80
1-2
3-4
•
•
•
SHORT DEFINITION
Model designation.
Series designation.
Run number.
Number of segments.
Number of systems.
Echo print suppression for
B, C, D, E.
Echo print suppression for
F, G, H, I, J •
File which contains flows.
Day to begin reading from file (day).
Hour to begin reading from file (hr) .
Min to begin reading from file (min) .
"A: Model options".
Desc. of aquatic system.
Desc. of simulation.
System bypass options.
K = NOSYS
ORGANIZATION OF RECORDS:
III HI HI 111
201
-------
DATA GROUP B.1
RECORD
1
2
3
4
VARIABLE
IROPT
NOR
TITLE
SCALR
CONVR
BR(K)
IR(K)
JR(K)
BR(K)
IR(K)
JR(K)
BR(K)
IR(K)
JR(K)
BR(K)
IR(K)
JR(K)
*
BR(K)
IR(K)
JR(K)
RBY(1 )
RBY(2)
•
RBY(NOSYS)
TYPE
15
15
5A4
F10.0
F10.0
F10.0
15
15
F10.0
15
15
F10.0
15
15
F10.0
15
15
*
F1 0.0
15
15
12
12
•
12
COLUMN
1-5
6-10
61-80
1-10
11-20
1-10
11-15
16-20
21-30
31-35
36-40
41-50
51-55
56-60
61-70
71-75
76-80
.
.
.
.
1-2
3-4
•
•
SHORT DEFINITION
Exchange option = 1 .
Number of exchange coeffi-
cients.
11 B: Exchanges".
Scale factor for exchange
coefficients
Units conversion factor.
Exchange coefficients.
Mixing segment K, K=1
Mixing segment K, K=1
K = 2
K = 3
K = 4
*
K = NOR
Exchange bypass option for
each system.
K = NOSYS
ORGANIZATION OF RECORDS:
111 111 |3|(NOR/4)|3| |_4|
202
-------
DATA GROUP B.2
RECORD
1
2
3
4
5
6
VARIABLE
IROPT
NOR
TITLE
SCALR
CONVR
BR(K)
IR(K)
JR(K)
BR(K)
IR(K)
JR(K)
BR(K)
IR(K)
JR(K)
BR(K)
IR(K)
JR(K)
•
•
•
BR(K)
IR(K)
JR(K)
NOBRK
RT(K)
T(K)
RT(K)
T(K)
RT(K)
T(K)
RT(K)
T(K)
•
•
RT(K)
T(K)
RBY(1)
RBY(2)
•
•
•
RBY(NOSYS)
FORMAT
15
15
5A4
F10.0
F10.0
F10.0
15
15
F10.0
15
15
F10.0
15
15 .
F10.0
15
15
•
•
•
F10.0
15
15
15
F10.0
F10.0
F10.0
F10.0
F10.0
F10.0
F10.0
F10.0
•
•
F10.0
F10.0
12
12
•
•
•
12
COLUMN
1-5
6-10
61-80
1-10
11-20
1-10
11-15
16-20
21-30
31-35
36-40
41-50
51-55
56-60
61-70
71-75
76-80
•
•
•
*
•
•
1-5
1-10
11-20
21-30
31-40
41-50
51-60
61-70
71-80
•
•
•
•
1-2
3-4
•
•
•
•
SHORT DEFINITION
Exchange option = 2.
No. of exchange coefficients.
"B: Exchanges".
Scale factor for exch. coeff.
Units conversion factor.
Bulk exchange coefficients.
Mixing segment K.
Mixing segment K, K = 1
K = 2
K = 3
K = 4
•
•
•
K = NOR
Number of values in the time
function.
Value of piecewise lin.
approx. time in days; K = 1
K = 2
K = 3
K = 4
•
•
K = NOBRK
Exchange bypass option for
each system.
ORGANIZATION OF RECORDS:
\l\2\ |3|(NOR/4)|3| |_4| |51 (NOBRK/4) |51 |6_|
203
-------
DATA GROUP B.3
RECORD
1
2
3
4
5
VARIABLE
IROPT
NOR
TITLE
SCALR
CONVR
IR(I)
JR(I)
NOBRK(I)
RT(K)
T(K)
RT(K)
T(K)
RT(K)
T(K)
RT(K)
T(K)
•
RT(K)
T(K)
RBY(1 )
RBY(2)
RBY(NOSYS)
FORMAT
15
15
5A4
F10.0
F10.0
15
15
15
F10.0
, F10.0
F10.0
F10.0
F10.0
F10.0
F10.0
F10.0
•
F10.0
F10.0
12
12
12
COLUMN
1-5
6-10
61-80
1-10
11-20
1-5
6-10
11-15
1-10
1 1-20
21-30
31-40
41-50
51-60
61-70
71-80
•
.
.
1-2
3-4
•
SHORT DEFINITION
Exchange option =3.
No. of exchange coefficients.
" B : Exchanges " .
Scale factor for exch. coeff.
Units conversion factor.
Mixing segment K.
Mixing segment K.
No. of values and times.
value of piecewise lin.
approx. time in days; K = 1
K = 2
K = 3
K = 4
•
K = NOBRK
Exchange bypass option for
each system.
ORGANIZATION OF RECORDS:
111 111 111 |4|(NOBRK/4)|4| |3j J4 1 (NOBRK/4) |4 1
|_3_| |4 1 (NOBRK/4) |4 1 |5_|
NOR
204
-------
DATA GROUP B.4
RECORD
1
2
3
4
VARIABLE
IROPT
NOR
TITLE
SCALR
CONVR
E(K)
A(K)
IL(K)
JL(K)
IR(K)
JR(K)
E(K)
A(K)
IL(K)
JL(K)
IR(K)
JR(K)
•'
E(K)
A(K)
IL(K)
JL(K)
IR(K)
JR(K)
RBY(1 )
RBY(2)
,
RBY(NOSYS)
FORMAT
15
15
5A4
F10.0
F10.0
F10.0
F1 0.0
F5.0
F5.0
15
15
F10.0
F10.0
F5.0
F5.0
15
15
•
F10.0
F10.0
F5.0
F5.0
15
15
12
12
*
12
COLUMN
1-5
6-10
61-80
1-10
11-20
1-10
11-20
21-25
26-30
31-35
36-40
41-50
51-60
61-65
66-70
71-75
76-80
•
.
.
*
1-2
3-4
m
SHORT DEFINITION
Exchange option = 4.
No. of exchange coefficients.
"B: Exchanges".
Scale factor for exch. coeff.
Units conversion factor.
Dispersion factor; K = 1
Cross sectional area.
Characteristic mixing length.
Characteristic mixing length.
Mixing segment K (upstream) .
Mixing segment K (downstream) .
K = 2
•
K = NOR
Continue until all exchange
coefficients have been
listed.
Exchange bypass option for
each system.
ORGANIZATION OF RECORDS:
|T| ||| |3|(NOR/2)|3| |I|
205
-------
DATA GROUP B.5
RECORD
1
2
3
4
5
6
VARIABLE
IROPT
NOR
TITLE
SCALR
CONVR
E(K)
A(K)
IL(K)
JL(K)
IR(K)
JR(K)
E(K)
A(K)
IL(K)
JL(K)
IR(K)
JR(K)
•
•
•
E(K)
A(K)
IL(K)
JL(K)
IR(K)
JR(K)
NOBRK
RT(K)
T(K)
RT(K)
T(K)
RT(K)
T(K)
RT(K)
T(K)
•
•
RT(K)
T(K)
RBY(1 )
RBY(2)
•
•
RBY(NOSYS)
FORMAT
15
15
5A4
F10.0
F10.0
F10.0
F10.0
F5.0
F5.0
15
15
F10.0
F10.0
F5.0
F5.0
15
15
•
•
•
r F10.0
F10.0
F5.0
F5.0
15
15
15
F10.0
F10.0
F10.0
F10.0
F10.0
F10.0
F10.0
F10.0
•
•
F10.0
F10.0
12
12
•
•
12
COLUMN
1-5
6-10
61-80
1-10
11-20
1-10
11-20
21-25
26-30
31-35
36-40
41-50
51-60
61-65
66-70
71-75
76-80
•
•
•
•
•
*
1-5
1-10
11-20
21-30
31-40
41-50
51-60
61-70
71-80
•
•
•
•
1-2
3-4
•
•
SHORT DEFINITION
Exchange option =5.
No. of exchange coefficients.
" B : Exchanges " .
Scale factor for each coeff.
Units conversion factor.
Dispersion factor,' K = 1
Cross sectional area.
Characteristic mixing length.
Characteristic mixing length.
Mixing segment K (upstream).
Mixing segment K (downstream)
K = 2
•
•
•
K = NOR
No. of values and times
Value of piecewise lin.
approx. time in days; K «• 1
K » 2
K = 3
K = 4
•
•
K = NOBRK
Exchange bypass option for
each system.
ORGANIZATION OF RECORDS:
Illll |3|(NOR/2)|3|
|5|(NOBRK/4)|5|
206
-------
DATA GROUP B.6
RECORD
1
2
3
4
5
6
VARIABLE
IROPT
NOR
TITLE
SCALR
CONVR
IR(K)
JR(K)
NOBRK(K)
RT(K)
T(K)
RT(K)
T(K)
RT(K)
T(K)
RT(K)
T(K)
•
•
RT(K)
T(K)
A(K)
IL(K)
JL(K)
RBY(1 )
RBY(2)
•
•
•
RBY(NOSYS)
TYPE
15
It
5A4
F10.0
F10.0
15
15
15
F10.0
F10.0
F1 0.0
F10.0
F10.0
F10.0
F10.0
F10.0
•
•
F10.0
F10.0
F10.0
F10.0
F10.0
12
12
•
•
•
12
COLUMN
1-5
6-10
61-80
1-10
11-20
1-5
6-10
11-15
1-10
11-20
21-30
31-40
41-50
51-60
61-70
71-80
•
•
*
•
1-10
11-20
21-30
1-2
3-4
*
•
•
SHORT DEFINITION
Exchange option = 6.
No. of exchange coefficients.
"B: Exchanges".
Scale factor for exch. coeff.
Units conversion factor.
Mixing segment K (upstream) .
Mixing segment K (downs team)
No. of times in the time func
Value of broken line approx;
K = 1
Time at breaks (in days)
K = 2
K = 3
K = 4
•
•
K = NOBRK
Cross sectional area.
Characteristic mixing length.
Characteristic mixing length.
Exchange bypass options for
each system.
ORGANIZATION OF RECORDS:
ITU I |3|4|(NOBRK/4) |4|5| | 3 |4 | (NOBRK/4 ) |4|5
|3|4|(NOBRK/4)
NOR
207
-------
DATA GROUP C. 1 , C.2, C.3, C.4
RECORD
1
2
3
VARIABLE
IVOPT
NOV
TITLE
SCALV
CONW
VOL(K)
VOL(K)
VOL(K)
VOL(K)
VOL(K)
VOL(K)
VOL(K)
VOL(K)
•
*
VOL(K)
FORMAT
15
15
5A4
E10.3
11-20
F10.0
F10.0
F1 0.0
F10.0
F10.0
F10.0
F10.0
F10.0
•
F10.0
COLUMN
1-5
6-10
61-80
1-10
11-20
1-10
11-20
21-30
31-40
41-50
51-60
61-70
71-80
•
•
SHORT DEFINITION
Volume option number.
Number of volumes read.
"C: Volumes."
Scale Factor.
Units conversion factor.
Volume of segment (K); K = 1
K = 2
K = 3
K = 4
K = 5
K = 6
K = 7
K = 8
•
K = NOV
ORGANIZATION OF RECORDS;
IIHI |3|(NOV/8)|3
DATA GROUP C.4 (if NOV=0)
RECORD
1
VARIABLE
IVOPT
NOV
TITLE
FORMAT
15
15
5A4
COLUMN
1-5
6-10
61-80
SHORT DEFINITION
Volume option number.
Number of volumes read = 0.
"C: Volumes."
ORGANIZATION OF RECORDS:
111
208
-------
DATA GROUP D.1
RECORD
1
2
3
4
VARIABLE
IQOPT
NOQ
TITLE
SCALQ
CONVQ
BQ(K)
IQ(K)
JQ(K)
BQ(K)
IQ(K)
JQ(K)
BQ(K)
IQ(K)
JQ(K)
BQ(K)
IQ(K)
JQ(K)
•
BQ(K)
IQ(K)
JQ(K)
QBY(K)
QBY(K)
QBY(K)
FORMAT
15
15
5A4
E10.3
11-20
F1 0.0
15
15
F10.0
15
15
F10.0
15
I 15
F10.0
15
15
*
F10.0
15
15
12
12
12
COLUMN
1-5
6-10
61-80
1-10
11-20
1-10
11-15
16-20
21-30
31-35
36-40
41-50
51-55
56-60
61-70
71-75
76-80
•
.
.
.
1-2
3-4
^
SHORT DEFINITION
Data input option number.
Number of flows.
"D: Flows".
Scale factor for flows.
Units conversion factor.
Flows between segment IQ(K)
and JQ(K); K = 1
Upstream segment.
downstream segment.
K = 2
K = 3
K = 4
•
K = NOV
Flow bypass option for
system K; K = 1
K = 2
K = NOSYS
ORGANIZATION OF RECORDS
111 \2\ |3|(NOQ/4)|3| |l|
209
-------
DATA GROUP D.2
RECORD
1
2
3
4
5
6
VARIABLE
IQOPT
NOQ
TITLE
SCALQ
CONVQ
BQ(K)
IQ(K)
JQ(K)
BQ(K)
IQ(K)
JQ(K)
BQ(K)
IQ(K)
JQ(K)
BQ(K)
IQ(K)
JQ(K)
•
•
•
BQ(K)
IQ(K)
JQ(K)
NOBRK
QT(K)
T(K)
QT(K)
T(K)
QT(K)
T(K( J
QT(K)
T(K) J
*
•
QT(K)
T(K)
QBY(K)
QBY(K)
•
•
QBY(K)
FORMAT
15
15
5A4
E10.3
E10.3
F10.0
15
15
F10.0
15
15
F1 0.0
15
15
F10.0
15
15
•
•
•
F1 0.0
15
15
15
F10.0
F10.0
F1 0.0
F10.0
F1 0.0
F10.0
F10.0
F10.0 J
•
•
F10.0 n
F10.0
12
12
•
•
12
COLUMN
1-5
6-10
61-80
1-10
11-20
1-10
11-15
16-20
21-30
31-35
36-40
41-50
51-55
65-60
61-70
71-75
76-80
•
•
•
•
•
•
1-5
1-10
11-20
21-30
31-40
41-50
41-60
61-70
71-80
•
•
•
•
1-2
3-4
*
•
*
SHORT DEFINITION
Data input option number.
Number of flows.
"D: Flows".
Scale factor for flows.
Units conversion factor.
Ratio of flow between
seg. IQ(K) and JQ(K); K == 1
Upstream segment.
Downstream segment.
K = 2
K = 3
K = 4
•
•
•
K = NOV
NO. of values and times.
Value of piecewise lin. appx.
Time in days; K = 1
K = 2
K = 3
K = 4
•
•
K = NOBRK
Flow bypass option for
system K; K = 1
K = 2
•
•
K = NOSYS
ORGANIZATION OF RECORDS:
IHII J3|(NOQ/4)|3| |T| |5|(NOBRK/4) |5
210
-------
DATA GROUP D.3
RECORD
1
2
3
4
5
VARIABLE
IQOPT
NOQ
TITLE
SCALQ
CONVQ
IQ(D
JQ(I)
NOBRK(I)
QT(K)
T(K)
QT(K)
T(K)
QT(K)
T(K)
QT(K)
T(K)
*
*
QT(K)
T(K)
QBY(K)
QBY(K)
*
•
QBY(K)
FORMAT
15
15
5A4
E10.3
E10.3
15
15
15
F10.0
F10.0
F10.0
F10.0
F10.0
F10.0
F10.0
F10.0
•
*
F10.0
F10.0
12
12
•
*
12
COLUMN
1-5
6-10
61-80
1-10
11-20
1-5
6-10
11-15
1-10
11-20
21-30
31-40
41-50
51-60
61-70
71-80
*
•
*
•
1-2
3-4
•
•
•
SHORT DEFINITION
Data input option number.
Number of flows.
"D: Flows".
Scale factor for flows.
Units conversion factor.
Upstream segment.
Downstream segment.
No. of values and times.
Value of piecewise lin. appx.
Time in days; K = 1
K = 2
K = 3
K = 4
•
*
K = NOBRK
Flow bypass option for
system K; K = 1
K = 2
•
•
K = NOSYS
ORGANIZATION OF RECORDS:
III 111 111 |4|(NOBRK/4)|4|
|3j |4|(NOBRK/4) \4\ . . . 13j |4J(NOBRK/4) |4J |E>J
NOQ
211
-------
DATA GROUP D.4
RECORD
1
2
3
4
5
VARIABLE
IQOPT
NOQ
TITLE
SCALQ
CONVQ
NSEA
JSEA(I)
JSEA(I)
*
JUNSEG(I)
JUNSEG(I)
QBY(K)
QBY(K)
•
QBY(K)
FORMAT
15
15
5A4
E10.3
E10.3
15
15
15
•
15
15
12
12
•
12
COLUMN
1-5
6-10
61-80
1-10
11-20
1-5
6-10
11-15
*
1-5
6-10
1-2
3-4
•
;
SHORT DEFINITION
Data input option number.
Number of flows.
"D: Flows".
Scale factor for flows.
Units conversion factor.
Number of downstream boundary
segments.
Segment numbers for down-
stream boundaries.
(1-NSEA)
Segment number for hydro-
dynamic junction I.
Flow bypass option for
system K; K = 1
K = 2
•
K = NOSYS
ORGANIZATION OF RECORDS:
111 III III 111 II
212
-------
DATA GROUP D.5
RECORD
1
2
3
4
5
VARIABLE
IQOPT
NOQ
TITLE
SCALQ
CONVQ
NSEA
JSEA(I)
JSEA(I)
*
JUNSEG(I)
JUNSEG(I)
QBY(K)
QBY(K)
•
QBY(K)
FORMAT
15
15
5A4
E10.3
E10.3
15
15
15
•
15
15
12
12
•
12
COLUMN
1-5
6-10
61-80
1-10
11-20
1-5
6-10
11-15
•
1-5
6-10
1-2
3-4
•
;
SHORT DEFINITION
Data input option number.
Number of flows.
"D: Flows".
Scale factor for flows.
Units conversion factor.
Number of downstream boundary
segments.
Segment numbers for down-
stream boundaries.
( 1 -NSEA)
Segment number for hydro-
dynamic junction I.
Flow bypass option for
system K; K = 1
K = 2
•
K = NOSYS
ORGANIZATION OF RECORDS:
ill 111 111 |4| |5|
213
-------
DATA GROUP E.1
RECORD
1
2
3
VARIABLE
IBCOP(K)
NOBC(K)
TITLE
SCALB
CONVB
BBC(K)
IBC(K)
BBC(K)
IBC(K)
BBC(K)
IBC(K)
BBC(K)
IBC(K)
BBC(K)
IBC(K)
•
•
*
BBC(K)
IBC(K)
FORMAT
15
15
5A4
E10.3
E10.3
F10.0
15
F10.0
15
F10.0
15
F10.0
15
F10.0
15
•
•
•
F10.0
15
COLUMN
1-5
6-10
61-80
1-10
11-20
1-10
11-15
h 16-25
26-30
31-40
41-45
46-55
56-60
61-70
71-75
•
•
*
*
•
SHORT DEFINITION
Data input options.
No. of boundary conditions.
"E: Boundary Concentrations".
Scale factor.
Units conversion factor.
Boundary cond. of
segment IBC(K); K = 1
Segment number
K = 2
K = 3
K = 4
K = 5
•
•
•
K = NOQ
ORGANIZATION OF RECORDS FOR E.1
|TJ|| |3|(NOBC(K)/5)
Sequence of Records for "E" Card Groups;
| E1 , E2, or E3 | |E1 , E2, or E3 |... |E1 , E2, or E3
NO SYS
214
-------
DATA GROUP E.2
RECORD
1
2
3
4
5
VARIABLE
IBCOP(K)
NOBC(K)
TITLE
SCALE
CONVB
BBC(K)
IBC(K)
BBC(K)
IBC(K)
BBC(K)
IBC(K)
BBC(K)
IBC(K)
BBC(K)
IBC(K)
•
•
•
BBC(K)
IBC(K)
NOBRK
BCT(K)
T(K)
BCT(K)
T(K)
BCT(K)
T(K)
BCT(K)
T(K)
•
•
BCT(K)
T(K)
FORMAT
15
15
5A4
E10.3
E10.3
P10.0
15
F10.0
15
F10.0
15
F10.0
15
F10.0
15
•
•
•
F10.0
15
15
F1 0.0
F10.0
F10.0
F10.0
F10.0
F10.0
F10.0
F10.0
•
•
F10.0
F10.0
COLUMN
1-5
6-10
61-80
1-10
11-20
1-10
11-15
16-25
26-30
31-40
41-45
46-55
56-60
61-70
71-75
•
•
•
•
•
1-5
1-10
11-20
21-30
31-40
41-50
51-60
61-70
71-80
•
•
•
•
SHORT DEFINITION
Data input options.
No. of boundary conditions.
"E: Boundaries".
Scale factor.
Units conversion factor.
Ratio of bound, cond. for
segment IBC(K); K = 1
Segment number
K = 2
K = 3
K = 4
K = 5
•
•
•
K = NOQ
No. of values and times.
Value of broken lin. appx.
Time at breaks (days); K = 1
K = 2
K = 3
K = 4
•
•
K = NOBRK
ORGANIZATION OF RECORDS:
|l_|_2| |3|(NOBC(K)/5) |3 | |_4_| |5 | (NOBRK(K)/4) |s|
Sequence of Records for "E" Card Groups;
| E1 , E2, or E3 | | E1 , E2, or E3 | ... | E1 , E2, or E3
NO SYS
215
-------
DATA GROUP E.3
RECORD
1
2
3
4
VARIABLE
IBCOP(K)
NOBC(K)
TITLE
SCALE
CONVB
IBC(I)
NOBRK(I)
BCT(K)
T(K)
BCT(K)
T(K)
BCT(K)
T(K)
BCT(K)
T(K)
•
•
BCT(K)
T(K)
FORMAT
15
15
5A4
E10.3
E10.3
15
15
F10.0
F10.0
F10.0
F10.0
F10.0
F10.0
F10.0
F10.0
•
•
F10.0
F10.0
COLUMN
1-5
6-10
61-80
1-10
11-20
1-5
6-10
1-10
11-20
21-30
31-40
41-50
51-60
61-70
71-80
»
•
•
•
SHORT DEFINITION
Data input options.
No. of boundary conditions.
"E: Boundary Concentrations".
Scale factor.
Units conversion factor.
Boundary segment number.
No. of values and times. •
Value of broken lin. appx.
Time at breaks (days); K = 1
K = 2
K = 3
K * 4
•
•
K = NOBRK
ORGANIZATION OF RECORDS:
III 111 HI |4|(NOBRK/4)|4| |I| |4J(NOBRK/4) J4J
|3| |4|(NOBRK/4)|4
NOBC(K)
Sequence of Records for "E" Card Groups;
E1 , E2, or E3| |E1, E2, or E3|...|E1, E2, or E3
NO SYS
216
-------
DATA GROUP F.1
RECORD
1
2
3
VARIABLE
IWKOP(ISYS)
NOWK(ISYS)
LOPT
TITLE
SCALW
CONVW
BWK(K)
IWC(K)
BWC(K)
IWC(K)
BWC(K)
IWC(K)
BWC(K)
IWC(K)
BWC(K)
IWC(K)
*
BWC(K)
IWC(K)
FORMAT
15
15
15
5A4
E10.3
E10.3
F10.0
15
F10.0
15
F10.0
15
F10.0
15
F10.0
15
•
F10.0
15
COLUMN
1-5
6-10
11-15
61-80
1-10
11-20
1-10
11-15
16-25
26-30
31-40
41-45
46-55
56-60
r 61-70
71-75
*
.
.
SHORT DEFINITION
Option number = 1
Number of forcing functions.
Indicates runoff loads in F.4
"F: Waste Loads" .
Scale factor for forcing func
Units conversion factor.
Forcing function; K = 1
Segment number
K = 2
K = 3
K = 4
K - 5
*
K = NOWK
ORGANIZATION OF RECORDS for F.1
|TJI| |3|(NOWK/5)|3
217
-------
DATA GROUP F.2
RECORD
1
2
3
4
5
VARIABLE
IWKOP(ISYS)
NOWK(ISYS)
LOPT
TITLE
SCALW
CONVW
BWK(K)
IWC(K)
BWC(K)
IWC(K)
BWC(K)
IWC(K)
BWC(K)
IWC(K)
BWC(K)
IWC(K)
•
•
•
BWC(K)
IWC(K)
NOBRK
WKT(K)
T(K)
WKT(K)
T(K)
WKT(K)
T(K)
WKT(K)
T(K)
•
•
WKT(K)
T(K)
FORMAT
15
15
15
5A4
E10.3
E10.3
F1 0.0
15
F10.0
15
F10.0
15
r F10.0
15
F10.0
15
•
•
•
F10.0
15
15
F10.0
F10.0
F10.0
F10.0
F10.0
F10.0
F10.0
F10.0
•
•
F10.0
F10.0
COLUMN
1-5
6-10
11-15
61-80
1-10
11-20
1-10
11-15
16-25
26-30
31-40
u 41-45
46-55
56-60
61-70
71-75
•
•
•
•
•
1-5
1-10
11-20
21-30
31-40
41-50
51-60
61-70
71-80
•
*
•
•
SHORT DEFINITION
Option number = 2
Number of forcing functions.
Indicates runoff loads in F.4
"F: Waste Loads".
Scale factor for forcing func
Units conversion factor.
Ratio of forcing function
Segment number; K = 1
K = 2
K = 3
K = 4
K = 5
•
•
•
K = NOWK
No. of values and times.
Value of forcing functions.
Time in days; K = 1
K = 2
K = 3
K = 4
•
•
K = NOBRK
ORGANIZATION OF RECORDS:
|TH| |3[(NOWK/3)|3| |J| |5|(NOBRK(K)/4)|5|
Sequence of Records for "F" Card Groups;
F1 , F2 , or F3 F1 , F2 , or F3 . . . F1 , F2 , or F3
NO SYS
218
-------
DATA GROUP F.3
RECORD
1
2
3
4
VARIABLE
IWKOP(ISYS)
NOWK(ISYS)
LOPT
TITLE
SCALW
CONVW
IWK(K)
NOBRK(K)
WKT(K)
T(K)
WKT(K)
T(K)
WKT(K)
T(K)
WKT(K)
T(K)
•
•
WKT(K)
T(K)
FORMAT
15
15
15
5A4
E10.3
E10.3
15
15
F10.0
F10.0
F10.0
F10.0
F10.0
F10.0
F10.0
F10.0
•
•
F10.0
F10.0
COLUMN
1-5
6-10
11-15
61-80
1-10
11-20
1-5
6-10
1-10
11-20
21-30
31-40
h 41-50
51-60
61-70
71-80
•
•
•
•
SHORT DEFINITION
Option number = 3
Number of forcing functions.
Indicates runoff loads in F.4
"F: Waste Loads".
Scale factor for forcing func
Units conversion factor.
Segment number.
Number of breaks.
Value of forcing functions.
Time in days; K - 1
K - 2
K - 3
K = 4
•
•
K = NOBRK
ORGANIZATION OF RECORDS:
111 HI 111 |4|(NOBRK/4TT4|
|| [4 | (NOBRK/4) |4 |
||| >4 1 (NOBRK/4) |4 1
NOWK
Sequence of Records for "F" Card Groups;
| F1 , F2, or F3 I | F1 , F2, or F3 | ... | F1 , F2, or F3
NOSYS
219
-------
DATA GROUP F.4
RECORD
1
2
3
4
VARIABLE
NOWKS
NPSDAY
SCALN
CONVN
INPS(J)
INPS(J)
INPS(J)
INPS(J)
KT1
KT2
KPRT(I)
KPRT(I)
KPRT(I)
•
KPRT(I)
FORMAT
15
15
F10.0
F10.0
15
15
15
15
F5
F5
F5
F5
F5
•
F5
COLUMN
1-5
6-10
1-10
11-20
1-5
6-10
11-15
75-80
1-5
6-10
11-15
16-20
21-25
*
75-80
SHORT DEFINITION
Number of runoff loads.
Time in runoff file corre-
sponding to TZERO.
Scale factor for runoff loads
Units conversion factor.
Runoff segment 1 .
Runoff segment 2.
Runoff segment 3.
Runoff segment 16.
Initial runoff print day.
Final runoff print day.
Indicates print system 1 .
Indicates print system 2.
Indicates print system 3.
•
Indicates print system 14.
ORGANIZATION OF RECORDS:
111 111 |3|(NOWKS/16) |3| |_4_|
220
-------
DATA GROUP G
RECORD
1
2
3
VARIABLE
NOPAM
TITLE
SCALP(K)
SCALP(K)
SCALP(K)
SCALP(K)
SCALP(K)
SCALP(K)
SCALP(K)
SCALP(K)
SCALP (K)
ANAME(K)
PARAM(ISEG,K)
ANAME(K)
PARAM(ISEG,K)
ANAME(K)
PARAM(ISEG,K)
ANAME(K)
PARAM(ISEG,K)
ANAME(K)
PARAM(ISEG,K)
•
ANAME(K)
PARAM(ISEG,K)
FORMAT
15
5A4
E10.3
E10.3
E10.3
E10.3
E10.3
E10.3
E10.3
E10.0
E10.3
A5
F10.0
A5
F10.0
A5
F10.0
A5
F10.0
A5
F10.0
*
F10.0
F10.0
COLUMN
1-10
61-80
1-10
11-20
21-30
31-40
41-50
51-60
61-70
71-80
71-80
1-5
6-15
16-20
21-30
31-35
36-45
56-50
51-60
61-65
66-75
•
;
SHORT DEFINITION
No. of parameters required.
"G: Environmental Parameters".
Scale factor group K.
K = 2
K = 3
K = 4
K = 5
K = 6
K = 7
K = 8
K = NOPAM
Opt. descriptive name; K = 1
Value of parameter ANAME(K) .
K = 2
K = 3
K = 4
K = 5
•
K = NOPAM
ORGANIZATION OF RECORDS:
|T| |2|(NOPAM/8)
|3|(NOPAM/5) \3\
221
-------
DATA GROUP H
RECORD
1
2
VARIABLE
NCONS
TITLE
ANAME(K)
CX)NST(K)
ANAME(K)
CONST (K)
ANAME(K)
CONST(K)
ANAME(K)
CONST (K)
ANAME(K)
CONST(K)
•
•
ANAME(K)
CONST(K)
FORMAT
15
5A4
A5
F10.0
AS
F10.0
A5
F10.0
AS
F10.0
AS
F10.0
•
•
F10.0
F10.0
COLUMN
1-10
61-80
1-5
6-15
16-20
21-30
31-35
36-45
56-50
51-60
61-65
66-75
•
•
•
•
SHORT DEFINITION
No. of constants required.
HH: Chemical Constants".
Opt. descriptive name; K = 1
Value of constant ANAME(K) .
K = 2
K » 3
K = 4
K = 5
•
•
K = NOPAM
ORGANIZATION OF RECORDS:
. |7| J2|(NCONS/5) \2\
DATA GROUP I
RECORD
1
2
3
VARIABLE
NFUNC
TITLE
ANAME(I)
NOBRK(I)
VALT(K)
T(K)
VALT(K)
T(K) I
VALT(K)
T(K)
VALT(K)
T(K)
•
•
VALT(K)
T(K)
FORMAT
IS
5A4
A5
15
F10.0
F10.0
F10.0
F10.0
F10.0
F10.0
F10.0
F10.0
•
t
F10.0
F10.0
COLUMN
1-5
61-80
1-5
6-10
1-10
11-20
21-30
31-40
41-50
51-60
61-70
71-80
•
•
•
•
SHORT DEFINITION
No. time functions required.
"I: Time Functions".
Optional descriptive name.
Number breaks used .
Value of time functions.
Time in days; K = 1
K = 2
K = 3
K = 4
•
•
K = NOBRK
ORGANIZATION OF RECORDS:
111 111 |3|(NOBRK/4) |3| \2\ |3|(NOBRK/4)
. |^| |3|(NOBRK/4) |3
NFUNC
222
-------
DATA GROUP J
RECORD
1
2
VARIABLE
TITLE
ANAME(K)
C(ISYS,K)
ANAME(K)
C(ISYS,K)
ANAME(K)
C(ISYS,K)
ANAME(K)
C(ISYS,K)
ANAME(K)
C(ISYS,K)
•
•
ANAME(K)
C(ISYS,K)
FORMAT
5A4
A5
F10.0
A5
F10.0
A5
F1 0.0
A5
F10.0
A5
F10.0
•
•
F1 0.0
F10.0
COLUMN
61-80
1-5
6-15
16-20
21-30
31-35
36-45
56-50
51-60
61-65
66-75
•
•
•
•
SHORT DEFINITION
"J: Initial Concentrations".
Opt. descriptive name,- K = 1
Value of constant ANAME(K) .
I K = 2
K = 3
K = 4
K = 5
•
•
K = NOSEG
ORGANIZATION OF RECORDS
111 |2|NOSEG/4|2
NO SYS
DATA GROUP K
RECORD
1
2
VARIABLE
CMAX(K)
CMAX(K)
CMAX(K)
CMAX(K)
CMIN(K)
CMIN(K)
CMIN(K)
•
CMIN(K)
FORMAT
F1 0.0
F10.0
F10.0
F10.0
F1 0.0
F1 0.0
F1 0.0
*
F1 0.0
COLUMN
1-10
11-20
21-30
71-80
1-10
1 1-20
21-30
•
71-80
SHORT DEFINITION
Maximum concentration for
systems 1 through NOSYS.
K = NOSYS
K = 1
K = 2
K = 3
•
Minimum concentrations
for systems 1 through
NOSYS
K = NOSYS
ORGANIZATION OF RECORDS:
|(NOSYS/8)
|2|(NOSYS/8) |2
223
-------
DATA GROUP L.1
RECORD
1
2
3
VARIABLE
NPR1NT
TITLE
PRINT(I)
TPRINT(I)
«
PRINK I)
TPRINT(I)
I SYS ( 1 )
ISEG(1 )
I SYS ( 2 )
i SEX; (2)
•
•
*
•
•
•
•
*
*
.
FORMAT
120
5A4
F1 0.0
F1 0.0
•
*
i*
F1 0.0
F10.0
13
13
13
13
*
.
•
*
»
,
.
•
•
*
ISYS(8) | 13
ISEG(8) | 13
COLUMN
1-20
61-80
1-10
1 1-20
•
*
61-70
71-80
1-3
4-6
7-9
10-12
13-15
16-18
19-21
22-24
25-27
28-30
31-33
34-36
37-39
40-42
43-45
46-48
SHORT DEFINITION
Number of print intervals.
"L: Sys-Seg display control".
Print interval (day) .
Final day for application of
PRINT(I) (day).
Print interval (day) .
System segment
ORGANIZATION OF RECORDS:
|T| |2|(NPRINT/4)|2| |T
DATA GROUP L.2
RECORD
1
2
3
VARIABLE
NPRINT
TITLE
PRINT(I)
TPRINT(I)
•
*
PRINT
(N PR INT)
FORMAT
120
5A4
F1 0.0
F10.0
•
F1 0.0
TPRINT(I) I F10.0
IMCHK | 13
(=0)
COLUMN
1-20
61-80
1-10
1 1-20
•
*
61-70
71-80
1-3
MSYS [ 13 ]_ 4-6
SHORT DEFINITION
Number of print intervals.
"L: Sys-Seg display control".
Print interval (day) .
Final time for application of
PRINT(I) (day).
Mass check for system SYS.
System number.
ORGANIZATION OF PECORD.V ;
ITI |^]_(NPRIN'ln/4"rj 2_ j |_3 |
224
-------
DATA GSOUP M
RECORD
1
2
3
4
VARIABLE
INTYP
NEGSLN
ADFAC
TITLE
SCALT
TZERO
NOSTEP
DT(K)
TIME(K)
DT(K)
TIME(K)
DT(K)
TIME(K)
DT(K)
TIME(K)
•
•
DT(K)
TIME(K)
FORMAT
12
12
F6.0
5A4
E1 0.4
E10.4
15
F1 0.0
F10.0
F10.0
F10.0
F10.0
F10.0
F1 0.0
F10.0
*
•
F10.0
F10.0
COLUMN
1-2
3-4
5-10
61-80
1-10
11-20
1-5
1-10
11-20
21-30
31-40
41-50
51-60
61-70
71-80
•
•
•
•
SHORT DEFINITION
Integration option.
Negative solution option.
Advection factor.
"M: Integration Control".
Time warp scale factor.
Starting simulation time.
No. integration step sizes.
Integration step size; K = 1
Time DT(K) will be used (day).
K = 2
K = 3
K = 4
•
•
K = NOSTEP
ORGANIZATION OF RECORDS:
111 111 111 |4|(NOSTEP/4)|4,
225
-------
DATA GROUP N
RECORD
1
2
3
VARIABLE
ANAME( 1 )
ANAME(2)
ANAME(3)
ANAME(4)
ANAME(5)
ANAME(6)
ANAME(7)
ANAME(S)
TITLE
VARNO
SEG(K)
SEB(K)
SEG(K)
SEG(K)
SEG(K)
SEG(K)
SEG(K)
SEG(K)
Blank
FORMAT
AS
AS
AS
AS
AS
AS
AS
AS
4A4
13
13
13
13
13
13
13
13
13
COLUMN
1-8
8-16
17-24
25-32
33-40
41-48
49-56
57-64
65-80
1-3
4-6
7-9
10-12
13-16
16-18
19-21
22-24
25-27
1-80
SHORT DEFINITION
Descriptive name for display
variable K.
"N: Print Tablesd".
Number of desired variable.
Segment no. to be displayed.
(Variable number and
segment number.)
ORGANIZATION OF RECORDS:
III
As many tables
as desired
111 l2| ••• I2| 111
As many tables
as desired
1 2
2 3
As many tables
as desired
NOSYS
226
-------
DATA GROUP O
RECORD
1
2
3
4
VARIABLE
NSPLT
VARNO
TITLE
PMIN
PMAX
SEG(1)
SEG(2)
•
SBG(NSPLIT)
(blank)
FORMAT
12
12
5A4
F10.0
F10.0
13
13
•
13
COLUMN
1-2
3-4
61-80
1-10
11-20
1-3
4-6
•
•
1-80
SHORT DEFINITION
No. segments to be plotted.
Position of desired variable.
"O: Time PLots" .
Minimum value for this plot.
Maximum value for this plot.
Segment no. to be plotted.
Blank
ORGANIZATION OF RECORDS:
As many plots as the user
wants from this system
As many plots as the user
wants from this system
NOSYS
As many plots as the user
wants from this system
227
-------
DATA GROUP P
RECORD
1
2
3
4
5
VARIABLE
RM1
RM2
TITLE
SEG(K)
RM(K)
SEG(K)
RM(K)
SEG(K)
RM(K)
SEG(K)
RM(K)
•
•
SEG(K)
RM(K)
MXTIM
IVAR
YSTR
YSTP
SYSOPT
OVRLAY
TITL1
TIM(1 )
TIM(2)
TIM(3)
TIM(4)
TIM(5)
SYMTAB( 1 )
SYMTAB(2)
SYMTAB(3)
SYMTAB(4)
SYMTAB(5)
FLAG
IUNIT
YSTR
YSTP
NOOBS
OVRLAY
TITL1
OBSSYM
FORMAT
F5.0
F5.0
5A4
15
F5.0
15
F5.0
15
F5.0
15
F5.0
•
•
15
F5.0
15
15
F5.0
F5.0
15
15
40A
F5.0
F5.0
F5.0
F5.0
F5.0
A1
A1
A1
A1
A1
15
15
F5.0
F5.0
15
15
40A
1A
COLUMN
1-5
6-10
61-80
1-5
6-10
r 11-15
16-20
f 21-25
26-30
71-75
76-80
•
•
*
•
1-5
6-10
1 1-15
16-20
21-25
26-30
31-70
1-5
6-10
11-15
16-20
21-25
26
27
28
29
30
1-5
6-10
11-15
16-20
21-25
26-30
31-70
71
SHORT DEFINITION
Minimum river mile value.
Maximum river mile value.
"P: Spatial Plots".
Segment number,- K = 1
River mile value for SEG(K) .
K = 2
K = 3
K = 4
•
•
K = NOSEG
No. of time selections.
Position of desired variable.
Minimum values.
Maximum values.
System number.
Flag to cause plot overlay.
Title for plot.
Time selections for this plot
Plot symbols.
Flag to indicate obs. data.
Unit device number = 5.
Mi nimum va lu e .
Maximum value.
No. obs. data points.
Flag to cause plot overlay.
Title for this plot.
Plot symbol.
228
-------
DATA GROUP P (Continued)
RECORD
6
7
VARIABLE
RIVMIL(K)
VALUE(K)
RIVMIL(K)
VALUE(K)
RIVMIL(K)
VALUE(K)
RIVMIL(K)
VALUE(K)
•
•
RIVMIL(K)
VALUE(K)
FMT
FORMAT
F10.0
F10.0
F10.0
F1 0.0
F1 0.0
F10.0
F10.0
F10.0
•
•
F1 0.0
20A4
COLUMN
1-10
11-20
21-30
31-40
41-50
51-60
61-70
71-80
•
•
1-80
SHORT DEFINITION
River mile location; K = 1
Obs.val. of var. RIVMIL(K)
K = 2
K = 3
K = 4
•
•
K = 5
Format specification
ORGANIZATION OF RECORDS FOR DATA GROUP P
|j_| |2|(NOSEG/8) |2
or 1 5 |6 | (NOOBS/4) ]?! or |f]7|
I1KI or |5|6 | (NOOBS/4) \6\ or |5_J7|
or
(NOOBS/4 ) 1 6 | or 1 5 1 7 |
As many
spatial
plots as
the user
wants
229
-------
2.3.4 WASP3 Variable Definitions
The following list defines the variables contained in the WASP3 COMMON.
COMMON is used by the Basic Water Quality Model, WASP3, as the vehicle to
pass information from subroutine to subroutine within the program. The
following is alphabetical listing of the COMMON variables, their definitions
and units, and location description.
VARIABLE
ADFAC
AIMASS
AOMASS
BBC(SY,BC)
BFUNC(TF)
BQ(S2)
BR( S2 )
BVOL(SG)*
BWK(SY,WK)
C(SY,SG)
CD(SY,SG)
CMAX(20)
CMIN(SY)*
CONST(CX)*
FOUND IN
COMMON
CPRINT
MASS
MASS
REAL
REAL
REAL
REAL
REAL
REAL
REAL
REAL
REAL
REAL
REAL
DEFINITION
Advection factor (0-0.5) .
Total mass of designated constituent advected
in.
Total mass of designated constituent advected
out.
Boundary condition intercepts.
Intercepts for the time variable functions
required for the WASPS kinetic subroutine.
Advective flow intercepts
Exchange coefficient intercepts.
Segment volumes.
Forcing function intercepts.
State variable or water quality concentration
array.
Derivative array*
stability criteria vector. The vector eon-
tains the maximum allowable segment con-
centration for each system. If any system
(usually because the integration steps ize
is too large), the simulation is terminated.
Not used in current version of WASP (although
user must include in his input data check).
Constants for use in the WASPB kinetic sub*
routine.
UNITS
unit-
less
kg
kg
mg/L
vari-
able
MCF/day
MCF/day
MCF
Ib/day
mg/L
rog ,,MCF
L day
mg/L
unit-
less
vari-
able
230
-------
VARIABLE
DAY
DOTIME
DRTIME
DT
DTIME
DWKTIM
DVAR(MY,SY)
DVOL(MP,S6)
FILE30(MB,
M30)
PILE50(MB,
M50)
FILE? 0( MB,
M70)
PILE? 2 (MB,
M72)
PILE73(MB,
M73)
FILE75
(M75,1)
PILE80(SY,
20)
IBC(SY,BC)*
IBOCP(SY)*
POUND IN
COMMON
DAYIND
DAYIND
DAYIND
REAL
DUMP
DAYIND
DUMP
DUMP
SCRTCH
SCRTCH
SCRTCH
SCRTCH
SCRTCH
SCRTCH
SCRTCH
INTGR
INTGR
DEFINITION
Current day.
Time until next specified flow in piece-
wise linear function.
Time until next specified exchange in piece-
wise linear function.
Current integration time step.
Array that stores print times for tables.
Time until next specified load in piecewise
linear function.
Array that stores tables of constituents for
printing and plotting.
Array that stores tables of volumes.
Array that stores boundary conditions.
Array that stores loads.
Array that stores exchanges.
Array that stores advective flows.
Array that stores kinetic time functions.
Array that stores time steps.
Array that stores display variable names.
Contains the segment numbers for which boun-
dary conditions have been specified.
User selected forcing function input option
for each system. IBCOP(ISYS) flags the
boundary conditions for system ISYS as
UNITS
day
day
day
days
unitless
unitless
unitless
unitless
unitless
unitless
unitless
unitless
unitless
unitless
unitless
unitless
unitless
231
-------
VARIABLE
IDFRC(19)
IDISK
IDUMP(8,2)
IN
INITB
INPS(WK)
IPRNT
IQ(S2)*,
JQ(S2) *
FOUND IN
COMMON
INTGR
INTGR
INTGR
INTGR
INTGR
NFS COM
INTGR
INTGR
DEFINITION
being constant in time (IBCOP(ISYS)=1) or
time-variable (IBC'OP(ISYS)= 2,3).
Used only in the DEC-PDP version as the re-
cord address pointers for the direct
access dump files.Not needed for the IBM
370 version because sequential files are
used.
When checked by the user in the kinetic sub-
routine, WASPB, IDISK acts as internal pro-
gram indicator that informs the user when a
print interval has been reached, permitting
the user to write the current state varia-
bles or segment concentrations to auxiliary
storage (disk). Normally IDISK equals ze-
ro, but at a print interval it is exter
nally set to one; must be reset by the
user before exiting the WASPB.
System - segment combinations to be printed
out during the integration procedure.
Device number for reading input data.
Internal program indicator that permits the
user to perform initialization or to exe-
cute special code upon initial entry to
the WASPB kinetic subroutine. Initially
equal to zero, INITB must be reset by the
user in WASPB,
Input segment for nonpoint source load.
Not currently used.
Contain the segment numbers between which
advective flow is to take place. If the
advective flow is positive, then JQ will
contain the upstream segment number (from
which flow is leaving) and IQ will contain
the downstream segment number (to which
flow will go). If, however, the advective
flow is negative, then JQ, will be consi-
dered the downstream segment (flow to)
and IQ will be considered the upstream
segment (flow from).
UNITS
unitless
unitless
unitless
unitless
unitless
unitless
unitless
-------
VARIABLE
FOUND IN
COMMON
DEFINITION
UNITS
IR(S2)*r
JR(S2)*
IREC
I SIM*
I SYS
ITCHCK
ITIMB(SY,
BC)
ITIMF(TF)
INTGR
INTGR
INTGR
INTGR
INTGR
INTGR
INTGR
ITIMQ
ITIMR
ITIMV
ITIMW(SY,
WK)
IVOPT*
IWK(SY,WK)*
INTGR
INTGR
INTGR
INTGR
INTGR
INTGR
Contain the segment numbers between which
change is to take place.
Internal counter used to keep track of the
number ofprint intervals generated during
the course of the simulation.
Simulation type.- currently only time
variable is permitted.
System currently having its derivatives
evaluated.
Not used in current version of WASP.
Used as a breakpoint counter for obtaining
correct slope and intercept values for
time-variable boundary conditions.
Used as a breakpoint counter for obtaining
correct slope and intercept values for
the time-variable functions required by
the WASPB kinetic sub- routine.
Used as a breakpoint counter for obtaining
correct slope and intercept values for
time-variable advective flows.
Used as a breakpoint counter for obtaining
correct slope and intercept values for the
time-variable exchange coefficients.
Not used in current version of WASP.
Used as a breakpoint counter for obtaining
correct slope and intercept values for
time-variable forcing function.
User selected volume input option. 1 =
constant volumes; 2,3 = volumes adjusted
for flow continuity.
Contains the segment number for which
forcing functions have been specified
(i.e., receiving water segments for wast';
loads).
unit, less
unitless
urn tless
unitless
unitless
unitless
unitless
unitless
unitless
unitless
unitless
233
-------
VARIABLE
IWKOP(SY)*
LDAY
LISTC*
LISTG*
LOPT
MBC(SY,BC)
MFUNC(TF)
MQ(S2)
MR(S2)
MVOL(SG)
MXDMP
MXITER
MXSEG
MXSYS
NBCPSY
FOUND IN
COMMON
INTGR
DAYIND
INTGR
INTGR
NFS COM
REAL
REAL
REAL
REAL
REAL
INTGR
INTGR
POP
PDF
INTGR
DEFINITION
User selected forcing functions input option
for each system. IWKOP*ISYS) flags the
forcing functions for system ISYS as being
constant in time ( IWKOP(ISYS)=1 or time-
variable (IWKOP(ISYS)= 2,3).
Current day counter.
User selected option to print forcing func-
tion (waste load), kinetic constants, seg-
ment para- meters and miscellaneous kine-
tic time functions, and initial condition
input data.
User selected option to print exchange
coefficient, segment volume, advective
flow and boundary condition input data.
Option to read in nonpoint source loads.
Boundary condition slopes.
Slopes for the time-variable functions re-
quired for the WASPB kinetic subroutines.
Advective flow slopes.
Exchange coefficient slopes.
Not used in current version of WASP.
Blocking factor or the maximum number of
variables saved per segment at each
print.
Not used in current version of WASP.
Maximum number of segments.
Maximum number of systems.
Maximum number of forcing functions (waste
loads) permitted per system; set for a
particular WASP configuration in subrou-
tine WASP1 .
UNITS
unitLess
day
unitless
unitless
unitless
L . day
variable
MCF
day. day
MCF
day. day
unitless
unitless
unitless
unitless
unitless
23*4
-------
VARIABLE
FOUND IN
COMMON
DEFINITION
UNITS
NBRK30(BC)
NBRKSO(WK)
NBRK70(1)
NBRK72(1 )
NBRK73(TF)
NBRK75(1 )
NCONS*
NDAY
N EGSLN*
NBWDAY
NFUNC*
NFUNT(TF)
SCRTCH
SCRTCH
SCRTCH
SCRTCH
SCRTCH
SCRTCH
INTGR
DAYIND
INTGR
DAYIND
INTGR
REAL
Array that stores number of steps in
boundary functions.
Array that stores number of steps in load
functions.
Array that stores number of steps in ex-
change functions.
Array that stores number of steps in flow
functions.
Array that stores number of steps in kine-
tic functions.
Array that stores number of steps in time
step functions.
Number of constants (for use in the WASPB
kinetic subroutine) read.
Integer set equal to current simulation.
Indicates whether the user has chosen to
permit to compute negative water quality
concentrations. (Example: permit nega-
tive D.O. deficit, i.e., supersatura-
tion). NEGSLN normally equal zero,
will equal one, if user chooses to permit
negative solutions.
Integer equal to one each time of a new
simulation.
Number of time variable functions (for use
in the WASPB kinetic subroutine) read.
Used if time variable functions (approxi-
mated as piecewise linear functions of
time) have been read for use in the WASPB
kinetic subroutine. NFUNT will contain
the time at which the next break in the
piecewise linear functions will occur, at
which point it will be necessary to
obtain new slopes (MFUNC) and intercepts
(BFUNC).
unitless
unitless
unitless
unitless
unitless
unitless
unitless
day
unitless
day
unitless
day
235
-------
VARIABLE
NOBC(SY)*
NOPAM*
NOSYS*
NOV*
NOWK(SY)*
NCWKS
NPSWK(SY,
WK)
NQT
NRT
NVOLT
NWKPSY
NWKS
POUND IN
COMMON
INTGR
INTGR
INTGR
INTGR
INTGR
N PS COM
N PS COM
REAL
REAL
REAL
INTGR
NPSCOM
DEFINITION
Number of boundary conditions read for each
system.
Number of segment parameters (for use in
the WASPB kinetic subroutine) read.
Number of systems or water quality consti-
tuents in the user's model.
Number of volumes (normally NOV equals
NOSEG).
Number of forcing functions read for each
system.
Number of nonpoint source loads used in
this simulation.
Nonpoint source load.
Used if the exchange coefficients are time-
variable (appproximated by a piecewise
linear functions of time) . NQT will
contain the time at which the next break
in the piecewise linear functions will
occur, at which point it will be neces-
sary to obtain new slopes (MRC) and
intercepts (BR).
Used if the exchange coefficients are time-
variable (approximated by a piecewise
linear functions of time) . NRT will
contain the time at which the next break
in the piecewise linear functions will
occur, at which point it will be neces
sary to obtain new slopes (MRC) and
intercepts (BR).
Not used in the current version of WASP.
Maximum number of forcing functions (waste
loads) permitted per system,- set for a
particular WASP configuration in sub-
routine WASP1 .
Number of nonpoint source loads on file.
UNITS
unitless
unitLess
unitless
unitless
unitless
unitless
Ib/day
unitless
unitless
236
-------
VARIABLE
NWKT(SY,WK)
OMEGA
OUT
PARAM(SG,
PR)*
PRINT(20)
PRNT*
QBY(SY)*
RBY(SY)*
RIM ASS
ROMASS
SCALT(*)
POUND IN
COMMON
REAL
REAL
INTGR
REAL
CPRINT
REAL
INTGR
INTEGR
MASS
MASS
REAL
DEFINITION
Used if the forcing functions for a system
are time-variable (approximated by a
piecewise linear function of time) .
NWKT(ISYS) will contain the time at which
the next break in the piecewise linear
functions, for system ISYS, will occur,
at which point it will be necessary to
obtain new slopes (MWK) and intercepts
(BWK) for system ISYS.
Not used in current version of WASP.
Device number for printer output.
Segment parameters for use in the WASPB
kinetic subroutine.
Print interval.
Print interval.
User selected advective transport indica
tors, if a user wishes, he may by-pass
advective transport for a particular sys-
tem, ISYS, by setting IBY(ISYS) appro-
priately. (Example: if a user had incor-
ported rooted aquatic plants in his
model, he would not wish to have them
transported via flow) .
User selected exchange transport by-pass
indicaters. If a user wishes, he may by-
pass exchange transport for a particualr
system, ISYS, by setting RBY(ISYS) appro-
priately. (Example: if a user had
incorporated rooted aquatic plants in his
model, he would not wish to have them
"disperse" ) .
Total mass of designated constituent
dispersed in.
Total mass of designated constituent dis-
persed out.
Time scale factor. Not used in current
version of WASP.
UNITS
day
unitless
variable
day
day
unitless
unitless
kg
kg
237
-------
VARIABLE
SYSBY(SY)*
TEND
TIME
TPRINT
TPRINT(20)
TZERO*
XBMASS
XKMASS
XLMASS
XMASSO
FOUND IN
COMMON
INTGR
REAL
REAL
CPRINT
CPRINT
REAL
MASS
MASS
MASS
MASS
DEFINITION
User selected system by-pass indicators.
If a user wishes he may choose to by-pass
computations for a particular system
(or systems), ISYS, for a simulation run
by setting SYSBY (ISYS) appropiately.
Ending time for use of the current integra-
tion step size. For single integration
stepsize input this will be the total
simulation time. For multiple integra-
tion stepsize histories, when TIME equals
TEND, a new integration step size will be
chosen and TEND reset.
Current simulation time.
Time for next printout.
Time through which print interval is used.
User selected time for start of simulation.
If for example a user's input data for
model was up such that time zero was
January 1 , a user may skip computations
for January and February
and start March 1 by setting TZERO
(on input) .
Total mass of designated constituent buried
or volatilized.
Total mass of designated constituent trans-
formed.
Total mass of designated constituent loaded
in.
Total mass of designated constituent in
network.
UNITS
unitless
day
day
day
day
day
kg
kg
kg
kg
238
-------
2.4 THE EUTROPHICATION MODEL
2.4.1 Introduction
EUTRWASP requires the same input format as the basic WASP3 model. This
format is explained in detail in Section 2.3. This section describes vari-
ables needed specifically for EUTRWASP. Elaborations on WASP3 occur only in
Data Groups G, H, and I. Records or variables within a record that are riot
mentioned here remain the same as described in Section 2,3.
As mentioned in Table 19, the 8 systems for eutrophication modeling are:
ammonia nitrogen, nitrate nitrogen, ortho-phosphate phosphorus, phytoplankton
carbon, carbonaceous BOD, dissolved oxygen, organic nitrogen, and organic
phosphorus, in data groups E, F, J, N, and o, input will be repeated 8
times, once for each system.
2.4.2 EUTRWASP Data Descriptions
2.4.2.1 DATA GROUP A: Model Identification and System Bypass Option--
Record 1—Model Identification
NOSYS = 8 for EUTRWASP.
2.4.2.2 DATA GROUP B: Exchange Coefficients—
No changes.
2.4.2.3 DATA GROUP C: Volumes—
No changes.
2.4.2.4 DATA GROUP D: Flows—
No change s.
2.4.2.5 DATA GROUP E: Boundary Concentrations--
No changes. Input is repeated 8 times, once for each system.
2.4.2.6 DATA GROUP F: Waste Loads--
No changes. Input is repeated 8 times, once for each system.
239
-------
2.4.2.7 DATA GROUP G : En vi i .,-, -
Recorc. 1 - ~N
NOPAM = 13 for eutroph>-;.)",
TITLE = name of data gr •.,..;/.
Record__2- -5uo?
SCALF(K)
K =- 1 1 '.
ANAME(K) - r,n
PARAM(IS2G,K) ; ttu-
K =• 1 , NOPAM
IS EG = 1 , NO~f;G
Listed below a:. - the- 1 .•
Enter these variah n<:_ ^uc, \i
a nd PARAM (ISHG,K),
K PARAM(ISt:G,^)
i DEPi-Hdr-; -:G, i)
.* ;'ttlneters
i I'j/hd-numeric character
PARAM( ISEG,K) .
' - ; ,-\r,f ;\M E ( K 1 in segment IS EG .
i'-u to- eutrophication.
:,-.--; ;u place of ANAME (K)
BOTSG{I3FG, '
-i' (.-i oeyment below
v£I.SGM11 h- RCi, 4) v'KL ^-,.
5 TMPSG(lSEGf';.
/
beymcnt ISEG,
.'•'-• J:IK':,L •' - i!ij- .->•'-! tij re multiplier ( °C) .
iMc'JG '/--I; j •:-, uv-'i space and can be
• i ;ii'." =.!- !uti\, fjependiag on the
definition of TEMP. TMPSG(lSEG)*TEMP
iTMpt^NC I;:HXJ) } = .ST11, the temperature
of 3 egirif:: t IS EG .
-------
K
6
PARAM(ISEG,K)
TMPFN(ISEG,6)
ANAME (K) Definition and Units
TMPFN
KESG(ISEG,7)
KESG
KEFN(ISEG,8)
KEFN
EDIF(ISEG,9) EDIF
10 SOD1D(ISEG,10) SOD1D
11 FPIPWC(ISEG,11) FPIPW
12 FNH4(ISEG,12) FNH4
Flag designating the time—variable
temperature function to be used for
segment ISEG. The four temperature
functions, supplied by the user, are
defined in data group I (Section 2.4.4).
= 1 , TEMPO )
= 2, TEMP(2)
= 3, TEMP(S)
= 4, TEMP(4)
Segment extinction coefficient multiplier
(ft~2). KESG varies over space and
can be either an actual extinction
coefficient or a normalized function,
depending on the definition of KE.
KESG(ISEG) * KE(KEFN(ISEG)) = KESG(ISEG).
KE(KEFN(ISEG)) = Ke, the extinction
coefficient for segment ISEG.
Flag designating the time variable extinc-
tion coefficient (KE) to be used for seg-
ment ISEG. The five extinction coeffi-
cients available are defined in data Group
I (Section 2.4.2.9) .
= 1, KE(1)
= 2, KE(2)
= 3, KE(3)
= 4, KE(4)
= 5, KE(5)
Dispersion coefficient for exchange of
dissolved chemical between ISEG and
IBOT; converted to dispersive volume
internally. (cm2/day = million ft3/day).
Sediment oxygen demand; one dimensional
networks only (g/m2/day).
Spatially variable fraction of inorganic
PO4 sorbed to particulates, and subject
to settling.
Average ammonium flux multiplier for seg-
ment; one-dimensional water column networks
only.
241
-------
K PARAM(ISEG,K) ANAME (K) Definition and Units
13 FPO4(ISEG,13) FPO4 Average phosphate flux multiplier for seg-
ment; one-dimensional water column networks
only (mg/m2/day).
ORGANIZATION OP RECORDS
Record 1 is input once in Data Group G, occupying one line. Record 2
has 13 entries, occupying two lines. Record 3 has 13 entries per segment.
At five entries per line, each segment requires three lines.
2.4.2.8 DATA GROUP H: Constants—
VARIABLES
Record 1—Number of Constants
NCONS = 49 for eutrophication.
TITLE = Name of data group.
Record 2—Constants
ANAME(K) = an optional one to five alpha-numeric character
descriptive name for constant CONST(K).
CONST(K) - the value of constant ANAME(K).
K = 1, 49
Listed below are the 49 constants required for eutrophication. Enter
these variable names and their values, respectively, for ANAME(K) and
CONST(K).
1C CONST(K) ANAME(K) Definition and Units
1 K1C K1C Saturated growth rate of phytoplankton
(day-1).
2 K1T K1T Temperature coefficient.
3 LGHTSW LGHTS Light formulation switch:
= 0, use Dick Smith's (USGS) formulation
= 1, use DiToro et al. (1971) formulation
4 PHIMX PHIMX Maximum quantum yield constant. Used only
when LIGHTSW = 0, mgC/mole photons.
242
-------
Jl CONST(K) ANAME(K) Definition and Units
5 XKC XKC Chlorophyll extinction coefficient. Used
only when LGHTSW = 0, (mg chla/n»3 )~1/m.
6 CCHL CCHL Carbon-to-chlorophyll ratio. Used only
when LGHTSW =1 (mg carbon/ing chla) .
7 IS1 IS1 Saturation light intensity for phytoplank-
ton. Used only when LGHTSW = 1 (Ly/day).
8 KMNG1 KMNG1 Nitrogen haIf-saturation constant for nitro-
gen for phytoplankton growth, which also
affects ammonia preference, mg-N/L. NOTE:
This affects ammonia preference:
= 0, PNH3G1 = 1.0
= Large, PNH3G1 = NH3/(NH3 + N03)
NOTE: For standard models, use a large
KMNG1 .
9 KMPG1
10 K1RC
11 K1RT
12 K1D
13 KMPHYT
14 PCRB
15 NCRB
KMPG1
K1RC
K1RT
K1D
KMPHY
Phosporous ha If -saturation constant for
phytoplankton growth, mg
PCRB
NCRB
Endogenous respiration rate of phyto-
plankton at 20°C, day1 .
Temperature coefficient for phytoplankton
growth.
Non-predatory phytoplankton death rate ,
day-1.
Half-saturation constant for phytoplankton,
mg carbon/L. NOTE: As phytoplankton
increases, mineralization of- organic
nitrogen and organic phosphorus increases.
KMPHYT = small; little phytoplankton
effect on mineralization
= large; large concentration of
phytoplankton needed to drive
mineralization
For standard models, use KMPHYT = 0.
Phosphorus-to-carbon ratio in phytoplankton,
mg P0
Nitrogen- to-carbon ratio in phytoplankton,
mg N/mg C.
243
-------
K OONST(K)
ANAME(K)
Definition and Units
16 OCRB
17 NUTLIM
18 DUMMY
19 FSBOD
20 FSDP
21 FSIP
22 FSON
23 K58C
24 K58T
25 K1013C
26 K1013T
27 K1320C
28 K132OT
29 K140C
30 K140T
31 KNIT
32 KNO3
33 KDC
OCRB
NUTLIM
Blank
FSBOD
FSOP
FSIP
FSON
K58C
K58T
1013C
1320T
1320C
1320T
K140C
K140T
KNIT
KNO3
KDC
Oxygen to carbon ratio in phytoplankton,
mg 02/mg C.
Nutrient limitation option.
0 = minimum
1 = multiplicative
Leave Blank.
Fraction of the carbonaceous biochemical
oxygen demand that settles.
Fraction of the total non-living organic
phosphorus that settles.
Spatially constant fraction of inorganic
phosphorus that is sorbed to particulates
and that settles. For spatial
variability, use parameter FPIPWC and
leave this constant blank (or zero).
Fraction of total non-living organic
nitrogen that settles.
Mineralization rate of dissolved organic
phosphorus, per day.
Temperature coefficient for K58C.
Mineralization rate of dissolved organic
nitrogen, per day.
Temperature coefficient for K1013C.
Nitrification rate at 20°C, per day.
Temperature coefficient for K1320C.
Denitrification rate at 20°C, per day.
Temperature coefficient for K140C.
Half-saturation constant for nitrification-
oxygen limitation, mg O2/L.
HaIf-saturation constant for denitrifica-
tion oxygen limitation, mgO2/L.
BOD deoxygenation rate at 20°C, per day.
244
-------
K CONST(K)
ANAME(K)
Definition and Units
34 KDT
35 SVP1
36 SVPP
37 SVPN
38 SVBOD
39 SEDVEL
40 SCOUR
41 KPZDC
42 KPZDT
43 KOPDC
44 KOPDT
45 KONDC
46 KONDT
47 KDSC
48 KDST
49 KBOD
KDT
SVP1
SVPP
SVPN
SVBOD
SEDVL
SCOUR
KPZDC
KPZDT
KOPDC
KOPDT
KONDC
KONDT
KDSC
KDST
KBOD
Temperature coefficient for carbonaceous
deoxygenation in water column.
Settling velocity of phytoplankton,
ft/day.
Settling velocity of particulate phosphorus,
ft/day.
Settling velocity of particulate organic
nitrogen, ft/day.
Settling velocity of particulate BOD
fraction, ft/day.
Sedimentation velocity, inches/year.
Converts to ft/day internally.
Mean scour velocity, inches/year. NOTE:
Gross deposition = SCOUR + SEDVEL.
Decomposition rate constant for phytoplankton
in the sediment at 20°C, per day.
Temperature coefficient for decomposition of
phytoplankton in sediment.
Decomposition rate of organic phosphorus
in the sediment at 20°C, per day.
Temperature coefficient for decomposition of
organic phosphorus in the sediment.
Decomposition rate constant for organic
nitrogen in the sediment at 20°C, per day.
Temperature coefficient for decomposition of
organic nitrogen in the sediment.
Decomposition rate of carbonaceous BOD in
the sediment at 20°C, per day.
Temperature coefficient for carbonaceous
deoxygenation in the sediment.
Half saturation constant for carbonaceous
deoxygenation oxygen limitation.
245
-------
ORGANIZATION OF RECORDS
Record 1 is entered once in Data Group H. Record 2 has 48 entries and
uses 10 lines. Five entries (ANAME(K)-CONST(K) pairs) will fit per line.
2.4.2.9 DATA GROUP I: Miscellaneous Time Functions—
VARIABLES
Record 1—Number of Time Functions
NFUNC = 14 for eutrophication.
TITLE = Name of data group.
Record 2—Time Function Descriptions
ANAME(K) = an optional one to five alpha-numeric
character descriptive name for the time
function K.
NOBRK(K) = number of breaks used to describe the
time function K.
K = 1 , NFUNC
Listed below are the 14 time functions required for eutrophication.
The variable names will be entered for ANAME(K) in Record 2 and their
respective values will be entered in Record 3 for VALT(K) and T(K).
NOTE: Variables 1-4 are the four temperature-function options
available for TMPFN in data Group G. Variables 8-12 are the
five extinction coefficient options for KEFN, also in G.
K ANAME(K) VALT(K)
1 TEMP(1) = Time-variable temperature function 1. TEMP(K) can
be either a normalized function or an actual
temperature in °C, depending upon the definition
of the parameter multiplier TMPSG(ISEG).
2 TEMP(2) = Time-variable temperature function 2, unitless or
°C.
3 TEMP(3) = Time-variable temperature function 3, unitless or
°C.
4 TEMP(4) = Time-variable temperature function 4, unitless or
246
-------
5
6
7
8
ITOT
F
WIND
KE(1)
9 KE(2)
10 KE(3)
11 KE(4)
12 KE(5)
13 TFNH4
14 TFPO4
VALT(K)
T(K)
1 , NOBRK
Total daily solar radiation, langleys.
Fraction of daylight, days.
Wind velocity, feet/sec.
Time-variable extinction coefficient function 1.
This can be either a normalized function or an
actual extinction coefficient in ffl, depending
upon the definition of the parameter multiplier
KESG(ISEG).
Time-variable extinction coefficient function 2,
unitless or ft~1.
Time-variable extinction coefficient function 3,
unitless or ft~1.
Time-variable extinction coefficient function 4,
unitless or ff1.
Time-variable extinction coefficient function 5,
unitless or ff 1.
Normalized ammonium flux from bed, unitless.
Normalized phosphate flux from bed, unitless.
Record 3—Time Functions
value of the function at time T(K).
time in days. If the length of the simulation
exceeds T(NOBRK), the time function will repeat
itself, starting at T(1), i.e., the approximation is
assumed to be periodic, with period equal to T(NOBRK)
ORGANIZATION OF RECORDS
Record 1 is entered once in Data Group I. Records 2 and 3, as a set,
are repleated 14 times. Within each set, Record 2 is input once and Record
3 uses as many 80-space lines as needed to input NOBRK entries. Four
entries (four VALK(K)-T(K) pairs) will fit on each 80-space line.
2.4.2.10 DATA GROUP J: Initial Concentrations—
No changes. Input is repeated 8 times, once for each system.
247
-------
2.4.2.11 DATA GROUP K: Stability and Accuracy Criteria—
Record 1—Maximum concentrations for all eight systems are required.
Record 2--Minimum concentrations for all eight systems are required.
2.4.2.12 DATA GROUP L: Intermediate Print Control—
No changes.
2.4.2.13 DATA GROUP M: Integration Control—
No changes.
2.4.2.14 DATA GROUP N: Print Tables—
Input is repeated 8 times, once for each system.
Record 1—Variable Names
EUTRWASP displays the following variables for ANAME(K):
System 1: Ammonia, flow, ambient segment temperature, preference
factor.
System 2: Nitrate plus nitrate nitrogen, total nitrogen, total
inorganic nitrogen, nitrogen limitation factor for
phytoplankton growth.
System 3: Ortho-phosphate phosphorous, total phosphorus, nutrient
limitation indicator, phosphorus limitation factor.
System 4: Phytoplankton chlorophyll, phytoplankton carbon, light
limitation factor, nutrient limitation factor.
System 5: Carbonaceous BOD, ultimate BOD, sediment oxygen demand,
five day BOD.
System 6: Dissolved oxygen, dissolved oxygen deficit, minimum
diurnal DO value, maximum diurnal DO value.
System 7: Organic nitrogen, total organic nitrogen, reaeration
rate constant, ambient phytoplankton growth rate.
System 8: Organic phosphorous, total organic phosphorous, in-
organic nitrogen to phosphorous ratio, ambient light
extinction coefficient.
-------
2,4,2.15 DATA GROUP O: T imf r
No chanqes.
2.4.2.16 DATA GROUP p, ;7n.nti.,
No changes.
2.4.3 EUTRWASP Data Groyp T?bJ
RECOJRD |VARIABLE
i
1 NOPAM
TITLE
FOP-MAT
f'HORT DEFINITION
SCALP(1 )
SCALP(2)
SCALP(3)
SOALPU)
SCAL?( 5 )
|SCALP(6)
SCALP(7)
5A4
TviTTV"
VELSG
PARAM(T<-:EQ,4) ' ''" ".''
TMPSG ! '.'i
PARAM( r.SKG^I ' 1 n~f-
TMPFN
PARAM(ISEG,6) if, i\
KESG
PARAM(ISEG,7)
KEFN
PARAM(ISEG,8)
ED IF
A5
F1 0.0
A5
F1 0.0
A5
0}
~CALP( 1 1 )
2)
SCALP( 1 3 )
P ARAM (IS EG ,_9_) } F1_0_. 0
K'-/5
-15
16-20
21-30
31-35
36-45
46-SO
51-60
Environmental Parameters".
* factor for DEPTH.
i <-. levant,
re levant
;e factor for VKL;'GM,
.r> factor tor TMPSG.
r<-Levant.
•; factor tor KESG.
relevant.
Scale factor for EDIF.
Scale factor for SOD1D,
-Scdlft factor tor FPLPWC.
Scale factor for FNH4.
Scale factor for EPO4.
"jepth of segment,
FJag designating segment type.
Segment below current segment.
Water velocity, ft/sec.
Temperature multiplier, °c.
Flag designating the time-
variable temp, function.
Extinction coefficient
multiplier, 1/ft.
Flag designating the time
variable extinction coefficient
Dispersion coefficient for ex-
jchange of dissolved chemical.
-------
DATA GROUP G (Continued)
RECORD
3
VARIABLE
SOD1D
PARAM(ISEGIO)
FPIPW
PARAM(ISEG1 1 )
FNH4
PARAM(ISEG12)
FPO4
PARAM(ISEG1 3)
FORMAT
A5
F10.0
A5
F1 0 . 0
A5
F1 0.0
A5
F1 0.0
COLUMN
61-65
66-75
1-5
6-15
16-20
21-30
31-35
36-45
SHORT DEFINITION
Sediment oxygen demand, g/m2/
day.
Spatially variable of inorganic
PO4 sorbed to particulates , and
subject to settling.
Average ammonium flux multi-
plier, mg/m2/day.
Average phosphate flux multi-
plier, mg/m2/day.
ORGANIZATION OF RECORDS
122 333 333 ... 333
NOSEG
250
-------
DATA GROUP H
RECORD
1
2
2
2
2
VARIABLE
NCONS
TITLE
K1C
CONST( 1 )
K1T
CONST(2)
LGHTSW
CONST(3)
PHIMX
CONST(4)
XKC
CONST (5)
CCHL
CONST(6)
IS1
CONST(7)
KMNG1
CONST(8)
KMPG1
CONSTO)
K1RC
CONSTdO)
K1RT
CONST(1 1)
K1D
CONST (12)
KMPHYT
CONST(13)
PCRB
CONST(1 4)
NCRB
CONST(15)
OCRB
CONST (16)
NUTLIM
CONST(17)
DUMMY
CONST(18)
FSBOD
CONST(19)
FSDP
CONST (20)
FORMAT
15
5A4
A5
F10.0
A5
F10.0
A5
F10.0
A5
F10.0
A5
F10.0
A5
F10.0
A5
F10.0
A5
F10.0
A5
F10.0
A5
F10.0
A5
F10.0
A5
F10.0
A5
F10.0
A5
F10.0
A5
F10.0
A5
F10.0
A5
F10.0
A5
F10.0
A5
F10.0
AS
F10.0
-
COLUMN
1-10
61-80
1-5
6-15
16-20
21-30
31-35
36-45
46-50
51-60
61-65
66-75
1-5
6-15
16-20
21-30
31-35
36-45
46-50
51-60
61-65
66-75
1-5
6-15
16-20
21-30
31-35
36-45
46-50
51-60
61-65
66-75
1-5
6-15
16-20
21-30
31-35
36-45
46-50
51-60
61-65
66-75
-
SHORT DEFINITION
No. of constants required = 48
"H: Chemical Constants".
Saturated growth rate of
phytoplankton, 1/day.
Temperature coefficient.
Light formulation switch.
Maximum quantum yield con-
stant, mgC/mole photons.
Chlorophyll extinction coeffi-
cient, m2/mgchla
Carbon-to-chlorophyll ratio,
mg carbn/mgchla.
Saturation light, intensity
for phytoplankton, ly/day.
Nitrogen half saturation con-
stant for phytoplankton
growth, mg/N/L.
Phosphorous half-saturation
constant for phytoplankton
growth, mg PO4-P/L.
Endogenous respiration rate of
phytoplankton at 20°C, 1/day.
Temperature coefficient for
phytoplankton growth.
Non-predatory phytoplankton
death rate, 1/day.
Half -saturation constant for
phytoplankton, mg-carbon/L.
Phosphorous- to-carbon ratio in
phytoplankton, mg PO4~P/mg.
Nitrogen- to-carbon ratio in
phytoplankton, mg N/mg C.
Oxygen-to-carbon ratio in
phytoplankton, mg 02 /mg C.
Nutrient limitation option.
Leave blank.
Fraction of the carbonaceous
biochemical oxygen demand
that settles.
Fraction of the total non-
living organic phosphorus
that settles.
251
-------
DATA GROUP H
(Continued)
RECORD
2
2
2
2
VARIABLE
FSIP
CONST(21)
FSON
CONSTC22)
K58C
CONST(23)
K58T
CONST(24)
K1013C
CONST(25)
K1013T
CONST(26)
K1320C
CONST(27)
K1320T
CONST(28)
K140C
CONST(29)
K140T
CONST (30)
KNIT
CONST(31)
KNO3
CONST (3 2)
KDC
CONST(33)
KDT
CONST (3 4)
SVPL1
CONST (35)
SVPP
CONST (3 6)
SVPN
CONST(37)
SVBOD
CONST (3 8)
SEDVEL
CONST(39)
SCOUR
CONST(40)
FORMAT
A5
F10.0
A5
F10.0
A5
F10.0
A5
F10.0
A5
F1 0.0
A5
F10.0
A5
F10.0
A5
F10.0
A5
F10.0
A5
F10.0
A5
F1 0.0
A5
F10.0
A5
F10.0
A5
F1 0.0
A5
F10.0
A5
F1 0.0
A5
F10.0
A5
F10.0
A5
F10.0
A5
F10.0
COLUMN
1-5
6-15
16-20
21-30
31-35
36-45
46-50
51-60
61-65
66-75
1-5
6-15
16-20
21-30
31-35
36-45
46-50
51-60
61-65
66-75
1-5
6-15
16-20
21-30
31-35
36-45
46-50
51-60
61-65
66-75
1-5
6-15
16-20
21-30
31-35
36-45
46-50
51-60
61-65
66-75
SHORT DEFINITION
Spatially-constant fraction of
inorganic phosphorus that
settles.
Fraction of total non-living
organic nitrogen that settles
Mineralization rate of dis-
solved organic phosphorus,
1/day.
Temperature coefficient for
K58C.
Mineralization rate of dis-
solved organic, nitrogen,
1/day.
Temperature coefficient for
K1013C.
Nitrification rate at 20°C,
1/day.
Temperature coefficient for
K1320C.
Denitrif ication rate at 20°C,
1/day.
Temperature coefficient for
K140C.
Half-saturation constant for
nitrification-oxygen limita-
tion, mg O2/L.
Half-saturation constant for
denitrif ication oxygen limi-
tation, mgO2/L.
BOD deoxygenation rate at
20°C, 1/day.
Temperature coefficient for
carbonaceous deoxygenation in
water column.
Settling velocity of phyto-
plank ton , 1/day .
Settling velocity of particu-
late phosphorus, ft/day.
Settling velocity of particu-
late organic nitrogen, ft/day
Settling velocity of particu-
late BOD fraction, ft/day.
Sediment velocity, in/yr.
Mean scour velocity, in/yr.
252
-------
DATA GROUP H
(Continued)
RECORD
2
2
VARIABLE
KPZDC
CONSTUD
KPZDT
CONST (4 2)
KOPDC
CONST(43)
KOPDT
CONST(44)
KONDC
CONST(45)
KONDT
CONST(46)
KDSC
CONST(47)
KDST
CONST (4 8)
KBOD
CONST(49)
FORMAT
A5
F10.0
A5
F10.0
A5
F10.0
A5
F10.0
A5
F10.0
A5
F10.0
A5
F10.0
A5
F10.0
A5
F10.0
COLUMN
1-5
6-15
16-20
21-30
31-35
36-45
46-50
51-60
61-65
66-75
1-5
6-15
16-20
21-30
31-35
36-45
46-50
51-55
SHORT DEFINITION
Decomposition rate constant
for phytoplankton in the
sediment of 20°C, 1/day.
Temperature coefficient for
decomposition of phytoplank-
ton in sediment.
Decomposition rate of organic
phosphorus in sediment at
20°C, 1/day.
Temperature coefficient for
decomposition of organic
phosphorus in the sediment.
Decompsoition rate constant
for organic nitrogen in the
sediment at 20°C, 1/day.
Temperature coefficient for
decomposition of organic
nitrogen in the sediment.
Decomposition rate of carbo-
naceous BOD in the sediment
at 20°C, 1/day.
Temperature coefficient for
carbonaceous deoxygenation
in the sediment.
Half saturation constant for
carbonaceous deoxygenation
oxygen limitation.
ORGANIZATION OF RECORDS
|1[2T2|2|2|2|2|2|2|2|2|
253
-------
•DATA GROUP I
RECORD
1
2
3
2
3
2
3
2
3
2
VARIABLE
NFUNC
TITLE
TEMPO)
NOBRK
VALT(K)
T(K)
VALT(K)
T(K)
VALT(K)
T(K)
VALT(K)
T(K)
VALT(K)
T(K)
TEMP(2)
NOBRK
VALT(K)
T(K)
VALT(K)
T(K)
TEMP(3)
NOBRK
VALT(K)
T(K)
VALT(K)
T(K)
TEMP(4)
NOBRK
VALT(K)
T(K)
•
VALT(K)
T(K)
I TOT
NOBRK
FORMAT
15
5A4
A5
15
F10.0
F10.0
F10.0
F10.0
F10.0
F10.0
F10.0
F10.0
F10.0
F10.0
A5
15
F10.0
F10.0
.
.
A5
15
F10.0
F10.0
•
.
A5
15
F10.0
F10.0
•
•
.
A5
15
COLUMN
1-5
61-80
1-5
6-10
1-10
11-20
21-30
31-40
41-50
51-60
61-70
71-80
•
.
1-5
6-10
1-10
11-20
•
.
1-5
6-10
1-10
11-20
A
.
1-5
6-10
1-10
11-20
*
.
1-5
6-10
SHORT DEFINITION
No. time functions required ~ 14
"I: Time Functions."
Time variable temp, function.
Number breaks used.
Value of time functions.
Time in days; K = 1 .
K = 2
K = 3
K - 4
K = NOBRK(I)
Time-variable temp, function.
Number breaks used.
Value of time functions.
Time in days; K = 1 .
*
•
K « NOBRK
Time-variable temp, function.
Number breaks used.
Value of time functions.
Time in days; K = 1.
•
K = NOBRK
Time-variable temp, function.
Number breaks used.
Value of time functions.
Time in days; K = 1 .
*
•
K - NOBRK
Total daily solar radiation, ly.
Number breaks used.
254
-------
DATA GROUP I
(Continued)
RECORD
3
2
3
2
3
2
3
2
3
2
3
VARIABLE
VALT(K)
T(K)
•
VALT(K)
T(K)
F
NOBRK
VALT(K)
T(K)
•
VALT(K)
T(K)
WIND
NOBRK
VALT(K)
T(K)
VALT(K)
T(K)
KE(1)
NOBRK
VALT(K)
T(K)
•
VALT(K)
T(K)
KE(2)
NOBRK
VALT(K)
T(K)
VALT(K)
T(K)
KE(3)
NOBRK
VALT(K)
T(K)
FORMAT
F10.0
F10.0
•
•
.
A5
15
F10.0
F10.0
•
•
.
A5
15
F10.0
F10.0
•
.
A5
15
F10.0
F10.0
•
•
.
A5
15
F10.0
F10.0
•
.
A5
15
F10.0
F10.0
COLUMN
1-10
11-20
•
•
.
1-5
6-10
1-10
11-20
•
•
.
1-5
6-10
1-10
11-20
•
.
1-5
6-10
1-10
11-20
•
•
.
1-5
6-10
1-10
1 1-20
•
.
1-5
6-10
1-10
11-20
SHORT DEFINITION
Value of time functions.
Time in days; K =. 1 .
•
•
K = NOBRK
Fraction of day light, day.
Number breaks used.
Value of time functions.
Time in days; K = 1 .
•
•
K = NOBRK
Wind velocity, ft/sec.
Number breaks used.
Value of time functions.
Time in days; K = 1 .
•
K = NOBRK
Time variable extinction coef.
function.
Number breaks used.
Value of time functions.
Time in days; K = 1 .
•
•
K = NOBRK
Time variable extinction coef.
function.
Number breaks used.
Value of time functions.
Time in days; K = 1 .
•
N = NOBRK
Time variable extinction coef .
function.
Number breaks used.
Value of time functions.
Time in days; K = 11
255
-------
DATA GROUP I
(Continued)
RECORD
2
3
2
3
2
3
2
3
VARIABLE
*
VALT(K)
T(K)
KE(4)
NOBRK
VALT(K)
T(K)
•
VALT(K)
T(K)
KE(5)
NOBRK
VALT(K)
T(K)
VALT(K)
T(K)
TFNH4
NOBRK
VALT(K)
T(K)
•
VALT(K)
T(K)
TFPO4
NOBRK
VALT(K)
T(K)
•
VALT(K)
T(K)
FORMAT
•
.
A5
15
F10.0
F10.0
•
.
.
A5
15
F10.0
F10.0
•
.
A5
15
F10.0
F10.0
*
•
.
A5
15
F10.0
F10.0
•
*
•
COLUMN
•
.
1-5
6-10
1-10
11-20
•
.
.
1-5
6-10
1-10
11-20
• *
.
1-5
6-10
1-10
11-20
*
.
1-5
6-10
1-10
11-20
•
•
•
SHORT DEFINITION
•
K = NOBRK
Time variable extinction coef.
Number breaks used.
Value of time functions.
Time in days; K = 1 .
•
.
K = NOBRK
Time variable extinction coef.
Number breaks used.
Value of time functions.
Time in days; K = 1 .
•
K = NOBRK
Normalized ammonium flux from
bed.
Number breaks used.
Value of time functions.
Time in days; K = 1 .
K = NOBRK
Normalized phosphate flux from
bed.
Number breaks used.
Value of time functions.
Time in days; K = 1 .
•
K = NOBRK
ORGANIZATION OF RECORDS
111 I2I3I...I3I |2|3|...|3|
23
256
-------
2.4.4 Variable Definitions
VARIABLE
AVDEPE
AVVELE
BODS
BOTSG(ISEG)
CBOD
CCHL*
CCHL1
CPOREA
CN
CS
DEL02
DERIV
DIF
DEATH
POUND IN
SUBROUTINE
EUO 3K2
EUO 3K2
EUO3DU
WASPB
EU03SX
EUO 31 N
WASPB ,
EU03S5
EU03S4
EU03IN
EUO3S4
EUO 3K2
EO03S4
EU03S6
EU03DU
EUO 3D U
EUO3S3
EUO3S7
EUO3S8
EU03K2
EU03S5
DEFINITION
Average depth for a segment.
Average velocity of a segment.
5 Day biochemical oxygen demand.
The segment immediately below ISEG.
Carbonaceous biochemical oxygen demand.
Carbon to chlorophyll ratio (used only
in Di Toro1 s light formulation) varies
in time if Dick Smith's light formu-
lation is used — constant is internally
calculated.
Carbon to chlorophyll ratio that varies
in time if Dick Smith's light formu-
lation is used.
Fraction of surface area affected by
wind-driven reaeration, set equal to
1 .0.
Total inorganic nitrogen.
Dissolved oxygen saturation concentra-
tion.
Diurnal dissolved oxygen variation.
Intermediate kinetic derivative.
Internal variable used to determine
whether Churchill's or O'Connor-
Dobbin's reaeration formula is used.
Phytoplankton death rate.
UNITS
ft
ft/sec
mg/L
unit-
less
mg/L
mg
carbon/
mg chla
mg/
carbon/
mg chla
ft?/
ft?
mg/L
mg/L
mg/L
mg/L
MCF/
day
unit-
less
mg/L-
day
257
-------
VARIABLE
DEPTH(ISBG)
DEPTHM
DODEF
DOM AX
DOMIN
DPP
DO
DP1
DTDAY
EDIF(ISEG)
EXCH
EXPRED
EXPREV
F*
FLOW
FOUND IN
SUBROUTINE
WASPB
WASPB
EU03S6
EU03DU
EU03DU
EU03DU
EU03S4
EU03S5
EU03S7
EU03S8
WASPB
EU03DU
EUO 3S6
EU03S1
EU03S4
EU03S4
EUO 31 N
EUO 3SX
EUO 3SX
EU03K2
EU03K2
EUO 3S4
EU03DU
DEFINITION
Depth of IS EG.
Depth of segment.
The dissolved oxygen deficit.
DO + DEL02/2 maximum diurnal DO.
DO - DEL02/2 minimum diurnal DO.
Phytoplankton death rate.
Dissolved oxygen concentration.
Specific phytoplankton death rate con-
stant (Respiration + Death) .
Time of day increment (expressed as
decimal fraction) used in integrating
Smith light formulation over day.
Dispersion coefficient for exchange of
dissolved chemical between ISEG and
IBOT; Converted to dispersion volume
internally, million ft^/day.
Dispersive volume exchanged between
benthic and water column segments.
Depth exponent used reaeration calcula-
tions.
Velocity exponent used in reaeration
calculations.
Fraction of day that is daylight, input
as time function.
Flow.
UNITS
ft
m
mg/L
mg/L
mg/L
m/(1
day-1)
mg/L
day-1
unit-
less
cm2/
day
MCF/
day
unit-
less
unit-
less
days
MCF/
day
258
-------
VARIABLE
FNH4(ISEG)*
FLUX
FP04(ISEG)*
FPIPWC*
(ISBG)
FSBOD*
FSIP*
FSON*
FSOP*
GITMAX
GITMX1
GIT1
GPP
GP1
POUND IN
SUBROUTINE
EU03IN
EU03SX
EU03SX
S1 ,S2,S3,
S4,S5,S6,
S7,S8
EU03IN
EU03SY
EUO3S3
EUO355
EUO3S3
EU03S7
EUO3S8
EUO3S4
EUO3S4
EUO3S4
EUO3S4
EUO3S3
EU03S4
EU03S6
EU03S1
EU03S2
DEFINITION
Average ammonium-N flux multiplier for
segment ISEG, input parameter for
water column networks.
Rate at which a constituent settles to
or exchanges with a lower segment.
Average phosphate-p flux multiplier for
segment ISEG input parameter for water
column networks.
Spatially variable fraction of inorganic
phosphorus that is sorbed to parti-
culate and settles.
Fraction of the carbonaceous bio-
chemical oxygen demand that settles.
Spatially-constant fraction of inorganic
phosphorus that is sorbed to parti-
culate and settles.
Fraction of non-living organic nitrogen
that settles.
Fraction of non-living organic phos-
phorus that settles.
Maximum specific phytoplankton growth
rate.
Maximum specific phytoplankton growth
rate corrected for temperature.
Light limited specific phytoplankton
growth rate.
Light and nutrient limited phytoplankton
growth rate.
Light and nutrient limited specific
phytoplankton growth rate.
UNITS
unit-
less
mg/L
unit-
less
unit-
less
unit-
less
unit-
less
unit-
less
unit-
less
days-1
days"1
day-1
mg/L/
day
day-1
259
-------
VARIABLE
H
IAV
IBOT
IDFREC
IKE
IMAX
IS1*
I TO
I TOT*
10
KA
KBOD
KDC*
KDSC*
KDST*
POUND IN
SUBROUTINE
WASPB
EU03K2
WASPB
EUO 3S4
EU03SX
WASPB
EU03S4
EUO 3S4
EU03S4
WASPB
WASPB ,
EUO 3S4
EUO 3S4
EUO 3S6
EUO 3S5
EU03S5
EU03S5
EU03S5
DEFINITION
Depth of segment being considered.
Average light intensity during daylight
hours, converted to Ly/min in Smith
formulation.
The segment immediately below ISEG.
POP version set up as a record pointer.
The number of the time-variable extinc-
tion coefficient used for ISEG.
Maximum light intensity during the day.
Saturating light intensity for phyto-
plankton (used only if using Di Toro
light formulation) .
The segment immediately below ISEG.
Total daily solar radiation, input as
time function.
Light intensity at surface of segment; a
sinusoidal function used in Smith
formulation.
Reaeration rate constant at segment
temperature.
Half saturation constant for oxygen
limitation of carbonaceous deoxygena-
tion.
Specific carbonaceous BOD deoxyenation
rate at 20°C.
Specific decomposition rate of carbo-
naceous BOD in benthos at 20° C.
Temperature coefficient for carbonaceous
deoxygenation in benthos.
UNITS
ft
Ly/day
unit-
less
unit-
less
unit-
less
Ly/day
Ly/day
unit-
less
Ly
Ly/day
day-1
mg/L
day-1
day-1
unit-
less
260
-------
VARIABLE
POUND IN
SUBROUTINE
DEFINITION
UNITS
KDT*
KE(I)
KEFN(ISEG)
KESG(ISEG)
KESHD
KMNG1*
KMPG1
KMPHYT*
KNIT*
KNO3*
KONDC*
KONDT*
KOPDC*
KOPDT*
KOREA
EU03S5
WASPB
EUO 3S4
EU03S4
EU03S4
EUO 3S4
EU03S4
EU03S4
EUO3S5
EUO352
EU03S7
EU03S7
EUO 3S8
EUO 3S8
EUO 3K2
Temperature coefficient for carbonaceous
deoxygenation in water column
Light extinction coetficient, time
function number I = 1-5.
Light extinction time function chosen
for ISEG.
Average light extinction multiplier for
ISEG.
Phytoplankton self-shading coefficient,
used in Di Toro formulation.
Nitrogen half saturation constant for
phytoplankton growth, which also
affects ammonia preference.
Phosphorus half saturation constant for
phytoplankton growth.
Half saturation constant for phytoplank-
ton effects on mineralization of
organic phosphorus and nitrogen.
Half saturation constant for oxygen
limitation of nitrification.
Half saturation constant for denitrifi-
cation oxygen limitation.
Decomposition rate constant for organic
nitrogen in the benthos at 20°C.
Temperature coefficient for decomposi-
tion of organic nitrogen in the
benthos.
Decomposition rate constant for organic
phosphorus in the benthos at 20°C.
Temperature coefficient for decomposi-
tion of organic phosphorus in the
benthos.
Reaeration rate constant based on wind
speed, surface area, and volume.
unit-
less
ft-1
unit-
less
unit-
less
ft-1
mg-N/L
mg
PO4-P/L
mg
CRB/L
mg 02/
L
mgO2/L
day-1
unit-
less
day-1
unit-
less
day-1
261
-------
VARIABLE
KPZDC*
KPZDT*
K1C*
K1D*
K1RC*
K1RT*
K1T*
K1013C*
K1013T*
K1320C*
K1320T*
K140C*
K140T*
K20
K58C*
K58T*
POUND IN
SUBROUTINE
EU03S4
EU03S4
EUO 3S4
EU03S4
EU03S5
EUO 3S4
EUO 3S 4
EU03S4
EUO 3S7
EU03S7
EU03S1
EU03S1
EUO352
EUO352
EUO 3K2
EU03S6
EU03S8
EUO 3S8
DEFINITION
Specific decomposition rate of phyto-
plankton in the benthos at 20°C.
Temperature coefficient for decomposi-
tion of phytoplankton in the benthos.
(Const). Maximum saturated growth rate
of phytoplankton at 20°C.
(Const). Non-predatory phytoplankton
death rate.
Endogenous respiration rate for phyto-
plankton at 20°C.
Temperature coefficient for phytoplank-
ton respiration
(Const). Temperature coefficient for
phytoplankton growth.
Mineralization rate constant for diss-
olved organic nitrogen.
Temperature coefficient for mineraliza-
tion of dissolved organic nitrogen.
Nitrification rate constant at 20°C.
Temperature coefficient for nitrifica-
tion.
Denitrification rate at 20°C.
Temperature coefficient for K140C.
Reaeration rate constant at 20°C.
Mineralization rate constant for dis-
solved organic phosphorous.
Temperature coefficient for mineraliza-
tion of dissolved organic phosphorus.
UNITS
day"1
unit-
less
day1
day~1
unit-
less
unit-
less
unit-
less
day"1
unit-
less
day-1
unit-
less
day-1
unit-
less
day-1
day1
unit-
less
262
-------
VARIABLE
LGHTSW*
LIMIT
NCRB*
NH3
N03
NUTLIM*
OCRB*
ON
OP
OPO4
PCRB*
PHIMX*
PHYT
POUND IN
SUBROUTINE
EU03S4
EUO 3DU
EU03S1 ,
EU03S2,
EUO 3S7
WASPB ,
EU03S1 ,
EU03S4,
EUO 3D U
WASPB,
EUO 3D U
EU03S4
EU03S5
WASPB,
EU03S7,
EU03DU
WASPB ,
EUO 3S8 ,
EUO 3DU
WASPB ,
EU03S3,
EUO 3D U
EU03S3,
EUO 3S8
EU03S4
WASPB ,
EUO 3S4 ,
EUO 31 N,
EU03S1 ,
DEFINITION
Light formulation switch: 0 = use Dick
Smith's (USGS) formulation; 1 = use
Di Toro et al. (1971) formulation.
Nutrient limitation indicator ( "+" =
nitrogen, "-" = phosphorus) .
Nitrogen to carbon ratio in phytoplank-
ton.
Segment ammonia concentration.
Segment nitrite and nitrate nitrogen
concentration.
Nutrient limitation option: 0 = minimum;
1 = multiplicative.
Oxygen to carbon ratio in phytoplankton.
Segment organic nitrogen concentration.
Segment organic phosphorus concentra-
tion.
Segment orthophosphate concentration.
Phosphorus to carbon ratio in phyto-
plankton.
Maximum quantum yield constant (used
with Smith formulation) .
Phytoplankton biomass as carbon.
UNITS
unit-
less
unit-
less
mg N/
mg CRB
mg-N/L
mg-N/L
unit-
less
mg-02/
mg CRB
mg/L
mg/L
mg/L
mg P04-
p/mgCRB
mg CRB/
mole
photons
mg/L
263
-------
VARIABLE
PI
PNH3G1
RATIO
REAR
RESP
RLIGHT
RNUTR
SA
SCOUR
SDEPTH
SEDSEG
POUND IN
SUBROUTINE
EU03S2,
EU03S6
EUO 3S4
EU03S4,
EU03S1 ,
EU03S2
EUO 3D U
EUK03K2
EU03S4,
EU03S6
EU03S4
EUO 3S4
EU03IN
EU03IN
EUO3S3
EUO3S4
EU03S5
EU03S7
EUO3S8
EUO 3IN
WASPB ,
EUO 31 N,
EU03S3,
EU03S4,
EUO 3S5 ,
EU03S6,
EU03S7,
EU03S8
DEFINITION
Math function Pi.
Preference factor for ammonia over
nitrate.
Inorganic nitrogen to phosphorus ratio.
Multiplier used in calculating reaera-
tion rate.
Phytoplankton respiration rate.
Light limitation factor for phytoplank-
ton growth.
Nutrient limitation factor for phyto-
plankton.
Surface area of current segment.
Mean scour velocity.
NOTE: Gross deposition = scour + SEDVEL
Depth of surficial benthic sediment
layer.
Sediment segment indicator; .FALSE. =
water column segment; .TRUE. =
sediment segment.
UNITS
unit-
less
mg/mg
uni t-
less
mg/L/
day
unit-
less
unit-
less
million
ft2
in/yr
ft
unit-
less
264
-------
VARIABLE
SEDVEL*
SKE
SK1013
SK13P1
SK1314
SK14P1
SK140D
SK180D
SK180
SK19P
SK19S
SK1913
SK1918
SK58
POUND IN
SUBROUTINE
EU03IN,
EU03S3,
EU03S4,
EU03S5,
EU03S7,
EU03S8
EUO 3S4
EU03S1 ,
EU03S7
EU03S1
EU03S1 ,
EU03S2,
EUO 3S6
EU03S2
EU0352
EUO355
EUO355
EUO 3S5 ,
EUO 3S6
EU03S6
EUO 3S6
EU03S6
EUO 3S6
EUO 3S8 ,
EU03S3
DEFINITION
Sedimentation velocity converted
internally, converted to ft/day inter-
nally.
Total ambient light extinction coeffi-
cient.
Rate at which organic nitrogen is
mineralized to ammonia.
Rate at which ammonia is taken up by
phy toplank ton .
Rate at which ammonia is nitrified to
nitrate.
Rate at which nitrate is taken up by
phytoplank ton .
Rate at which nitrate is reduced by
denitrif ication
Rate at which CBOD is reduced by
denitrif ication.
Rate at which CBOD is oxidized.
Rate at which oxygen is consumed by
phytoplankton respiration.
Rate at which oxygen is consumed by
benthic sediments.
Rate at which oxygen is consumed by
nitrification.
Rate at which oxygen is consumed by
CBOD.
Rate at which organic phosphorus is
mineralized to phosphate.
UNITS
in/yr
ft-1
mg/(L-
day)
mg/(L-
day)
mg/(L-
day)
mg/(L-
day)
mg/(L-
day)
mg/CL-
day
mg/(L-
day)
mg/(L-
day)
mg/(L-
day)
mg/(L-
day)
mg/(L-
day)
mg/(L-
day)
265
-------
VARIABLE
SK8P
SOD
SODID(ISEG)
SR1 30N
SR1 413
SR18P
SR19PA
SR1 9PB
SR190
SR5P
SR80P
STP •
STP20
SUM
FOUND IN
SUBROUTINE
EU03S3
EU03DU
EU03DU,
EU03S6
EU03S1
EU03S2
EU03S5
EU03S6
EU03S6
EUO 3S6
EUO 3S8
EU03S3
WASPB ,
EU03DU
EU03S1 ,
EUO 3S2 ,
EU03S3,
EU03S4,
EUO 3S5 ,
EU03S6,
EU03S7,
EUO 3S8
EUO 3S4
DEFINITION
Rate at which phosphate is taken up by
phytoplankton.
Sediment oxygen demand.
Sediment oxygen demand input for 1 -D
networks.
Rate at which ammonia is mineralized
from organic nitrogen.
Rate at which nitrate is nitrified
from ammonia.
Rate at which CBOD is generated from
phytoplankton death.
Rate at which DO is produced by phyto-
plankton growth using ۩2 and NH3 .
Rate at which DO is produced by phyto-
plankton growth using CO2 and NO3 .
Rate at which DO is added by reaeration.
Rate at which organic phosphorus is
produced from phytoplankton respira-
tion and death.
Rate at which phosphate is mineralized
from organic phosphorus.
Temperature of the segment being
considered.
Difference between segment temperature
and 20°C.
Temporary variable used in integrating
Smith light formulation over day.
UNITS
mg/(L-
day)
gDO/(m2
-day)
gDO/(m2
-day)
mg/(L-
day)
mg/(L-
day)
mg/(L-
day)
mg/(l>
day)
mg/( 1.1-
day)
mg/(L-
day)
mg/(L-
day)
mg/(L-
day)
C°
°C
unit-
less
266
-------
VARIABLE
SVBOD*
SVPN*
SVPP*
SVP1*
SW16A
TCHLA
TCHLAX
TEMP(I)
TPNH4
THP04
TIN
TIP
TMPSG
TMPFN(ISEG)
TN
TON
TOP
POUND IN
SUBROUTINE
EUO 3S5
EUO 3S7
EU03S3,
EU03S8
EU03S4
WASPB,
EU03S4
EUO3DU
EUO3S4
EUO3DU
HASPS
EU03SX
EUO3SX
EUO3DU
EUO3DU
WASPB
WASPB
EU03DU
EU03DU
EU03DU
DEFINITION
Settling velocity of particulate BOD
fraction.
Settling velocity of particulate organic
nitrogen.
Settling velocity of particulate
phosphorus .
Settling velocity of phytoplankton.
Internal switch indicating the passage
of a day, used to trigger Smith light
integration.
Phytoplankton chlorophylla concen-
tration
Phytoplankton chlorophylla concentra-
tion.
Temperature time function No. I (I =
1-4) for segments indicated by TMPFN
(ISEG).
Normalized time function for ammonium
flux from bed.
Normalized time function for phosphate
flux from bed.
Total inorganic nitrogen concentration.
Total inorganic phosphorus concentratin.
Average water temperature multiplier for
ISBG.
Temperature time function chosen for
ISEG.
Total nitrogen concentration.
Total organic nitrogen concentration.
Total organic phosphorus concentration.
UNITS
ft/day
ft/day
ft/day
ft/day
unit-
less
mg/1
ug/L
°C
mg-N/ (
m2-day)
mg-p/ (
m2-day)
mg/L
mg/L
unit-
less
unit-
less
mg/L
mg/L
mg/L
267
-------
VARIABLE
TRANDP
TYPEE(ISEG)
T16A
UBOD
VEL
VELSG(ISEG)
VELSGM
VOL
WIND*
WINDF
WINDSG
XEMPRC
XEMP1
XEMP2
XKC*
FOUND IN
SUBROUTINE
EU03K2
WASPB
EU03IN
EU03SX
WASPB
EU03DO
EU03S3,
EU03S4,
EU03S5,
EU03S7,
EU03S8
WASPB
WASPB ,
EU03K2
WASPB ,
EUO 3D U
WASPB
EU03K2
WASPB ,
EU03K2
EU03S4,
EUO 3S7 ,
EUO 3S8
EU03S4
EUO 3S4
EU03S4
DEFINITION
The transition depth used to determine
which reaeration formula should be
used for a given current velocity.
Type of segment: 1 = surface water
2 = subsurface water
3 = surface bed
Elapsed fraction of day, set to 0 at end
of each day, used to trigger SW16A.
Ultimate (30 day) BOD.
Generalized settling velocity, used
internally.
Water velocity in ISEG
Water velocity in a segment.
Volume of current segment.
Time-varying wind velocity.
Windspeed factor influencing reaeration.
Time varying wind velocity.
Phytoplankton limitation factor for the
mineralization of organic nitrogen and
organic phosphorus.
Nitrogen limitation factor for phy to-
pi ank ton.
Phosphorus limitation factor for phyto-
plankton.
Chlorophyll extinction coefficient used
with Smith light formulation.
UNITS
ft.
uni t-
less
uni t-
less
mg/L
ft/day
ft/sec
ft/sec
million
ft3
ft/sec
cm/hr
ft/sec
unit-
less
unit-
less
unit-
less
(mg chl
-a/m3 )
268
-------
2.5 THE TOXICS MODEL
2.5.1 Introduction
TOXIWASP requires the same input format as the basic WASPS model. This
format is explained in detail in Section 2.3. This section describes vari-
ables needed specifically for TOXIWASP. Elaborations on WASPS occur only in
Data Groups G, H, and I. Records or variables within a record that are not
mentioned here remain the same as described in Section 2.3.
As mentioned in Table 19, the 2 systems for toxics modeling are chemical
and sediment. In data groups E, F, J, N, and O, input will be repeated
twice, once for each system.
2.5.2 TOXIWASP Data Group Descriptions
2.5.2.1 DATA GROUP A: Model Identification and System Bypass Option--
Record 1 —Model Identification
NOSYS = 2 for TOXIWASP.
2.5.2.2 DATA GROUP B: Exchange Coefficients—
No changes.
2.5.2.3 DATA GROUP C: Volumes—
No changes.
2.5.2.4 DATA GROUP D: Plows—
No changes.
2.5.2.5 DATA GROUP E: Boundary Concentrations—
No changes. Input is repeated twice, once for each system.
2.5.2.6 DATA GROUP F: Waste Loads—
No changes. Input is repeated twice, once for each system.
269
-------
2.5.2.7 DATA GROUP G: Environmental Parameters—
NOPAM
TITLE
VARIABLES
Record 1—Number of Parameters
18 for TOXIWASP.
name of data group.
Record 2—Scale Factors for Parameters
SCALP(K) = scale factor for parameter K.
K = 1, NOPAM
Record 3—Segment Parameters
ANAME(K) = an optional one to five alpha-numeric character
descriptive name for parameter PARAM(ISEG,K).
PARAM(ISEG,K) = the value of parameter ANAME(K) in segment ISEG.
K = 1, NOPAM
ISEG = 1, NOSEG
Listed below are the 18 parameters required by TOXIWASP. Enter these
names and their respective values in place of ANAME(K) and PARAM(ISEG,K).
PARAM(ISEG,K)
ANAME(K) Definition and Units
1 TEMPM(ISEG,1)
2 DEPTHG(ISEG,2)
3 VELOC(ISEG,3)
4 WINDG(ISEG,4)
TEMSG
DEPTH
VELOC
WINDG
5 TYPEE(ISEG,5) TYPEE
6 BACTOG(ISEG,6) BACTO
Average temperature for segment (degrees C)
Depth of segment (feet).
Average velocity of water in segment
(feet per second) .
Average wind velocity 10 cm above the
water surface (surface water segments
only) (meters per second).
Flag designating segment type.
Bacterial population density in segment
(cells per milliliter (water) cells
per 100 grams dry weight (bed)).
270
-------
K PARAM(ISEG,K) ANAME(K)
7 ACBACG(ISEG,7) ACBAC
8 BIOMAS(ISEG,8) BIOMS
9 BIOTMG(ISBG,9) BIOTM
10 POHG(ISEG,10) POHG
11 OXRADG(ISEG,11) OXRAD
12 OCS(ISEG,12) OCS
13 PCTWA(ISEG,13) PCTWA
14 DSPSED(ISEG,14) DSPSD
15 PHG(ISEG,15) PHG
16 WS(ISEG,16)
WS,WR,
or QP
17 CMPETG(ISEG,17) CMPET
18 TOTKG(ISEG,18) TOTKG
Definition and Units
Proportion of bacterial population that
actively degrades chemical (dimensionless
ratio).
Total actively sorbing biomass in segment
(mg (dry weight) per liter (water) or
grams (dry weight) per square meter
(bed)).
Biotemperature in segment (degrees C).
Hydroxide ion activity in segment
(pOH units).
Molar concentration of environmental
oxidants in segment (moles per liter).
Organic carbon content of sediments as
fraction of dry weight (dimensionless).
Percent water in benthic sediments,
expressed as fresh/dry weight; all
values must be greater than or equal
to 1 (dimensionless).
Fraction of sediment volume that mixes
(dimensionless).
Hydrogen ion activity in segment (pH
units).
Spatially variable parameter denoting
settling rate of suspended sediment
in water column segments (types 1 and
2), erosion rate of surface bed sediment
in surface bed segment (type 3), or
percolation of pore water through
subsurface bed segments (type 4) (meters
per day (1, 2); cm per year (3); cubic
feet per second (4)).
Single-valued zenith light extinction
coefficients (for water segments
only) (per meter).
Total first order decay rates calculated
externally, if equal to zero, the
program evaluates all separate processes
and calculates a combined total first
order decay rate internally (per day).
271
-------
ORGANIZATION OF RECORDS
Record 1 is input once in Data Group G, occupying one line. Record 2
has 18 entries occupying 24 lines with eight entries per line. Record 3 has
18 entries per segment. At five entries per line, four lines are used for
each segment.
2.5.2.8 DATA GROUP H: Chemical Constants—
NCONS
TITLE
VARIABLES
Record 1 —Number of Constants
66 for TOXIWASP.
name of data group.
ANAME(K)
CONST(K)
K =
1 , 66
Record 2—Constants
an optional one to ive alpha-numeric character
descriptive name for constant CONST(K).
the value of constant ANAME(K).
Listed below are the 66 constants required for eutrophication. Enter
these variable names and their values, respectively, for ANAME(K) and
CONST(K).
1,2,3
4,5,6
7,8,9
10,1 1 ,12
CONST(K)
EBHG(I,1)
ENHG(I,1)
EAHG(I,1)
KAHG(I,1)
ANAME(K) DEFINITION AND UNITS
EBHG1 Arrhenius activation energy of
EBHG2 specific-base-catalyzed hydrolysis
EBHG3 of the toxicant (kcal/gram mole).
ENHG1 Arrhenius activation energy of
ENHG2 neutral hydrolysis of the toxicant
ENHG3 (kcal/gram mole).
EAGH1 Arrhenius activation energy of
EAHG2 specific-acid-catalyzed hydrolysis
EAGH3 of toxicant (kcal/gram mole).
KAHG1 Second-order rate constants for
KAHG2 specific-acid=catalyzed hydrolysis
KAHG3 of chemical (per mole [H+] per hour)
272
-------
CONST(K)
ANAME(K) DEFINITION AND UNITS
13,14,15
16,17,18
KBHG(1,1)
KNHG(I,1)
KBHG1
KBHG2
KBHG3
KNHG1
KNHG2
KNHG3
Second-order rate constants for
specific-base-catalyzed hydrolysis of
chemical (per mole [OH-] per hour).
Rate constants for neutral hydrolysis
of organic chemical (per hour).
19,20,21
22,23,24
25,26,27
28,29,30
31,32,33
34,35,36
37
38
39
EOXG(I,1) EOXG1
EOXG2
EOXG3
KOXG(1,1) KOXG1
KOXG2
KOXG3
KBACWG(I,1) KBCW1
KBCW2
KBCW3
QTBAWG(I,1) QTBW1
QTBW2
OTBW3
KBACSG(I,1) KBCS1
KBCS2
KBCS3
QTBASG(I,1) OTBS1
QTBS2
OTBS3
KOC
KOW
OCB
KOC
KOW
OCB
Arrhenius activation energy of oxida-
tive transformation of the chemical
(kcal/gram mole).
Second-order rate constants for
oxidative transformation of toxicant
(liter per mole environmental oxidant
per hour).
Second-order rate constants for water
column bacterial biolysis of the
organic chemical (ml/cel-hour).
Q-10 values for bacterial transforma-
tion rate in the water column. Q-10
is the increase in the second-order
rate constant resulting from a 10
degree C temperature increase
(dimensionless).
Second-order rate constants for
benthic sediment bacterial biolysis
of the organic (ml/cell-hour).
Q-10 values for bacterial transforma-
tion of organic chemical in benthic
sediments. The Q-10 is the increase
in the second-order rate constant
resulting from a 10 degree C tempera-
ture increase (dimensionless).
Organic carbon partition coefficient
(lw/kg organic carbon).
Octanol water partition coefficient
(lw/loct).
Organic carbon content of the com-
partment biomass as a fraction of
dry weight (dimensionless).
273
-------
K
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
51
52
53
CONST (K)
DUMMY
DUMMY
DUMMY
MWTG
ANAME(K)
DUMMY
DUMMY
DUMMY
MWTG
DEFINITION AND UNITS
Leave blank.
Leave blank.
Leave blank.
The molecular weight of the chem:
HENRYG
VAPRG
KVOG
SOLG
ESOLG
EVPRG
EHENG
DUMMY
DUMMY
FAC
(grams per mle).
HENRY Henry's Law constant of the toxicant
(Atmosphere-cubic meters per mole).
VAPRG Vapor pressure of compound (torr).
KVOG Measured experimental value for
(volatilization) liquid-phase trans-
port resistance, expressed as a ratio
to the reaeration rate (dimension-
less) .
SOLG Aqueous solubility of toxicant chemi-
cal species (mg/Lp).
ESOLG Exponential term for describing solu-
bility of the toxicant as a function
of temperature (see SOLG) (kcal/gram
mole).
EVPRG Molar heat of vaporization for vapor
pressure described as a function of
temperature (see VAPRG) (kcal/gram
mole).
EHENG Constant used to compute Henry's Law
constants for volatilization as a
function of environmental tempera-
tures (TCELG). When EHENG is non-
zero, the Henry's Law constant is
computed as follows (kcal/gram mole):
log HENRY = HENRYG-((1 000.*EHENG)/
(4.58*(TCELG+273.15)))
DUMMY Leave blank.
DUMMY Leave blank.
FAC Multiplication factor for sedimenta-
tion time step. Recommended 0.1
(dimensionless).
274
-------
CONST(K)
ANAME(K) DEFINITION AND UNITS
54
55
56
57
58
59,60,61
62
63
64
65
66
KDPG
RFLATG
CLOUDG
LATG
DFACG
QUANTG(I,1)
XJTR
CTRIG
DTOPT
TDINT
DUMMY
KDPG A near-surface photolytic rate con-
stant for the chemical (per hour).
RFLAT Reference latitude for corresponding
direct photolysis rate constant KDPG
(degrees and decimal fraction (e.g.,
40.72)).
CLOUD Average cloudiness in tenths of full
sky cover (dimensionless, range of
0.0 to 10.0).
LATG Geographic latitude of ecosystem
(degrees and tenths (e.g., 37.2)).
DFACG Distribution function (ratio of opti-
cal path length to vertical depth)
(dimensionless).
QUAN1 Reaction quantum yield in photolytic
QUAN2 transformation of chemical
QUAN3 (dimensionless).
XJTR Reference segment for triggering
event and frequency output. A value
of zero will disable it (dimension-
less) .
CTRIG Trigger concentration that defines a
peak event (mgc/Lj,) .
DTOPT Option to optimize time step, if set
to 1 (dimensionless).
TDINT Time interval between recalculation
of decay rates (days).
DUMMY Leave blank.
ORGANIZATION OF RECORDS
Record 1 is entered once in Data Group H. Record 2 has 66 entries and
uses 14 lines. Five entries (ANAME(K)-CONST(K) pairs) will fit per line.
275
-------
2.5.2.9 DATA GROUP I: Kinetic Time Functions
NFUNC
TITLE
VARIABLES
Record 1--Number of Time Functions
5 for TOXIWASP
name of data group.
ANAME(K)
NOBRK(K)
K =
1
Record 2—Time Function Descriptions
an optional one to five alpha-numeric character
descriptive name for the time function K.
number of breaks used to describe the time function
K.
Listed below are the five time functions required by TOXIWASP. Enter
the variable names for ANAME(K) in Record 2 and their respective values for
VALT(K) and T(K) in Record 3.
K
1
2
3
4
5
VALT(K)
T(K)
TEMPN
WINDN
PHN
POHN
LIGHTN
ANAME(K) VALT(K)
Normalized temperature (dimensionless)
Normalized wind speed (dimensionless)
Normalized pH (dimensionless)
Normalized pOH (dimensionless)
Normalized light intensity (dimensionless)
Record 3—Time Functions
= value of the function at time T(K) .
= time in days. If the length of the simulation
exceeds T(NOBRK), the time function will repeat
itself, starting at T(1), i.e., the approximation
is assumed to be periodic, with period equal to
T(NOBRK).
1, NOBRK
276
-------
ORGANIZATION OF RECORDS
Record 1 is entered once in Data Groiip I. Records 2 and 3, as a
set, are repeated 5 times, within each set, Record 2 is input once and
Record 3 uses an many 80-space lines as needed to input NOBRK entries.
Four entries (four VALK(K)-T(K) pairs) will fit on each 80-space line.
2.5.2.10 DATA GROUP J: Initial Conditions—
No changes, input is repeated twice, once for each system.
2.5.2.11 DATA GROUP K: Stability and Accuracy Criteria—
No changes.
2.5.2.12 DATA GROUP L: Intermediate Print Control—
No changes.
2.5.2.13 DATA GROUP M: integration Control—
No changes.
2.5.2.14 DATA GROUP N: Print Tables
Input is repeated twice, once for each system
Display variables are listed in Table 21.
2.5.2.15 DATA GROUP O: Time Plots
Input is repeated twice, once for each system. No changes.
2.5.2.16 DATA GROUP P: Spatial Plots
No changes.
277
-------
2.5.3 TOXIWASP Data Group Tables
DATA GROUP G
RECORD
1
2
2
3
3
VARIABLE
NOPAM
TITLE
SCALP(1 )
SCALP(2)
SCALP(3)
SCALP(4)
SCALP(5)
SCALP(6)
SCALP(7)
SCALP (8)
SCALP(9)
SCALP(IO)
SCALP( 1 1 )
SCALP(12)
SCALP(13)
SCALP(14)
SCALP(15)
SCALP(16)
SCALP(17)
SCALP (18)
TEMSG
PARAM(ISEG,1 )
DEPTH
PARAM(ISEG,2)
VELOC
PARAM(ISEG,3)
WINDG
PARAM(ISEG,4)
TYPEE
PARAM(ISEG,5)
BACTO
PARAM(ISEG,6)
ACBAC
PARAM(ISEG,7)
BIOMS
PARAM(ISEG,8)
BIOTM
PARAM(ISEG,9)
POHG
PARAM(ISEGIO)
FORMAT
15
5A4
E10.3
E10.3
E10.3
E10.3
El 0.3
E10.3
E10.3
E10.3
E10.3
E10.3
E10.3
E10.3
E10.3
E10.3
E10.3
E10.3
E10.3
E10.3
A5
F10.0
A5
F10.0
AS
F10.0
A5
F10.0
A5
F10.0
A5
F10.0
A5
F10.0
A5
F10.0
A5
F10.0
A5
F10.0
COLUMN
1-10
61-80
1-10
11-20
21-30
31-40
41-50
51-60
61-70
71-80
1-10
11-20
21-30
31-40
41-50
51-60
61-70
71-80
1-10
11-20
1-5
6-15
16-20
21-30
31-35
36-45
46-50
51-60
61-65
66-75
1-5
6-15
16-20
21-30
31-35
36-45
46-50
51-60
61-65
66-75
SHORT DEFINITION
No. of parameters required =
13.
"G: Environmental parameters".
Scale factor for TEMPM.
Scale factor for DEPTHG.
Scale factor for VELOC
Scale factor for WINDG.
Not relevant.
Scale factor for BACTOG
Scale factor for ACBACG.
Scale factor for BIOMAS.
Scale factor for BIOTMG.
Scale factor for POHGD.
Scale factor for OXRADG.
Scale factor for OCS .
Scale factor for PCTWA.
Scale factor for DSPSED.
Scale factor for PHG.
Scale factor for WS.
Scale factor for CMPETG.
Scale factor for TOTKG.
Average temperature, °C.
Depth, ft.
Average velocity, ft/sec.
Average wind velocity, m/sec.
Segment type.
Bacterial population, cells/mL
Active bacterial fraction.
Total actively sorbing bio-
mass, mg/L
Biotemperature, °C.
pOH.
278
-------
DATA GROUP G (Continued)
RECORD
3
VARIABLE
OXRAD
PARAM(ISEG1 1)
DCS
PARAM(ISEG1 2)
PCTWA
PARAM(ISEG13)
DSPSD
PARAM(ISEG14)
PHG
PARAM(ISEG15)
WS
PARAM(ISEG16)
CMPET
PARAM(ISEG17)
TOTKG
PARAM(ISEG18)
FORMAT
A5
F10.0
A5
F10.0
A5
F10.0
A5
F10.0
A5
F10.0
A5
F10.0
A5
F10.0
A5
F10.0
COLUMN
1-5
6-15
16-20
21-30
31-35
36-45
46-50
51-60
61-65
66-75
1-5
6-15
16-10
21-30
31-35
36-45
SHORT DEFINITION
Concentration of oxidants,
moles/L
Organic carbon fraction of
sediments.
Percent water in benthic
sediments.
Fraction of sediment volume
that mixes.
pH.
Settling, deposition, scour, or
plore water flow.
Light extinction coefficient,
1/m.
Total first order decay rates
calculated externally, 1/day.
ORGANIZATION OF RECORDS
122 333 ... 333
NOSEG
279
-------
DATA GROUP H
RECORD
1
2
2
2
VARIABLE
NCONS
TITLE
EBHG1
OONSTd)
EBHG2
CONST(2)
EBHG3
CONST(3)
ENHG1
CONST(4)
ENHG2
CONST(5)
ENHG3
OONST(6)
EAHG1
CONST(7)
EAHG2
CONST(8)
EAHG3
CONSTO)
KAHG1
CONSTdO)
KAHG2
CONSTd 1)
KAHG3
CONSTd 2)
KBHG1
CONSTd 3)
KBHG2
CONST( 1 4)
KBHG3
CONSTd 5)
FORMAT
15
5A4
A5
F1 0.0
A5
F10.0
A5
F1 0.0
A5
F10.0
A5
F10.0
A5
F10.0
A5
F10.0
A5
F10.0
A5
F10.0
A5
F1Q.O
A5
F10.0
A5
F10.0
A5
F10.0
AS
F10.0
A5
F10.0
COLUMN
1-10
61-80
1-5
6-15
16-20
21-30
31-35
36-45
46-50
51-60
61-65
66-75
1-5
6-15
16-20
21-30
31-35
36-45
46-50
51-60
61-65
66-75
1-5
6-15
16-20
21-30
31-35
36-45
46-50
51-60
61-65
66-75
SHORT DEFINITION
No. of constants required = 66
"H: Chemical Constants".
Arrhenius activation energy of
base hydrolysis, Kcal/gram-
mole.
Arrhenius activation energy of
base hydrolysis, Kcal/gram-
mole.
Arrhenius activation energy of
base hydrolysis, Kcal/gram-
mole.
Arrhenius activation energy of
neutral hydrolysis, Kcal/
gram-mole.
Arrhenius activation energy of
neutral hydrolysis, Kcal/
gram-mole .
Arrhenius activation energy of
neutral hydrolysis, Kcal/
gram-mole.
Arrhenius activation energy of
acid-hydrolysis, Kcal/gram-
mole.
Arrhenius activation energy of
acid-hydrolysis , Real/gram-
mole.
Arrhenius activation energy of
acid-hydrolysis, Kcal/gram-
mole.
Second-order rate constants
for acid-catalyzed hydroly-
sis, L/mole/hr.
Second-order rate constants
for acid-catalyzed hydroly-
sis, L/mole/hr.
Second-order rate constants
for acid-catalyzed hydroly-
sis, L/mole/hr.
Second-order rate constants
for base catalyzed hydroly-
sis, L/mole/hr.
Second-order rate constants
for base catalyzed hydroly-
sis, L/mole/hr.
Second-order rate constants
for base catalyzed hydroly-
sis, L/mole/hr.
280
-------
DATA GROUP H (Continued)
RECORD
2
2
2
2
VARIABLE
KNHG1
CONST(16)
KNHG2
CONST(17)
KNGH3
CONST(18)
EOXG1
CONST(19)
EOXG2
CONST ( 20 )
EOXG3
CONST(21)
KOXG1
CONST(22)
KOXG2
CONST(23)
KOXG3
CONST(24)
KBCW1
CONST(25)
KBCW2
CONST(26)
KBCW3
CONST(27)
QTBW1
CONST(28)
QTBW2
CONST (29)
QTBW3
CONST (30)
KBCS1
CONST(31)
KBCS2
CONST(32)
KBCS3
CONST(33)
FORMAT
A5
F10.0
A5
F10.0
A5
F10.0
A5
F10.0
A5
F10.0
A5
F10.0
A5
F1 0.0
A5
F10.0
A5
F10.0
A5
F10.0
A5
F10.0
A5
F10.0
A5
F10.0
AS
F10.0
A5
F10.0
A5
F10.0
A5
F10.0
A5
F10.0
COLUMN
1-5
6-15
16-20
21-30
31-35
36-45
46-50
51-60
61-65
66-75
1-5
6-15
16-20
21-30
31-35
36-45
46-50
51-60
61-65
66-75
1-5
6-15
16-20
21-30
31-35
36-45
46-50
51-60
61-65
66-75
1-5
6-15
16-20
21-30
31-35
36-45
SHORT DEFINITION
Rate constants for neutral
hydrolysis, 1/hr.
Rate constants for neutral
hydrolysis, 1/hr.
Rate constants for neutral
hydrolysis, 1/hr.
Arrhenius activation energy of
oxidation, Kcal/gram-mole.
Arrhenius activation energy of
oxidation, Kcal/gram-mole.
Arrhenius activation energy of
oxidation, Kcal/gram-mole.
Second-order rate constants
for oxidation, L/mole oxi-
dant/hr .
Second-order rate constants
for oxidation, L/mole oxi-
dant/hr.
Second-order rate constants
for oxidation, L/mole oxi-
dant/hr.
Second-order rate constants
for water column biodegrada-
tion, mL/cell/hr.
Second-order rate constants
for water column biodegrada-
tion, mL/cell/hr.
Second-order rate constants
for water column biodegrada-
tion, mL/cell/hr.
Q-10 values for water column
biodegradation rate.
Q-10 values for water column
biodegradation rate.
Q-10 values for water column
biodegradation rate.
Second-order rate constants
for benthic biodegradation,
mL/cell/hr.
Second-order rate constants
for benthic biodegradation,
mL/cell/hr.
Second-order rate constants
for benthic biodegradation,
mL/cell/hr.
281
-------
DATA GROUP H (Continued)
RECORD
2
2
2
2
VARIABLE
QTBS1
CONST(34)
QTBS2
CONST (35)
QTBS3
CONST(36)
KOC
CONST(37)
ROW
CONST(38)
OCB
CONST(39)
DUMMY
CONST (40)
DUMMY
CONSTUO
DUMMY
CONST(42)
MWTG
CONST(43)
HENRY
CONST(44)
VAPRG
CONST (45)
KVOG
CONST(46)
SOLG
CONST(47)
ESOLG
CONST(48)
EVPRG
CONST(49)
EHENG
CONST(SO)
DUMMY
CONST(51)
DUMMY
CONST(52)
FAC
CONST(53)
KDPG
CONST(54)
FORMAT
A5
F10.0
A5
F10.0
A5
F10.0
A5
F10.0
A5
F10.0
A5
F10.0
A5
F10.0
A5
F10.0
A5
F10.0
A5
F10.0
A5
F10.0
A5
F10.0
A5
F10.0
A5
F10.0
A5
F10.0
A5
F10.0
A5
F10.0
A5
F1 0.0
A5
F1 0.0
A5
F10.0
A5
F10.0
COLUMN
46-50
51-60
61-65
66-75
1-5
6-15
16-20
21-30
31-35
36-45
46-50
51-60
61-65
66-75
1-5
6-15
16-20
21-30
31-35
36-45
46-50
51-60
61-65
66-75
1-5
6-15
16-20
21-30
31-35
36-45
46-50
51-60
61-65
66-75
1-5
6-15
16-20
21-30
31-35
36-45
46-50
51-60
SHORT DEFINITION
Q-10 values for benthic bio-
degradation rate.
Q-10 values for benthic bio-
degradation rate.
Q-1 0 values for benthic bio-
degradation rate.
Organic carbon partition coef-
ficient, Lw/kg organic carbon
Octanol water partition coef-
ficient, Lw/Loct.
Organic carbon fraction of
biomass.
Leave blank.
Leave blank.
Leave blank.
The molecular weight of the
chemical, g/mole.
Henry's Law constant of the
toxicant, atmosphere-m^/mole.
Vapor pressure of compound,
torr.
Measured ratio - volatiliza-
tion to reaeration.
Aqueous solubility, mg/L
Solubility temperature
correction, Kcal/mole.
Molar heat of vaporization,
Real/gram mole.
Constant used to compute
Henry's Law constants, Real/
gram mole.
Leave blank.
Leave blank.
Multiplication factor for
sedimentation time step.
Reference photolytic rate
constant, 1/hr.
282
-------
DATA GROUP H (Continued)
RECORD
2
2
2
VARIABLE
RFLAT
CONST(55)
CLOUD
CONST(56)
LATG
CONST(57)
DFACG
CONST(58)
QUAN1
CONST(59)
QUAN2
CONST(60)
QUAN3
CONST(61)
XJTR
CONST(62)
CTRIG
CONST(63)
DTOPT
CONST(64)
TDINT
CONST (65)
DUMMY
CONST(66)
FORMAT
A5
F10.0
A5
F1 0.0
A5
F10.0
A5
F10.0
A5
F10.0
A5
F10.0
A5
F10.0
A5
F10.0
A5
F10.0
A5
F10.0
A5
F10.0
A5
F10.0
COLUMN
61-65
66-75
1-5
6-15
16-20
21-30
31-35
36-45
46-50
51-60
61-65
66-75
1-5
6-15
16-20
21-30
31-35
36-45
46-50
51-60
61-65
66-75
1-5
6-15
SHORT DEFINITION
Reference latitude for photo-
lysis rate constant KDPG,
degrees .
Average cloudiness, in tenths
of full sky cover.
Geographic latitude of ecosys-
tem, degrees.
Distribution function for
light.
Photolytic reaction yield for
dissolved, sorbed, and bio-
sorbed phases.
Photolytic reaction yield for
dissolved, sorbed, and bio-
sorbed phases.
Photolytic reaction yield for
dissolved, sorbed, and bio-
sorbed phases.
Reference segment for trigger-
ing event and frequency out
put.
Trigger concentration that de-
fines a peak event, mgc/Lrp.
Option to optimize time step,
if set to 1 .
Time interval between recalcu-
lation of decay rates, days.
Leave blank.
ORGANIZATION OF RECORDS:
111 |2|2|2|2|2|2|2|2|2|2|2|2|2|2
283
-------
DATA GROUP I
RECORD
1
2
2
3
2
3
2
VARIABLE
NFUNC
TITLE
TEMPN
NOBRK(I)
VALT(K)
T(K)
VALT(K)
T(K)
VALT(K)
T(K)
VALT(K)
T(K)
VALT(K)
T(K)
WINDN
NOBRK(I)
VALT(K)
T(K)
VALT(K)
T(K)
VALT(K)
T(K)
VALT(K)
T(K)
VALT(K)
T(K)
PHN
NOBRK)!)
VALT(K)
T(K)
VALT(K)
T(K)
VALT(K)
T(K)
VALT(K)
T(K)
VALT(K)
T(K)
POHN
NOBRK(I)
FORMAT
15
5A4
A5
15
F10.0
F10.0
F10.0
F10.0
F10.0
F10.0
F10.0
F10.0
F10.0
F10.0
A5
15
F10.0
F10.0
F10.0
F10.0
F1 0.0
F10.0
F10.0
F10.0
F10.0
F10.0
A5
15
F10.0
F10.0
F10.0
F10.0
F10.0
F10.0
F10.0
F10.0
F10.0
F10.0
A5
15
COLUMN
1-5
61-80
1-5
6-10
1-10
1 1-20
21-30
31-40
41-50
51-60
61-70
71-80
•
.
1-5
6-10
1-10
1 1-20
21-30
31-40
41-50
51-60
61-70
71-80
•
.
1-5
6-10
1-10
11-20
21-30
31-40
41-50
51-60
61-70
71-80
•
.
1-5
6-10
SHORT DEFINITION
No. time functions required =5.
"I: Time Functions".
Normalized temperature.
Number breaks used.
Value of time functions.
Time in days; K = 1 .
K = 2
K = 3
K = 4
K = NOBRK(I)
Normalized wind speed.
Number breaks used .
Value of time functions.
Time in days; K = 1 .
K = 2
K = 3
K = 4
K = NOBRK(I)
Normalized pH.
Number breaks used.
Value of time functions.
Time in days; K = 1 .
K = 2
K = 3
K = 4
.
K = NOBRK(I)
Normalized POH.
Number breaks used.
284
-------
DATA GROUP I (Continued)
RECORD
3
2
3
VARIABLE
VALT(K)
T(K)
VALT(K)
T(K)
VALT(K)
T(K)
VALT(K)
T(K)
•
VALT(K)
T(K)
LIGHTN
NOBRK(I)
VALT(K)
T(K)
VALT(K)
T(K)
VALT(K)
T(K)
VALT(K)
T(K)
•
VALT(K)
T(K)
FORMAT
F10.0
F10.0
F10.0
F10.0
F10.0
F10.0
F10.0
F10.0
•
F10.0
F10.0
A5
15
F10.0
F10.0
F10.0
F10.0
F10.0
F10.0
F10.0
F10.0
•
F10.0
F10.0
COLUMN
1-10
1 1-20
21-30
31-40
41-50
51-60
61-70
71-80
•
•
.
1-5
6-10
1-10
11-20
21-30
31-40
41-50
51-60
61-70
71-80
*
*
•
SHORT DEFINITION
Value of time functions.
Time in days; K = 1
K = 2
K = 3
K = 4
•
K = NOBRK(I)
Normalized light intensity.
Number breaks used.
Value of time functions.
Time in days; K = 1 .
K = 2
K = 3
K = 4
•
K = NOBRK(I)
ORGANIZATION OF RECORDS
285
-------
2.5.4 TOXIWASP Variable Definitions
VARIABLE
POUND IN
SUBROUTINE
DEFINITION
UNITS
A(J)
ACBAOS(J)
MAIN
TOXIWASPB
TOXINIT
TOXIFORD
ACBACL
TOXIFORD
ALPH A( I)
TOXIWASPB
TOXIFORD
TOXIDUMP
TOXISETL
TOXISEDW
Cross sectional area between exchanging
sediment and water compartments, input
in subroutine HASP2.
Proportion of bacterial population that
actively degrades toxicant, if the
biolysis rate constants are not based
on natural mixed bacterial popula-
tions, the total bacterial populations
(BACTOG) given for each compartment
can be modified via ACBACG to give the
size of the population that is active-
ly degrading the toxicant (nominal
range: 0.0 - 1.0).
Active bacterial population for segment
being considered. Equal to BACTOG(J),
Water column compartments:
Benthic compartments:
The values of ALPHA are distribution
coefficients (fraction of total con-
centration of toxicant (Y) present as
a particular species/form configura-
tion of the molecule) for each ecosys-
tem compartment. ALPHA vector repre-
sents the plartitioning of each spe-
cies among three physical forms
(dissolved, sediment-sorbed, bio-
sorbed). ALPHAS are calculated in-
ternally from the parameters, con-
stants, and state variables describ-
ing the segment, including the pre-
dicted concentration, the sediment,
the bimass, the octonol-water parti-
tion coefficient, etc. In the output
these ALPHAS are designated by DISSF,
SEDF and BIOLF.
ALPHA( 1 )
Fraction of toxicant present as the
neutral molecule (SH2) dissolved in
the water phase of the compartment.
ft2
dimen-
sion-
less
ratio
cells/
ml
cells/
ml pore
water
uni t-
less
286
-------
VARIABLE
POUND IN
SUBROUTINE
DEFINITION
UNITS
ALPH1M
TOXIWASPB
TOXISEDW
ALPH2M
TOXIWASPB
TOXISEDW
BACTOG(J)
TOXIWASPB
TOXINIT
TOXIFORD
ALPHA(2)
Fraction present as neutral molecule
sorbed with sediment phase of com-
partment.
ALPHA(3)
Fraction present as neutral molecule
sorbed with compartment biomass.
Fraction of chemical sorbed onto sedi-
ment phase of the segment immediately
above the bed. Equal to ALPHA(2) for
that segment. Transferred to sub-
routine TOXISEDW for calculation of
bed-water column mixing of chemical.
Fraction of chemical sorbed onto sedi-
ment phase of the segment immediately
above the bed. Equal to ALPHA(2) for
that segment. Transferred to sub-
routine TOXISEDW for calculation of
bed-water column mixing of chemical.
Bacterial population density in each
water column compartment. Benthic
compartments: cells per 100 grams
dry weight of sediment.
Internally, BACTOG(J) is multiplied by
ACBACG(J) to give active population
density. For the sediment, BACTOG is
converted to cells per milliliter pore
water. The conversion used is:
BACTOG(J) = BACTOG(J) * SED/FRW(1E08)
where:
cells
cells
BACTOG
1
100 g 100 * 1000 mgs
W
FRW = — = * 1000
1 m 1 m
SED(mg/ml) = (1/1 000)SED(mg/1T)/FRW
unit-
less
unit-
less
cells/
ml
287
-------
VARIABLE
POUND IN
SUBROUTINE
DEFINITION
UNITS
BETA
BIOFAC
BIOMAS(J)
TOXIVOLT
TOXIWASPB
TOXIWASPB
TOXINIT
TOXIFORD
BIOLKL
TOXIWASPB
TOXIFORD
TOXIDUMP
Same as ALPHA( 1 ) for water compartments unit-
that intersect surface. less
Intermediate variable for determining unit-
fraction of chemical sorbed onto bio- less
logical phase of a segment.
Total actively sorbing biomass in each mg/L
ecosystem compartment. This parameter or
is used in computation of sorption of g/m2
the toxicant on plant/animal mate-
rial in the ecosystem compartments.
The parameter is interpreted differ-
ently for the water column versus the
benthic compartments. For a water
column compartment, total biomass must
be expressed as milligrams (dry weight)
per liter of water in the compartment,
and it includes all biomass subject to
biosorptive exchange with that water.
In the case of benthic compartments,
BIOMAS is the total biomass of the
benthic infauna and other components
in grams (dry weight) per square meter
of bottom.
Note that in this simplification from
EXAMS, movable biomass (e.g., plankton)
is not distinguished from stationary
biomass (e.g., roots). This is a poten-
tial source of error in systems having
high biotic content.
Water column compartments: mg (dry
weight) per liter
Benthic compartments: grams (dry
weight) per square meter.
Total pseudo-first-order degradation hr~1
rate constant (per hour) for bac-
terial biolysis.
288
-------
VARIABLE
BIOTMG(J)
BMASS(J)
BOTLIT
BURY
BVOLO(J)
CBB
CBW
POUND IN
SUBROUTINE
TOXIWASPB
TOXIFORD
TOXIWASPB
TOXIFORD
TOXISETL
T OX I PHOT
TOXINIT
TOXISETL
TOXIWASPB
TOXIFORD
TOXISETL
TOXIWASPB
TOXIDUMP
TOXIWASPB
TOXIDUMP
DEFINITION
Bio temperature in each exosystem com-
partment, i.e., temperature to be used
in conjunction with Q-10 expressions
for biolysis rate constants. This
parameter is separated from the physi-
cal temperature input data (TCELG) in
order that the input data can reflect
Q-10 averaging of an observed tempera-
ture time-series.
Mass of chemical lost from the network
during the simulation. Chemical can
be lost by volatilization through a
surface water segment or burial
through a bottom bed segment.
Light level at bottom of compartment.
Net burial or erosion rate of top
benthic segment. Equal to the time
variable depth of sediment settling
in from the overlying water column
minus the time-constant depth of sedi-
ment eroding. Both the settling and
erosion rates are entered through the
spatially-variable parameter WS ( J) .
Volume of the surface bed segment at
time 0. The volume of the surface bed
segment is reset to BVOLO during the
compaction cycle.
Concentration of chemical sorbed onto
biological phase of bed segment JSTR.
Values transferred to TOXIDU every 3
hours for saving on the statistical
file.
Concentration of chemical sorbed onto
biological phase of water segment
JTR. Values transferred to TOXIDU
every 3 hours for saving on the
statistical file.
UNITS
°C
kg
unit-
less
m/yr
million
ft3
mg/g
ug/g
289
-------
VARIABLE
CSB
CSW
CTB
CTW
C1B
C1W
CHEM
CHEM1
CHEM2
CHEM3
POUND IN
SUBROUTINE
TOXIWASPB
TOXIDUMP
TOXIWASPB
TOXIDUMP
TOXIWASPB
TOXIDUMP
TOXIWASPB
TOXIDUMP
TOXIWASPB
TOXIDUMP
TOXIWASPB
TOXIDUMP
TOXIWASPB
TOXISETL
TOXISEDW
TOXIDUMP
TOXIDUMP
TOXIDUMP
DEFINITION
Concentration of chemical sorbed onto
sediment phase of water segment JTR.
Values transferred to TOXIDU every 3
hours for saving on the statistical
file.
Concentration of chemical sorbed onto
sediment phase of water segment JTR.
Values transferred to TOXIDU every 3
hours for saving on the statistical
file.
Total concentration of chemical in bed
segment JSTR. Values transferred to
TOXIDU every 3 hours for saving on
the statistical file.
Total concentration of chemical in water
segment JTR. Values transferred to
TOXIDU every 3 hours for saving on
the statistical file.
Concentration of chemical dissolved in
water phase of bed segment JSTR.
Values transferred to TOXIDU every 3
hours for saving on the statistical
file.
Concentration of chemical dissolved in
water phase at water segment JTR.
Values transferred to TOXIDU every 3
hours for saving on the statistical
file.
Chemical concentration in segment,
equivalent to C(J,1).
Chemical dissolved in water phase of
current segment.
Chemical sorbed onto sediment phase in
current segment.
Chemical sorbed onto biological phase in
current segment.
UNITS
mgc/kgs
mgc/kgs
mgc/Lj
mgc/Lrj
rage/I^
mgc/Lw
mg/LT
mgc/Lj
mgc/Lj.
mgc/Lrp
290
-------
VARIABLE
CHEMB
CHEMS
CHEMW
CHEM1S
CHEM2S
CHEMSS
CHEM1W
CHEM2W
CHEMSW
CLOUDG
CMAX(9)
CMAX(10)
POUND IN
SUBROUTINE
TOXIDUMP
TOXIDUMP
TOXIDUMP
TOXISEDW
TOXISEDW
TOXISEDW
TOXISEDW
TOXISEDW
TOXISEDW
TOXIWASP
TOXIFORD
TOXIPHOT
TOXIWASPB
TOXIN IT
TOXINIT
DEFINITION
Chemical sorbed onto biological phase in
current segment.
Chemical sorbed onto sediment phase in
current segment.
Chemical dissolved in water phase of
current segment.
Chemical concentration dissolved in pore
water in bed segment.
Chemical concentration sorbed on sedi-
ment in bed segment.
Chemical concentration sorbed on sedi-
ment in bed segment.
Chemical concentration dissolved in
water segment above bed segment.
Chemical concentration sorbed on sedi-
ment in water segment above bed
segment.
Chemical concentration on sorbed sedi-
ment in water segment above bed
segment.
Average cloudiness in tenths of full
sky cover (range of 0.0 to 10.0).
The concentration of a 1 0~~^ molar solu-
tion of chemical, or half the chemical
solubility, whichever is less.
CMAX(9) is used to abort the simula-
tion whenever dissolved chemical con-
centration rises above this limit.
This prevents violation of the model's
first-order kinetics assumption. This
check is activated only when CMAX( 1 )
is set to 0.
Half the chemical solubility.
UNITS
ugc/
^biomass
mgc/kgs
-^
mgc/l^
mgc/Lrp
mgc/kgs
mgc/Lj
"90/I"
mgc/kgs
unitless
mgc/Lw
-gc/w
291
-------
VARIABLE
CMPETG(J)
COND
CTRIG
DELT
DENOM
DEPTH
DEPTHG( J)
POUND IN
SUBROUTINE
TOXIWASPB
TOXIPHOT
TOXIVOLT
TOXIWASPB
TOXINIT
TOXIDUMP
TOXIWASPB
TOXIWASPB
TOXIWASPB
TOXISETL
TOXIWASPB
TOXIFORD
TOXINIT
TOXIVOLT
TOXIPHOT
TOXISETL
DEFINITION
Single-valued zenith light extinction
coefficients for water columns, dummy
variable for benthic compartments.
Inverse of addition of series resis-
tances of gas and liquid interfaces.
Trigger concentration that defines a
peak event. When the chemical concen-
tration in segment JTR rises above
CTRIG, a peak event is flagged. Con-
centrations for all segments are
printed out every 3 hours until the
concentration falls below CTRIG and
the event ends. This option is de-
signed to catch high transient concen-
trations that would be missed by the
regular WASP dumps. If less frequent
peak printout is desired, statement 68
in TOXIDUMP can be changed from PNEXT
=3.0 to, say PNEXT = 8.0. This would
cause printouts every 8 hours during
peak events. A trigger concentration
of 0 will disable event printouts.
Intermediate value of simulation time
step used for maximizing time step to
minimize numerical dispersion and
simulation cost. Ranges between 0.01
and 0.50 days.
Intermediate variable for calculating
fractions of chemical dissolved,
sorbed onto sediment, and sorbed onto
biomass.
Depth of segment being considered.
Depths of segments.
UNITS
m-1
m/hr-1
mgc/Lrj
day
unitless
ft
ft
292
-------
VARIABLE
DEPTHM
DFAOG
DISP
DISPV(J)
DSPSED(J)
DTOPT
E(J)
EAHG(I,1 )
POUND IN
SUBROUTINE
TOXIWASPB
TOXIPHOT
TOXISETL
TOXIWASPB
TOXIPHOT
TOXISEDW
TOXIWASPB
TOXISEDW
TOXIWASPB
TOXISEDW
TOXIWASPB
TOXIFORD
DEFINITION
Depth of segment being considered.
Distribution function (ratio of optical
path length to vertical depth) .
Volumetric dispersion between a bed and
an overlying water segment, or between
two vertically adjacent bed segments.
DISP is brought from WASP2 using
BR(I), and is corrected internally
for its resulting mixed units.
Dispersive exchange volumes between
sediment and water compartments.
Water-water exchanges are calculated
in WASP2. Sediment-water exchanges
are calculated in TOXISEDW using
characteristic lengths, areas, and
dispersion from WASP2, along with
porosity and other factors from
TOXISEDW.
Fraction of sediment that mixes. 1 .0 is
equivalent to full bed sediment dis-
persion, 0.0 is equal to pore water
diffusion only.
Option to optimize time step. If set to
1 , program computes maximum time that
preserves numerical stability through-
out network. Both flow volumes and
dispersive exchange volumes are kept
less than or equal to segment volumes.
Time step can vary between 0.01 days
and 0.5 days.
Sediment-water dispersion coefficient
input in WASP2. E is a composite of
.direct sorption to the sediment sur-
face, mixing of the sediments by
benthic animals, stirring by demersal
fishes, etc.
Arrhenius activation energy of specific-
acid-catalyzed hydrolysis of the
toxicant.
UNITS
m
unitless
MCF/sec
.cm2 /mi 2
million
ft3/day
unitless
cm^/sec
kcal/
gram
mole
293
-------
VARIABLE
FOUND IN
SUBROUTINE
DEFINITION
UNITS
EBHG(I,1)
EHENG
TOXIFORD
TOXIVOLT
ENHG(I,1)
EOXG(I,1)
ESOLG
EVPRG
EXDO
EXUP
FAC
TOXIFORD
TOXIFORD
TOXIVOLT
TOXIVOLT
TOXISEDW
TOXISEDW
TOXINIT
FACTOR
TOXIPHOT
Arrhenius activation energy of specific-
base-catalyzed hydrolysis of the
toxicant.
Constant used to compute Henry's Law
constants for volatilization as a
function of environmental temperatures
(TCELG). When EHENG is non-zero, the
Henry's Law constant is computed as
follows:
log HENRY = HENRYG-( (1000.*EHENG)/
(4.58*(TCELG+273.15)))
Arrhenius activation energy of neutral
hydrolysis of the toxicant.
Arrhenius activation energy of oxidative
transformation of the toxicant.
Exponential term for describing solubi-
lity of the toxicant as a function of
temperature (see SOLG).
Molar heat of vaporization for vapor
pressure described as a function of
temperature (see VAPRG).
Chemical sorption rate from lower water
column segment to top bed segment.
Chemical desorption rate from upper bed
segment to lower water column segment.
Multiplication factor for sedimentation
time step. Set FAC to 1.0 to elimi-
nate numerical dispersion in the bed.
For smoother output with some numeri-
cal dispersion, set FAC to 0.1.
Latitude correction factor by which the
photolysis rate is adjusted from the
rate at the reference latitude.
kcal/
gram
mole
kcal/
gram
mole
kcal/
gram
mole
kcal/
gram
mole
kcal/
gram
mole
kcal/
gram
mole
MCF/day
MCF/day
.mgc/Lrp
unitless
unitless
294
-------
VARIABLE
FRW(J)
FVOL
HENRYG
HENRYL
HPLUS
HYDRKL
HYDRX
11 , 12
ICHK
FOUND IN
SUBROUTINE
TOXIWASPB
TOXINIT
TOXISETL
TOXISEDW
TOXISETL
TOXIFORD
TOXIVOLT
TOXIVOLT
TOXIFORD
TOXIFORD
TOXIDUMP
TOXIFORD
TOXISEDW
TOXIWASPB
DEFINITION
Porosity, or water fraction in sediment
on a volumetric basis. Calculated
from the parameter PCTWA(J).
The fractional volume of the surface bed
segment that is to be compacted into
the volume of the second bed segment
during the compaction cycle. The
difference between FVOL and the volume
of the second bed segment is SVOL, the
pore water squeezed out.
Henry's Law constant of the toxicant.
If parameter EHENG is non-zero, HENRYG
is used as the pre-exponential factor
in computing the Henry's Law constant
as a function of environmental
temperature (TCELG) .
Local value of HENRYG. If HENRYG is
zero, model will calculate value.
Intermediate calculation in obtaining
temporally averaged concentration
of hydronium ions.
HPLUS = 1 0**(=PHG)
Total pseudo-first-order rate constant
(per hr) for hydrolytic transforma-
tions of the toxicant in each com-
partment.
Intermediate calculation in obtaining
temporally averaged concentration of
hydroxide ions.
HYDRX = 10**(-POHG)
Local variables representing segments
involved in exchange. (See "IR(I),
JR(I)" card group B) .
Integer flag denoting day on which last
set of daily flows and nonpoint source
loads were read from auxiliary file.
Saved in COMMON as TIMCHK.
UNITS
LW/LT
million
ft3
m^/mole
m^/mole
hr-1
unitless
unitless
unitless
295
-------
VARIABLE
POUND IN
SUBROUTINE
DEFINITION
UNITS
ICOUNT
ILCOL
IL(J)
INDEXS
INDEXW
I OPT
ITCHK
ITIMEC
I TYPE
I ZERO
JROW
JSTR
TOXIDUMP
TOXINIT
MAIN
TOXIWASPB
TOXIFORD
TOXIWASPB
TOXIFORD
TOXIDUMP
TOXIWASPB
TOXINIT
TOXIWASPB
TOXINIT
TOXISETL
TOXIPHOT
TOXINIT
TOXIWASPB
TOXINIT
TOXIDUMP
Number of entries into auxiliary file
for statistical analysis. Integer
value of TCOUNT.
Subscript indicating column in table of
daily flows from auxiliary file (1-10)
Characteristic length for dispersive
exchange, input in WASP2.
INDEXS is an internally calculated flag
designating a benthic compartment.
INDEXS is 1 for benthic compartments
(TYPEE = 3 or 4), 0 for water compart-
ments (TYPEE =1 or 2) .
INDEXW is an internally calculated flag
designating a water column compart-
ment. It takes a value of 1 for water
compartments (TYPEE = 1 or 2) and a
value of 0 for benthic compartments
(TYPEE = 3 or 4).
Flag designating type of output desired
in TOXIDU.
Integer flag denoting whether a full day
has plassed since the last set of
flows and nonpoint source loads were
read from auxiliary file.
Integer flag denoting the current simu-
lation day. The integer value of TIME
Flag designating segment type.
integer value of TYPEE(J).
The
Light intensity at top of lower level
water compartment, 0.0 to 1.0.
Subscript indicating row in table of
daily flows from auxiliary file.
Top bed segment below water segment FTR
Concentrations in JSTR are printed out
during peak "events," and are saved
every 3 hours on an auxiliary statis-
tical file.
unitless
unitless
ft
unitless
unitless
unitless
unitless
unitless
unitless
unitless
unitless
unitless
296
-------
VARIABLE
TOUNO IN
SUBROUTINE
DEFINITION
UNITS
JTR
TOXIWASPB
TOXIDUMP
JL(J)
KAHG(I,1
MAIN
TOXIFORD
KAHL
KB
KBACSG(I,1)
TOXIFORD
TOXIWASPB
TOXIFORD
TOXINIT
TOXIFORD
Segment used to trigger event printouts
when total chemical concentration
exceeds CTRIG. Saved in COMMON as
XJTR. Concentrations in JTR are
printed out during peak events, and
are saved every 3 hours on an auxi-
liary statistical file.
Characteristic length for dispersive
exchange input in WASP2.
Second-order rate constants for speci-
fic-acid-catalyzed hydrolysis of toxi-
cant. If the corresponding entry in
the Arrhenius activation energy matrix
(EAHG) for this reaction is zero, the
value entered in KAHG is taken as the
second-order rate constant. If the
corresponding entry in the activation
energy matrix (EAHG) is non-zero, the
value entered in matrix KAHG is inter-
preted as the base-10 logarithm of the
frequency factor in an Arrhenius func-
tion for the reaction, and local
values (KAHL) of the second-order rate
constant are computed as a function of
temperature (TCELG) in each system
compartment.
Local value of KAHG(I,1) corrected for
temperature.
Effective biomass partition coefficient.
Calculated internally by multiplying
OCB and KOW.
Second-order rate constants for benthic
sediment bacterial biolysis of the
organic toxicant. If the correspond-
ing entry in the Q-10 matrix (QTBASG)
for this process is zero, the number
entered in matrix KBACSG is taken as
the second-order rate constant. if
the corresponding entry in the Q-10
matrix is non-zero, the value of the
second-order rate constant at 20
ft
L/mole
[H+]-hr
L/mole
[H+]-hr
Lw/kgb
ml/cell-
hr
297
-------
VARIABLE
FOUND IN
SUBROUTINE
DEFINITION
UNITS
KBACSL
KBACWG(I,1)
TOXIWASPB
TOXIFORD
TOXIFORD
KBACWL
KBHG(I,1)
TOXIWASPB
TOXIFORD
KBHL
TOXIWASPB
TOXIFORD
degrees C., and local values (KGACSL)
of the rate constant are computed as a
function of temperature (BIOTMG) in
each ecosystem compartment.
Local value of KBACSG(I,1), corrected
for temperature.
Second-order rate constants for water
column bacterial biolysis of the
toxicant. If the corresponding entry
in the Q-10 matrix (QTBAWG) for this
process is zero, the number entered in
matrix KBACWG is taken as the second-
order rate constant. if the corres-
ponding entry in the Q-10 matrix is
non-zero, the value entered in matrix
KBACWG is interpreted as the numerical
value KBACWL of the rate constant are
computed as a function of temperature
(BIOTMG) in each ecosystem compart-
ment.
Local value of KBACWG(J), corrected for
temperature.
Second-order rate constants for speci-
fic-base-catalyzed hydrolysis of toxi-
cant. If the corresponding entry in
the Arrhenius activation energy matrix
(EBHG) for this reaction is zero, the
value entered in KBHG is taken as the
second-order rate constant. If the
corresponding entry in the activation
energy matrix (EBHG) is non-zero, the
value entered in matrix KBHG is inter-
preted as the base-10 logarithm of the
frequency factor in an Arrhenius func-
tion for the reaction, and local
values (KBHL) of the second-order rate
constant are computed as a function of
temperature (TCELG) in each system
compartment.
Local value of KBHG(I,1), corrected for
temperature.
ml/ce 11-
hr
hr
mg/ce 11-
hr
L/mole
[OH-]-hr
L/mole
[OH-]-hr
298
-------
VARIABLE
POUND IN
SUBROUTINE
DEFINITION
UNITS
KDPG
TOXIPORD
TOXIPHOT
KDPL
KNHG(1,1)
TOXIPORD
TOXIPHOT
TOXIPORD
KNHL
K02G(J)
KO2L
KOC
TOXIFORD
TOXIWASPB
TOXINIT
TOXIVOLT
TOXIWASPB
TOXIVOLT
TOXIWASPB
TOXINIT
A near-surface photolytic rate constant
for the toxicant. The value of KDPG
represents the outcome of an experi-
ment conducted in natural sunlight.
The constant is a temporally averaged
(e.g., over whole days, seasons, etc.)
first-order photolytic transformation
rate constant pertaining to cloudless
conditions at some reference latitude
RFLATG.
Locally adjusted value of KDPG returned
from TOXIPHOT.
Rate constants for neutral hydrolysis of
organic toxicant, if the correspond-
ing entry in the Arrhenius activation
energy matrix (ENHG) for this reaction
is zero, the value entered in KNHG is
taken as the rate constant, if the
corresponding entry in the activation
energy matrix (ENHG) is non-zero, the
value entered in matrix KNHG is inter-
preted as the base-10 logarithm of the
frequency factor in an Arrhenius func-
tion for the reaction, and local
values (KNHL) of the rate constant are
computed as a function of temperature
(TCELG) in each system compartment.
Local value of KNHG(I,1), corrected for
temperature.
Reaeration parameter at 20 degrees C in
each ecosystem compartment. Calcu-
lated from segment depths and veloci-
ties, and time-varying wind.
Reaeration parameters in each compart-
ment after temperature adjustment and
units conversion.
Organic carbon partition coefficient.
Value of KOC read in or it equal to
zero, calculated from KOW. Multipli-
cation of KOC by the fractional or-
ganic carbon content (OCS) of each
hr-1
unitless
hr~1
hr-1
cm/hr
m/hr
organic
carbon
299
-------
VARIABLE
POUND IN
SUBROUTINE
DEFINITION
UNITS
KOW
KOXG(I,1)
TOXIWASPB
TOXINIT
TOXIFORD
KOXL
TOXIFORD
KP(J)
KT
KVOG
TOXIWASPB
TOXINIT
TOXISETL
TOXINIT
TOXIVOLT
K20
TOXIFORD
TOXIREOX
system sediment yields the partition
coefficient for sorption of unionized
(SH2) compound to the sediment.
Octanol water partition coefficient.
Value of KOW read in, or if equal to
zero, calculated from KOC.
Second-order rate constants for oxida-
tive transformation of toxicant, if
the corresponding entry in the
Arrhenius activation energy matrix
(EOXG) for this reaction is zero, the
value entered in KOXG is taken as the
second-order rate constant. If the
corresponding entry in the activation
energy matrix (EOXG) is non-zero, the
value entered in matrix KOXG is inter-
preted as the base-10 logarithm of the
frequency factor in an Arrhenius func-
tion for the reaction, and local
values (KOXL) of the second order con-
stants are computed as function of
temperature (TCELG) in each system
compartment.
Local value of KOXG(I,1), corrected for
temperature.
Effective sediment partition coeffi-
cient. Internally calculated as the
product of KOC and OCS(J), and saved
as Parameter 12.
Daily counter for reading nonpoint
source loads from auxiliary tape and
printing table (1-1000).
Measured experimental value for (vola-
tilization) liquid-phase transport
resistance, expressed as a ratio to
the reaeration rate.
The computed reaeration rate at 20°C.
Used to calculate the chemical vola-
tilization rate.
Lw/Loct
L/mole
envi r on-
mental
oxidant/
hr
L/mole
environ-
mental
oxidant/
hr
Iv/kgs
day
unitless
day-1
300
-------
VARIABLE
LATG
LIGHTL
LIGHTN
LOPT
MOQ
MOQS
MQOPT
MTYPE
MWTG
NCOL
NCWKS
POUND IN
SUBROUTINE
TOXIPHOT
TOXIPHOT
TOXIWASPB
TOXIPHOT
TOXIWASPB
TOXIN IT
TOXIWASPB
TOXINIT
OXIWASPB
TOXINIT
TOXINIT
TOXINIT
TOXIVOLT
TOXINIT
TOXIWASPB
TOXINIT
DEFINITION
Geographic latitude of ecosystem.
The average light intensity in the
current compartment, as a fraction of
the near-surface light intensity
(taken as 1.0 or 100%).
Normalized light time function, trans-
ferred through COMMON as constant 78
to TOXIPHOT. There it adjusts the
average photolysis rate for seasonal
light variability.
Option to read in flows and/or nonpoint
source loads on a daily basis:
0 = skip daily read option
1 = read sequential tape containing
daily flows and/or loads
Number of flow pairs read from auxil-
iary file daily. MOQ is read from
auxiliary file by TOXINIT and passed
to TOXIWASPB through COMMON as the
floating point variable MOQS.
Number of flow pairs read from auxil-
iary file daily. MOQS is set equal to
MOQ in TOXINIT and saved in COMMON as
constant 83.
Flow option read from auxiliary file.
Not used.
Flag designating type of segment
immediately above current segment.
Integer value of TYPER(J-I).
The molecular weight of the toxicant.
Variable indicating the number of column
entries in the last row of daily flows
from auxiliary file.
Number of nonpoint source loads read
from auxiliary file daily. NOWKS is
read from auxiliary file by TOXINIT
and passed to TOXIWASPB through COMMON
as constant 84.
UNITS
degrees
unitless
unitless
unitless
unitless
unitless
unitless
unitless
g/mole
unitless
unitless
301
-------
VARIABLE
NPSWK(I,J)
NWKS
OCB
OCS(J)
OXIDKL
OXRADG(J)
PCTWA(J)
PERC
PERCMS
PH
FOUND IN
SUBROUTINE
TOXIWASPB
TOXINIT
TOXIWASPB
TOXINIT
TOXINIT
TOXINASPB
TOXINIT
TOXIFORD
TOXIDUMP
TOXIFORD
TOXIWASPB
TOXISETL
TOXISETL
TOXIWASPB
TOXIFORD
DEFINITION
Nonpoint source load j for constituent I
(chemical or sediment) , read from
auxiliary file daily. The segment
into which load j discharges is de-
fined in Card Group F: Forcing
Functions.
Number of nonpoint source loads read
from auxiliary file daily. NWKS
is the integer value of NOWKS .
Organic carbon content of the compart-
ment biomass as a fraction of dry
weight. Coupled to ROW to generate
biomass partition coefficient.
Organic carbon content of sediments as
fraction of dry weight. Parameter is
coupled to KOC to generate the sedi-
ment partition coefficient as a func-
tion of a property of the sediment.
Pseudo-first-order rate constants for
oxidative transformation of toxicant.
Molar concentration of environmental
oxidants (e.g., peroxy radicals) in
each ecosystem compartment.
Percent water in bottom sediments of
benthic compartments. PCTWA(J) should
be expressed as the conventional soil-
science variable (fresh/dry weight);
all values must be greater than or
equal to 1 .
Pore water percolation, calculated from
the spatially-variable parameter WS(J)
for type 4 (subsurface benthic) seg-
ments.
Mass transport rate of dissolved chem-
ical in pore water.
Hydrogen ion activity of segment being
considered. Local value of PHG( J) .
UNITS
Ib/day
unitless
unitless
unitless
hr-1
moles/L
unitless
million
ft3/day
MCF/day
PH
302
-------
VARIABLE
PHG(J)
PHOTKL
PHN
POHN
PNEXT
POH
POHG(J)
POROS
PTIME
QT(I)
QTBASG(I,1)
POUND IN
SUBROUTINE
TOXIWASPB
TOXIFORD
TOXIDUMP
TOXIWASPB
TOXIWASPB
TOXIWASPB
TOXIDUMP
TOXIWASPB
TOXIFORD
TOXIWASPB
TOXISEDW
TOXIDUMP
TOXINIT
TOXIFORD
DEFINITION
Hydrogen ion activity. The negative
value of the power to which 10 is
raised in order to obtain the tempo-
rally averaged concentration of hydro-
nium ions [H3O+] in gram-molecules per
liter.
Pseudo-first-order rate constant for
photolytic transformation of the
toxicant.
Normalized time function for PH. Ad-
justs PHG(J) for seasonal variability.
Normalized time function for POH. Ad-
justs POHG(J) for seasonal variabi-
lity.
Triggers event printout every 3 hours
during peak event period. Local
value of POHG(J) .
Hydroxide ion activity of segment being
considered. Local value of POHG( J) .
Hydroxide ion activity. The negative
value of the power to which 10 is
raised in order to obtain the tempo-
rally averaged concentration of
hydroxide [OH-] ions in gram-molecules
per liter.
Porosity of top bed segment, used in
computing dispersive exchange between
bed and water column. For computing
dispersive exchange between two bed
segments, POROS is the mean porosity.
Rounded-off value of TIME for output.
Variable for temporary storage of daily
flows from auxiliary file.
Q-10 values for bacterial transformation
(c.f. KBACSG) of organic toxicant in
benthic sediments. The Q-10 is the
increase in the second-order rate con-
stant resulting from a 10 degree C
temperature increase.
UNITS
PH
hr-1
unitless
unitless
unitless
POH
pOH
LW/LT
day
unitless
unitless
303
-------
VARIABLE
POUND IN
SUBROUTINE
DEFINITION
UNITS
QTBAWG(I,1)
TOXIFORD
QUANTG(I,1)
TOXIFORD
RATEK
RESGAS
RESLIQ
RFLATG
RVOL(J)
TOXIVOLT
TOXIPHOT
TOXIVOLT
TOXIVOLT
TOXIWASPB
TOXINIT
TOXISBTL
Q-10 values for bacterial transformation
(c.f. KBACWG) of chemical in the water
column of the system. Q-10 is the
increase in the second-order rate con-
stant resulting from a 10 degree C
temperature increase.
Reaction quantum yield in photolytic
transformation of chemical. The quan-
tum yield is the fraction of total
quanta absorbed by the toxicant re-
sulting in transformations. Separate
values are provided for each molecular
configuration of the toxicant in order
to make assumptions concerning their
relative reactivities readily avail-
able to the user.
Internally calculated rate returned from
TOXIVOLT or TOXIPHOT to TOXIFORD for
use as VOLKL or KDPL.
Gas film resistance to volatilization.
Liquid film resistance to volatiliza-
tion.
Reference latitude for corresponding
direct photolysis rate constant
(c.f. KDPG).
Reference volume at which the sediment
compaction cycle is initiated for sur-
face bed segment "J". RVOL(J) is com-
puted in TOXINIT for each surface bed
segment and is stored in location
RVOL(J-1) [equivalenced to VVOL(J-1)].
RVOL(J) is the surface bed volume that
will hold the mass of sediment con-
tained in the upper two bed segments
at time 0. RVOL(J) will be greater
than the combined volume of the upper
two bed segments at time 0 if the
density of the second bed segment is
greater than the top bed segment.
unitless
unitless
unitless
hr/m
hr/m
40.72
million
ft3
304
-------
VARIABLE
SCALQ
SED
SEDCOL
S EOF AC
SEDFL
SETINS,
SETOUS
SETINC,
SETOUC
SEDW
SMASS
FOUND IN
SUBROUTINE
TOXIN IT
TOXIWASPB
TOXIDUMP
TOXISETL
TOXISEDW
TOXISEDW
TOXIWASPB
TOXISEDW
TOXISETL
TOXISETL
TOXISEDW
TOXISETL
DEFINITION
Scale factor to convert daily flows from
auxiliary file to cubic.
Sediment concentration of segment being
considered.
Sediment concentration after conversion
to internal units (kg/liter of water)
in sediment compartment.
Intermediate variable for determining
fraction of chemical sorbed onto sedi-
ment phase of a segment.
Rate of sediment mixture to the surface
of the bed, allowing sorption or
desorption with the overlying water.
Related to the dispersive exchange of
water by the spatially- varying para-
meter DSPSED( J) .
Sediment settling into or out of com-
partment. These variables are trans-
ferred to TOXIWASPD to hold the values
until the next call to TOXISETL.
Chemical settling into or out of a com-
partment. Chemical can only settle
when adsorbed to sediment. These
variables are transferred to TOXIWASPD
to hold the values until the next call
to TOXISETL.
Sediment concentration in water compart-
ment above bed.
Mass of dissolved chemical in the pore
water squeezed from the surface bed
segment to the water column during the
compaction cycle.
UNITS
ft/sec
mgs/LT
kg/iv
unitless
MCFw/day
.mgs/Lj,
mgs/Lij,-
day
mgc/Lj,-
day
kg/L-r
MCF.
mgc/Lw
305
-------
VARIABLE
FOUND IN
SUBROUTINE
DEFINITION
UNITS
SOLG
TOXIVOLT
SOLL
SVOL
TOXIVOLT
TOXISETL
TCELG,TKEL
TCOUNT
TDINT
TEMPM(J)
TOXIWASPB
TOXIPORD
TOXIVOLT
TOXINIT
TOXIDUMP
TOXIWASPB
TOXIDUMP
TOXIWASPB
Aqueous solubility of toxicant chemical
species. If the corresponding value
in ESOLG (c.f.) is zero, SOLG is
interpreted as an aqueous solubility
in mg/liter. if ESOLG is non-zero,
SOLG is used in an equation describing
the molar solubility of the toxicant
species as a function of environmental
temperature (TCELG), i.e., SOLL(mg/l)
= 1000.*MWTG*1 0.**J( SOLG-(1 000.*ESOLG/
(2.303*R*(TCELG+273.15)))). Solu-
bilities are used (inter alia) to
limit the permissible external load-
ings of the toxicant on the system to
values that generate final residual
concentrations .LE. 50% of aqueous
solubility (or 1.E-5M). This con-
straint is imposed in order to help
ensure that the assumption of linear
sorption isotherms is not seriously
violated.
Temperature-corrected aqueous solubili-
ty of chemical.
Volume of pore water squeezed from the
surface bed segment to the water
column during the compaction cycle.
SVOL is the difference in volume between
the surface bed segment before compac-
tion and the top two bed segments after
compaction.
Product of segment temperature TEMPM(J)
and temperature function TEMPN.
Immediately converted to Kelvin
temperature (TKEL) from Celsius.
Number of entries into auxiliary file
for statistical analysis, stored
in COMMON as constant 73.
Time interval between recalculation of
decay rates.
Average temperature for compartment.
m
g/Lj,
unitless
million
ft3
°C
unitless
day
306
-------
VARIABLE
TEMPN
TIMCHK
TMARK
TMASS
TMPM
TOTKG(J)
TOTKL
TQ
FOUND IN
SUBROUTINE
TOXIWASPB
TOXIWASPB
TOXINIT
TOXIWASPB
TOXINIT
TOXISETL
TOXIWASPB
TOXINIT
TOXIWASPB
TOXINIT
TOXIWASPB
TOXIFORD
TOXIDUMP
TOXIWASPB
DEFINITION
Value of normalized time function de-
scribing temperature. Multiples
TEMPM to give TCELG.
Day on which last set of daily flows and
nonpoint source loads were read from
auxiliary file. Saved in COMMON as
constant 82.
Day on which rate constants will be
recalculated, incremented throughout
simulation by TDINT.
Mass of chemical transferred to the next
lower bed segment during the compac-
tion cycle. TMASS is first set to the
mass of chemical in the top bed layer
that is compacted into the new second
bed layer (FVOL*CHEM). Once the new
concentration of the second bed layer
is determined, TMASS is set to the
mass of chemical in the second bed
layer that is buried into the new
third bed layer. This is continued
to the bottom bed segment, where
TMASS is added to BMASS( J) , the amount
of chemical mass lost from the network
by burial below segment J.
Temporarily held value of TMASS, the
amount of chemical transferred to
the next lower bed segment during the
compaction cycle.
Total first order decay rates calcu-
lated externally. If equal to zero,
the program evaluates all separate
processes and calculates a combined
total first order decay rate, TOTKL.
Value of total first-order decay rate
for compartment, derived from TOTKG
(J).
Temporary value for flow or exchange
between two segments, used for maxi-
mizing time step to minimize numerical
dispersion and simulation cost.
UNITS
unitless
day
day
MCF.
mgc/Lrj,
MCF.
mgc/Lrp
day-1
day-1
ft3/day
307
-------
VARIABLE
TRT
TYPEE(J)
TYP1 ,TYP2
V1,V2, ...,
V8
VAPRG
VAPRL
VELOC(J)
VOL
VOLKL
VVOL(J)
WAT
WATFL
FOUND IN
SUBROUTINE
TOXIWASP
TOXIWASPB
TOXINIT
TOXIFORD
TOXIPHOT
TOXISETL
TOXISEEW
TOXISEDW
TOXIWASPB
TOXIDUMP
TOXIVOLT
TOXIVOLT
TOXIWASPB
TOXINIT
TOXIWASPB
TOXIDUMP
TOXIFORD
TOXIWASPB
TOXIFORD
TOXISETL
TOXIVOLT
TOXISEDW
DEFINITION
Test value of time step that would eli-
minate numerical dispersion in a seg-
ment.
Numerical code designating segment types
used to define ecosystem. Available
types: 1 = Epilimnion, 2 = Hypo-
limnion, 3 = Benthic (active) , and
4 = Benthic (buried) .
Internal variables describing type
(e.g., TYP1 - TYPEE(H)) of inter-
changing compartments.
Dummy variables used in argument of
calls to TOXIDU.
Vapor pressure of compound, used to
compute Henry's Law constant if the
latter input datum (HENRYG) is zero,
but VAPRG is non-zero.
VAPRL is the converted value to
atmospheres.
Average velocity of water in the com-
partment.
Equal to BVOL( J) , the volume of the
compartment.
Pseudo-first-order rate constants for
volatilization losses from surface
water compartments.
A dummy array to hold parameters
describing the varying surface bed
segment volume.
Piston velocity term for water vapor.
Dispersive exchange of water between top
bed segment and water column, or
between two vertically adjacent bed
segments.
UNITS
days
unitless
unitless
unitless
torr, or
mm Hg
ft/sec
million
ft3
hr-1
unitless
unitless
ft3/day
308
-------
VARIABLE
WIND
WINDG(J)
WINDN
WS(J)
XJSTR
XMASS
XXX
XTES
XTST
POUND IN
SUBROUTINE
TOXIWASPB
TOXIVOLT
TOXIWASPB
TOXIWASPB
TOXISETL
TOXIWASPB
TOXINIT
TOXIDUMP
TOXIDUMP
TOXIPHOT
TOXIPHOT
TOXINIT
TOXIDUMP
DEFINITION
Local, time-varying wind speed. Equal
to the average wind velocity over a
segment WINDG(J) times the time func-
tion WINDN.
Average wind velocity at a reference
height of 1 0 cm above the water sur-
face. Parameter is used to compute a
piston velocity for water vapor (Liss
1973, Deep-Sea Research 20:221) in
subroutine VOL AT.
Normalized wind speed as function of
time.
Spatially variable parameter denoting
settling rate of suspended sediment
in water column segments (types 1 and
2) , erosion rate of surface bed sedi-
ment in surface bed segment (type 3),
or percolation of pore water through
subsurface bed segments (type 4).
Segment types 1,2: meters per day
Segment type 3: cm per year
Segment type 4: cubic feet/sec
Reference segment for triggering event
and frequency output. A value of zero
will disable it. A non-zero value
will cause printout of all segment
concentrations when the concentration
at XJTR is greater than CTRIG. Also,
a time history of concentrations
(every 3 hours) at XJTR and its
associated benthic segment will be
stored for later frequency analysis.
Mass of chemical in segment.
Exponential light disappearance term.
Maximum light disappearance term. After
this value (87.4) no light is present.
Test variable to determine whether to
set up event-triggered printout. If
either CTRIG or JTR is zero, then
event- triggered printout is disabled.
UNITS
m/sec
m/sec
unitless
unitless
kg
unitless
unitless
unitless
309
-------
SECTION 3
WASP3 PROGRAMMER'S MANUAL
3.1 OVERVIEW
This section is designed to supply information to familiarize the user
with the programming aspects of the models. This section should facili-
tate making any desired modifications to the model and linking user defined
kinetic subroutines.
3.2 THE HYDRODYNAMIC MODEL
3.2.1 Hardware and Software Requirements
3.2.1.1 Minimum Operational System—
PC Requirements—The execution of DYNHYD3 on a personal computer
requires the following environment:
Storage Requirements:
Random Access Memory - 256K bytes
Diskette Drive - Required for installation only
Hard Disk Drive - 5 megabyte or larger
Installation Size - Approximately 440K bytes
DOS Version - 2.12 or higher
Numerical Coprocessor - 8087 or 80287 required
Dot Matrix Printer - 132 column capability.
Although the program is small enough to run on a single floppy drive,
DYNHYD3 uses a scratch file that requires more space than afforded by a
floppy disk.
310
-------
VAX requirements—Since the development and improvement of DYNHYD3 have
been processed on a Digital Computer, the program requirements will be dis-
cussed for a VAX 11/785 only, in addition, DYNHYD3 requires the use of
approximately 10,000 blocks of hard storage, which increases proportionally
with the length of simulation and number of time steps. This large disk
usage can be attributed to a scratch file containing preliminary and final
calculations of the simulation.
3.2.1.2 Development System—
The DYNHYD3 program was ported to the personal computer environment
using the following software development tools.
Language: FORTRAN 77
Operating System: PC DOS 3.1
Compiler: IBM Professional FORTRAN (PROFORT) V1.0
Linkage Editor: IBM Professional FORTRAN (LINK) V2.3
The selection of IBM's Professional FORTRAN (PROFORT) was due to its close
adherence to the ANSI FORTRAN Standards. These standards allow for a pure
transportable code for other machines and compilers.
3.2.2 Installation and Implementation
3.2.2.1 Personal Computer--
Installation of DYNHYD3 onto a personal computer requires the following
steps:
Description Command
1. Set the default drive to the hard disk n:
(e.g., hard disk "n"):
2. Create a DYNHYD3 sub-directory: MKDIR DYNHYD3
3. Change default directory: CD/DYNHYD3
4. Transfer files from diskette (e.g., drive "m") COPYm:*.* n:*.* /V
to the hard disk with verification of copy.
5. Verify copy by listing directory contents: DIR
The following is a brief description of all files contained on the distri-
bution diskettes.
311
-------
README. 1ST
DYNHYD3.POR
DHYD.COM
DYNHYD3.EXE
COMPLINK.BAT
DYNHYD.BAT
COEF2.INP
COEF2 .OUT
Document containing the following list.
The FORTRAN source code file for the DYNHYD3
program.
The COMMON block source code included in the main
source code by the FORTRAN INCLUDE statement.
The executable task image.
A batch command file that compiles and link edits
the DYNHYD3 program.
A batch command file that executes DYNHYD3. To
execute, type: DYNHYD3 "file name" where "file
name" is the name of the input data set (ex.
DYNHYD3 COEF2.INP).
A data set that may be used as input for the
DYNHYD3 model for testing the installation of
the DYNHYD3 system. COEF2.INP is a simple
hydrodynamic estuary for a 13 segment network.
A sample output file created by running the input
data set, COEF2.INP. Comparison of the created
DYNHYD3.OUT to COEF2.OUT will demonstrate the
model's working order.
An input and output data set that provides an
linkage example of DYNHYD3 to WASP3V2.
An input data set for EUTRWASP. This data set
requires the hydrodynamic input of SUMRY2.OUT
which is created by DYNHYD3 and COEF2.INP.
**Note**
Linkage requires the following switches:
-COEF2.INP must have a "2" in column five of the
SUMMARY CONTROL DATA card group. (This modification
has been included.)
-CANAL.INP must have a "5" in line one, column
five of card group D. This indicates to WASP3V2
to read volumes and flows from a previously
created file (by DYNHYD3) called SUMRY2.OUT.
The executable task image DYNHYD3.EXE for the IBM PC and compatible
systems has been included on distribution diskettes. The IBM Professional
FORTRAN compiler and linkage editor (PROFORT and LINK) are not required
to run the DYNHYD3 program. If any modification of the FORTRAN source
312
CANAL.INP
CANAL.OUT
CANAL.INP
-------
code is desired, however, then both of these software development tools
will be required.
3.2.2.2 VAX—
See Section 3.3.2 (WASP installation procedures).
3.2.3 Description of VAX Command Files
Description:
DYNCOMP.COM - This command file compiles , links and executes the
DYNHYD3 program. The command procedure selects the
appropriate source code and common blocks needed to
build the DYNHYD3 task image. To run this program on
the VAX, type:
@DYNCOMP INPUTFILE.NAME
where "INPUTFILE.NAME" is the input data file.
Listing;
? •
$!* THIS COMMAND FILE WILL WORK ON A VAX SYSTEM UNDER VMS *
$! * *
$!* Command file to compile, link and execute DYNHYD3 *
$!* To use this command file type: *
$! * *
$!* @DYNCOMPILE INPUTFILE.NAME *
$! * *
$!* Where INPUTFILE.NAME is the file in which you would like *
$!* to have executed by DYNHYD3. This follows the standard *
$!* parameter statement described by the VMS manual. To submit *
$!* a batch job type: *
$!* *
$!* SUB/PARA=(INPUTFILE.NAME) DYNCOMP *
$!* *
V •
$!
^i ***********************************
$ SET DEF [EXAMPLE.WASP]! < * Change default to appropriate *
$! * directory *
«i ***********************************
$ DEFINE/USER_MODE INFILE 'P1 '
$!
$ COPY INFILE DYNHYD3.INP! INFILE IS EQUAL TO THE INPUT FILE
$! DEFINED TO RUN TEST CASE
$ FO DYNHYD3
$!
313
-------
$1
$ LINK DYNHYD3
$!
$ DEL DYNHYD3.0BJ;*
$!
$!
$ RUN DYNHYD3
$!
$ PRINT DYNHYD3.OUT
$!
$ PURGE RESTART .OUT
$ PURGE DYNHYD3.0UT
$ PURGE SUMRY2.OUT*
$ PURGE *.LIS
$ DEL DYNHYD3.INP;*
$ DEL SCRATCH.TMP;*
Description;
DYNRUN.COM - This command file executes the DYNHYD3 task
image with any user supplied input data stream.
To use DYNRUN.COM type:
@DYNRUN INPUTFILE.NAME
Listing:
V •
$!* THIS COMMAND FILE WILL WORK ON A VAX SYSTEM UNDER VMS *
$!* *
$! * Command file to execute DYNHYD3 *
$!* To use this command file type: *
$] * *
$!* @DYNRUN INPUTFILE.NAME *
$! * *
$!* Where INPUTFILE.NAME is the file to be executed by *
$!* DYNHYD3. This follows the standard parameter statement *
$!* described by the VMS manual. To submit a batch job to *
$!* do the same thing type: *
$! * *
$1* SUB/PARA=(INPUTFILE.NAME) DYNRUN *
$!* *
$!
S j ***********************************
$ SET DBF [EXAMPLE.WASP]! < * Change default to appropriate *
$! * directory *
§i ***********************************
$ DEFINE/USER_MODE INFILE 'P11
'$ COPY INFILE DYNHYD3.INP!
$!
$ RUN DYNHYD3
314
-------
$1
$ PRINT DYNHYD3.OUT
$!
$ PURGE RESTART.OUT
$ PURGE DYNHYD3.0UT
$ DEL DYNHYD3.INP;*
$ DEL SCRATCH.TMP;*
3.2.4 Description of Computer Program
3.2.4.1 Overview of Systems—
Figure 52 is a flow chart of DYNHYD3 illustrating the functional
relationships among the subroutines. The main program opens files, calls
DYNHYD, closes files, and calls the post-processor subroutines that create
the saved output files. Subroutine DYNHYD accomplishes the data input simu-
lation, and printed output, with assistance from SEAWRD, REGAN, WIND, and
RUNKUT.
INPUT
-SEAWRD
REGAN
-WIND
DHYDMAIN
DHYD.COM
DYNHYD
SIMULATION
OUTPUT
-RUNKUT
-WIND
OUTPUT PILES
-RESTRT
-SUMRY1
I
MEAN
-SUMRY2
I
MEAN
Figure 52. DYNHYD3 flow chart.
315
-------
DYNHYD3 INPUT/OUTPUT UNITS
All the input/output units used in DYNHYD3 are controlled by definable
variables. These variables are in the global common block DHYD.COM and can
easily be reassigned. The individual units are listed below with their
default integer values. A brief description is provided to illustrate how
the units are used within the program.
ICRD: User must specify 5 or 8. File 5 refers to the input data set
DYNHYD3.INP. An 8 denotes the input data stream is in File 8. File 8 is
created from File 9 and contains a snapshot of the final conditions from the
previous run (created by the subroutine RSTRT). Files 5 and 8 are formatted
sequential files. Example: READ(ICRD).
IN: Default value is 5. The value 5 denotes the input data stream is
in DYNHYD3.INP. The input data stream is a formatted sequential file.
Example: READ(IN).
MESS: Default value is 6. Mess has been implemented mainly for the
personal computer but may be of some benefit for the main frame user as
well. MESS allows runtime status messages to be displayed on the screen,
and allows the user to track where in the simulation program execution is
occurring. Please note that MESS must always be assigned unit 6 or it
will not default the messages to the screen but to a FOROOO.DAT file.
File 6 is a formatted sequential file. Example: WRITfi(MESS).
OUT: The default value is 1. File 1 is the output file called
DYNHYD3.0UT. File 1 is a formatted sequential file. Example: WRITE(OUT).
RSTR: The default value is 9. File 9 contains a snapshot (flows and
volumes) of the final conditions of a run. File 9 will be converted to File
8, an input stream for the next run. File 9 is a formatted sequential file.
Example: WRITE(RSTR).
SCR: The default value is 2. File 2 is the scratch file processed by
the subroutine SUMRY1 (or 2). File 2 is an unformatted sequential file.
Example: READ and WRITE(SCR).
SUMY: The default value is 4. File 4 is the SUMRY file containing
flows and volumes used by the water quality model. File 4 is a formatted
or unformatted sequential file. Example: WRITE(SUMY).
3.2.4.2 Common Block—
DYNHYD3 has a common block transferred between subroutines. This common
block consists of nine sections that are grouped according to subject matter.
The following is a listing of the common block, plus the variables associated
with each section:
316
-------
COMMON /CHAN/ AK(CH), AREA(CH), AREAT(CH), B(CH), CLEN(CH),
* CN(CH), NJUNC(CH,2), Q(CH), R(CH), V(CH),
* VT(CH),CDIR(CH)
COMMON /JUNG/ JPRT(JU), NCHAN(JU,5), SURF(JU), VOL(JU),
* Y(JU), YT(JU), QIN(JU),BELEV(JU)
COMMON /VFLO/JRVF(VF), NINCR(MQ), NQ(MQ), NVFLOW, QCYC(VF,MQ),
VFLOW(VF,MQ), VQIN(JU), VQ(VF,JU)
COMMON /CFLO/ CQIN( JU) , NCFLOW, JRCF(CF), CFLOW(CF)
COMMON /SEA/ A1(SB,7), PERIOD(SB), NS, NK, NSEA, NINL, RANGE(SB),
* BTIME(SB,TC2), BHEAD(SB,TC2), NTV(SB), NHCYC(SB),
* DTIME(SB) ,TREP(SB) ,TSTART(SB)
COMMON /TIME/ DELT, DT, DT2, T, T2, TEND, TZERO, TTIME(SB)
COMMON /MISC/ ALPHA(BO), G, ICYC, NJ, NC, NCYC, W(SB), MOM(CH),
* FRIC(CH), GRAV(CH), WIN(CH)
COMMON /FILE/ SUMRY,ITAPE,LTAPE,ICRD,NODYN
COMMON /WIND/ WINDS(MQ), WDIR(MQ), NOBSW, IW, WTIM(MQ), FW(CH),
* IREADW, WSLOPS, WSLOPA, TREPW, DTIMW
The COMMON "CHAN" refers to all variables associated with channels.
The "COMMON "JUNG" refers to all variables associated with junctions. The
COMMON "VFLO" refers to all variables associated with variable inflows. The
COMMON "CFLO" refers to all variables associated with constant inflows. The
COMMON "SEA" refers to all variables associated with seaward boundaries. The
COMMON "TIME" refers to all variables associated with the time step. The
COMMON "MISC" is a collection of miscellaneous variables. The COMMON "FILE"
refers to input/output fields. The COMMON "WIND" refers to all variables
associated with the wind.
In each common, the dimensions of a variable are defined by parameters.
The value of these parameters are also defined in a common block called
"DHYD.COM." The separation of these parameters allows easy alterations.
The following is a list of parameter definitions.
JU = number of junctions
CH = number of channels
VF = number of variable inflows
CF = number of constant inflows
ND = number of time steps per quality time steps
MQ = maximum number of flow or wind values in time function
NR = ND + 1
SB = number of seaward boundaries
TC = maximum number of tidal cycles.
317
-------
3.2.4.3 Subroutine Descriptions—
The following is a brief explanation of each subroutine function
contained in DYNHYD3:
DHYDMAIN
The DHYDMAIN subroutine is the control module. It assigns input and
output unit numbers, and operates the calling sequence for the input,
simulation, and output subroutines.
DYNHYD
DYNHYD reads the majority of the input data: program description cards
(Data Group A), program control data (A), output control data (B), hydraulic
summary data (C), junction data (D), channel data (E), and inflow data (F).
Subroutines WIND and SEAWRD are called to read the observed wind conditions,
and seaward boundary data, respectively. DYNHYD calls the simulation (pro-
cessing) subroutines: WIND and RUNKUT for each time step. Information is
printed and the following values are initialized: constants, junction volumes,
the scratch file, counters, and variables.
SEAWRD
SEAWRD has three options for reading the observed seaward boundary data.
The first option reads the regression coefficients directly for the average
tide. The second option calls REGAN to compute the average tide regression
coefficients from average observed tidal heights versus time. The third
option reads variable (highs and lows) observed tidal heights versus time and
fits a repetitive one-half sine wave to the data points.
WIND
WIND has two sections. The first section, entered only once at the
beginning of the simulation, reads in wind speed and direction versus time
and sets up two piecewise linear functions of time. The second section
updates the wind speed and direction by linear interpolation and calculates
the wind accelerational force.
REGAN
REGAN, called by SEAWRD, performs a least squares fit to the observed
seaward boundary data to describe an equation of the form:
Y(T) = A1 + A2 sin(u)t) + A3 sin(2cjt) + A4 sin(3u>t) +
A5 cos(o)t) + A6 cos(2ojt) + A7 cos(3o>t)
by solving normal equations.
318
-------
RUNKUT
RUNKOT solves the equations of continuity and momentum using a modified
Runge-Kutta technique. Channel velocity, channel flow, junction heads,
junction volumes, and channel cross-section are computed for every half time
step and every full time step. RUNKUT also checks stability of the system
and exits program if the channel velocity exceeds 20 ft/sec.
RESTRT
As a start-up for the next run, RESTRT produces a snapshot of the cur-
rent run's final conditions. At the end of the simulation, the title, vari-
able trstrt, variable nrstrt, junction information (number, head, surface
area, flow, and connecting channels) , and channel information (number, length,
width, surface area, Manning roughness coefficient, velocity, and hydraulic
radius) are written to file RSTR.
SUMRY1 and SUMRY2
SUMRY1 and SUMRY2 summarize and save a record of the hydraulic conditions.
Hydraulic parameters are saved with a frequency dependent on the lengths of
the hydraulic time step and the time step used in the water quality model
accessing the stored hydraulic data. The parameters stored for use by the
quality model (see Figure 53) are junction volumes and inflows, channel
flows, velocities, and depths. SUMRY1 creates an unformatted file and SUMRY2
creates a formatted file. For averaging flows, velocities and depths SUMRY
calls MEAN.
MEAN
MEAN computes the average junction volumes and inflows, channel flows,
velocities, and depths over a time step (DELTQ) equal to the hydraulic time
step (DELT) times the water quality time step (NODYN) divided by 3600 seconds:
DELTQ = DELT * NODYN/3600. MEAN is capable of three averaging options:
Simpson's transformation, trapezoidal transformation, and straight transfor-
mations. At the present, MEAN is hardwired to use the trapezoidal transfor-
mation.
3.3 THE BASIC WATER QUALITY MODEL
3.2.1 Hardware and Software Requirements
3.3.1.1 Minimum Operational System—
Personal Computer Requirements
The size and structure of the WASP program require the following
personal computer environment:
319
-------
A
B
C
D
E
•
F
G
F
G
ITAPE
ITAPE + NODYN
LTAPE
A) ALPHA(1-40). NJ, NC. DELT, ITAPE. LTAPE, SUMRY. NODYN
(CLEN(N), B(N). CN(N)(NJUNC(N.I) 1=1,2) N=1,NC)
Title, Network Size, Time Interval, Beginning Cycle. End Cycle,
Tape Format, Number Hydraulic Time Steps per Qualtiy Time Step,
Length of Channel. Vidth of Channel. Lower or Higher Junction Designator
B) ((SURF(J), NCHAN(J.K) K=1.5) J=1.NJ)
Surface Area of Junction, Channel Number Entering Junction
C) NCFLOW (JRCF(I). CFLOT(I) I=1,NCFLOW)
Number of Constant Flow Inputs, Junction Receiving Constant Flow,
Constant Inflow + or —
D) NVFLOW (JRVF(I). NINCR(I) I=1.NVFLOW)
Number of Variable Flows, Number of Increments in Variable Flow
E) (QCYC(I.K) (VFLOW(I.K) K=1.NI) 1=1.NVFLOW)
Hydrodynamic Cycle (Time Step), Flow value for Variable Flow
F) CYCLE, (VOL(J), QINSAV(J) J=1,NJ)
Hydrodynamic Cycle, Volume of Junction, Inflow into Junction
G) (QSAVE(N). VSAVE(N). RSAVE(N) N=1.NC)
Average Flow, Average Velocity, Average Hydraulic Radius
Figure 53. Summary tape description.
- 640 kilobyte Random Access Memory (RAM)
- 360 kilobyte diskette drive
- 5/10/20 megabyte hard disk drive
- 8087 math coprocessor
- DOS version 2.12 or higher
- dot matrix printer with 132 column capability
These requirements refer to the distribution versions. Depending upon the
user's specific simulation, the variables may need redimensioning, thus
increasing the Random Access Memory (RAM) requirements.
VAX 11/785 Requirements
The VAX requires a minimum of 4000 blocks of disk space to build and
execute the program.
320
-------
3.3.1.2 Development System for the Personal Computer—
The WASP system of programs were ported to the personal computer
environment using the following software development tools:
Language: FORTRAN 77
Operating System: PC DOS 3.1
Compiler: IBM Professional FORTRAN (PROPORT) vl.O
Linkage Editor: Phoenix Software Associates, LTD
(PLINK86) v1.47
The selection of IBM's Professional FORTRAN (PROFORT) was due to its
adherence to the ANSI Fortran Standards. The source code for the VAX
11/785 is exactly the same as the personal computer code.
Phoenix Software's PLINK86 was chosen because of its ability to
overlay both code and data.
3.3.2 Installation and Implementation
Personal Computers;
Installation of the WASP system onto a personal computer requires the
following steps:
Description Command
Set the default drive to the hard disk n:
(e.g., hard disk "n"):
Create a WASP3P directory: MKDIR WASP3P
Request verification of copy: VERIFY ON
Change default directory: CD/WASP3P
Transfer files from diskette (e.g., RESTORE m: n:
drive "m") to the hard disk:
Remove verification: VERIFY OFF
Verify directory contents: DIR
To test the execution of the program, test data sets have been supplied
with corresponding outputs for comparisons.
321
-------
The following is a brief description of all files contained on the
distribution diskettes:
README.1ST
COMPLINK.BAT
TOXIWASP.BAT
EUTRWASP.BAT
Document containing the following list.
A batch command file to compile and link edit either
the toxics or eutrophication WASP source code. See
program for documentation.
A batch command file that executes TOXIWASP. To
execute, type: TOXIWASP "file name" where "file
name" is the name of an input data set (ex.
TOXIWASP POND.INP).
A batch command file that executes EUTRWASP. To
execute, type: EUTRWASP "file name" where "file
name" is the name of an input data set (ex: EUTRWASP
2DLAKE.INP).
TOXIWSP3.LNK
EUTRWSP3.LNK
POND .OUT
2DLAKE .OUT
These are link edit command files used by the
PLINK86 linkage editor in COMPLINK.BAT.
These are sample output files for TOXIWASP and
EUTRWASP test runs using POND.INP and 2DLAKE.INP,
respectively. Compare these to WASP.OUT after
executing the appropriate version of the model.
POND.INP
2DLAKE.INP
WASP3V2.POR
TOXIWASB.POR
EU03WASP.POR
TOXIWSP3.CMN
EU03WSP3.CMN
Data sets that may be used as input for the
TOXIWASP and EUTRWASP models to test the
installation of the WASP system. POND.INP is a
simple pond and sediment system in which toxic
degradation and mobility are simulated. 2DLAKE.INP
simulates eutrophication attributes in a stratified
lake system.
The FORTRAN source code for the WASP driver
program. This program solves the mass balance
equation and controls the time step function.
The kinetic subroutine linked with WASP3V2.POR
to simulate organic toxics.
The kinetic subroutine linked with WASP3V2.POR
to simulate eutrophication attributes.
See note below.
322
-------
**NOTE**:
EU03WSPB.CMN
TOXIWSPB .CMN
TOXIWSP3.EXE
EUTKWSP3.EXE
If the user selects to compile and link edit
WASP3V2 without using the batch command file
COMPLINK.BAT as described above, then he will be
required to either:
- Copy TOXIWSP3.CMN to WSPCMN.F4P before compiling
WASP for organic toxics, or
- Copy EU03WSP3.CMN to WSPCMN.F4P before compiling
WASP for eutrophication simulation.
This is required due to the different FORTRAN
common blocks for EUTRWASP and TOXIWASP. This
step is needed when compiling WASP without using
the batch command file COMPLINK.BAT. Using the
command file, editing is required to select the
appropriate common block to be copied for each
compile and link edit (see COMPLINK.BAT for
further detail).
The common blocks that are required by the
kinetic subroutines (EU03WASP.FOR and TOXIWASB.FOR)
The executable task image codes.
VAX INSTALLATION;
Installation of the WASP model onto the VAX system requires the
following steps:
Description
Mount the tape
Set default to desired
directory
Copy contents
Check to see if files
were copies
Dismount the tape
TOXICOMP.COM
Command
MOU/NOASSIST/OVERRIDE=OWNER MSA0:WASP32
Set Def DBA0:[xxx.yyy]
Copy MSA0:*.*;* DBA0:[xxx.yyy]
DIR
Dismount MSAO:
This command file compiles, links and executes
the TOXIWASP program. This procedure will select
the appropriate source code and common blocks
needed to build the TOXICS task image. To run
this program on the VAX type:
323
-------
0TOXICOMP INPUTFILE.NAME
where INPUTFILE.NAME is the input data file.
$!* THIS COMMAND FILE WILL WORK ON A VAX SYSTEM UNDER VMS *
$! * *
$!* Command file to compile, link and execute TOXIWASP *
$!* To use this command file type: *
$!* *
$1* 0TCOMPILE INPUTFILE.NAME *
$!* *
$!* Where INPUTFILE.NAME is the file to be executed by DYNHYD3. *
$!* This follows the standard parameter statement described by *
$!* the VMS manual. To submit a batch job type: *
$!* *
$!* SUB/PARA=(INPUTFILE.NAME) TOXICOMP *
$!* *
$!
$!
$ SET DBF [EXAMPLE.WASPj! < * Change Default to Appropriate *
$! * Directory *
$ DEL WSPCMN.F4P;*
$!
$ DEL TOXI.FOR;*
$ CREATE TOXI.FOR
$!
$ COPY TOXIWSP3.CMN WSPCMN.F4P
$1
$ DEFINE/USER_MODE INFILE 'P1'
$!
$ COPY INFILE WASP.INP
$!
$ APPEND WASP3V2.FOR TOXI.FOR
$ APPEND TOXIWASB.FOR TOXI.FOR
$!
$ FO TOXI.FOR
$!
$ LINK TOXI
$!
$ DEL TOXI.OBJ;*
For file description see personal computer installation and implementation
Section 3.2.2.
3.3.3 Description of VAX Command Files
The following is a description and listing of each command file that
compiles and link edits on the VAX 11/785 under VMS.
324
-------
TOXIRUN.GOM - This command procedure will execute the TOXICS
task image with a supplied input data stream.
To use TOXIRUN.COM type:
@TOXIRUN INPUT FILE. NAME
V *
$!* THIS COMMAND PILE WILL WORK ON A VAX SYSTEM UNDER VMS *
$!* *
$1* Command file to execute TOXIWASP *
$!* To use this command file type: *
$!* *
$!* @TRUN INPUTFILE.NAME *
$!* *
$!* Where INPUTFILE.NAME is the file to be executed by DYNHYD3. *
$1* This follows the standard parameter statement described by *
$!* the VMS manual. To submit a batch job type: *
$!* *
$!* SUB/PARA=( INPUTFILE.NAME) TOXIRUN *
$!* *
$!
$ SET DBF [EXAMPLE.WASP] ! < --------- * Change Default to Appropriate *
$! * Directory *
§i ***********************************
$ DEFINE/USER_MODE INFILE 'P1'
$ COPY INFILE WASP.INP
$!
$ RUN TOXI
$!
$ PRINT WASP. OUT
$!
$ PURGE RESTART .OUT
$ PURGE WASP .OUT
$ DEL WASP.INP;*
$ DEL FREQ.TMP;*
$!
$ DEL TOXI. FOR;*
$!
$ RUN TOXI
$!
$!
$ PURGE RESTART .OUT
$ PURGE WASP .OUT
$ DEL WASP.INP;*
325
-------
EUTRORUN.COM - This command procedure executes the EUTRO task
image with any supplied input data stream.
To use EUTRORUN.COM type:
©EUTRORUN INPUTFILE.NAME
S* •
$1* THIS COMMAND FILE WILL WORK ON A VAX SYSTEM UNDER VMS *
$!* *
$!* Command file to execute EUTRO. *
$1 * To use this command file type: *
$!* *
$!* @ERUN INPUTFILE.NAME *
§!* *
$!* Where INPUTFILE.NAME is the file to be executed by EUTRO.EXE. *
$!* This follows the standard parameter statement described by *
$!* the VMS manual. To submit a batch job type: *
$!* *
$!* SUB/PARA=(INPUTFILE.NAME) EUTRORUN *
$! * *
?!
$!
£| ***********************************
$ SET DEF [EXAMPLE.WASP]! < * Change Default to Appropriate *
$! * Directory *
« I ***********************************
$ DEFINE/USER_MODE INFILE 'P'
$ COPY INFILE WASP.INP
$!
$ RUN EUTRO
$!
$ PRINT WASP.OUT
$ PURGE RESTART.OUT
$ PURGE WASP.OUT
$ DEL WASP.INP;*
$ DEL FREQ.TMP;*
EUTROCOMP.COM - This command file compiles, links and executes the
EUTROWASP program. This procedure will select the
appropriate source code and common blocks needed to
build the EUTRO task image. To run this program on
the VAX type:
©EUTROCOMP INPUTFILE.NAME
326
-------
$!
$!* THIS COMMAND FILE WILL WORK ON A VAX SYSTEM UNDER VMS *
$1*
$!* Command file to compile, link and execute EUTRWASP *
$!* To use this command file type: *
$! * *
$!* 0ECOMPILE INPUTFILE.NAME *
$1* *
$!* Where INPUTFILE.NAME is the file to be executed by EUTRWASP. *
$!* This follows the standard parameter statement described by *
$!* the VMS manual. To submit a batch job type: *
$!* *
$!* SUB/PARA=(INPUTFILE.NAME) EUTROCOMP *
$!* *
$!
$!
gi ***********************************
$ SET DBF [EXAMPLE.WASP]! < * Change Default to Appropriate *
$! * Directory *
£1 ***********************************
$ DEL WSPCMN . F4P; *
$!
$ DEL EUTRO.FOR;*
$ CREATE EUTRO.FOR
$!
$ COPY EU03WSP3.CMN WSPCMN.F4P
$!
$ DEFINE/USER_MODE INFILE 'P11
$!
$ COPY INFILE WASP.INP
$!
$ APPEND WASP3V2.FOR EUTRO.FOR
$ APPEND EU03WASP.FOR EUTRO.FOR
$!
$ FO EUTRO.FOR
$!
$ LINK EUTRO
$!
$ DEL EUTRO.OBJ;*
$1
$!
$ RUN EUTRO
$!
$!
$ DEL EUTRO.FOR;*
$1
$ PRINT WASP.OUT
$!
$ PURGE RESTART .OUT
$ PURGE WASP .OUT
$ DEL WASP.INP;*
$ DEL FREQ.TMP;*
327
-------
******************* *NOTE* *****************
If it is desired to use the above command files in a batch mode simply type:
SUB/PARA=(IMPUTFILE.NAME) COMMAND FILE NAME
EX: SUB/PARA=(POND.INP) TOXIRUN OR TOXICOMP
3.3.4 Description of Computer Program
3.3.4.1 Overview of System—
Input/Output Files
All the input/output units can be reassigned an integer value in the
WASP MAIN subroutine. It is suggested that the new user not change the.se
units until he becomes more familiar with the structure and function of the
program. The following is a brief description of each integer and their
default integer values.
AUX; Default value is 4. AUX refers to the use of an auxiliary flow
file. This file has been created outside the WASP programs and is used to
input flows and volumes. Example: READ(AUX).
HYDRO; Default value is 7. HYDRO is the input data set created by
DYNHYD3 (SUMRY1.OUT or SUMRY2.OUT). This file contains flows and volumes
calculated by DYNHYD3. HYDRO is a sequential formatted (SUMRY1.OUT) or
unformatted (SUMRY2.OUT) file. Example: READ(HYDRO).
IN: Default value is 2. The value 2 refers to the input data set..
Input data set is a sequential formatted file. May also be used to
represent the integer 2. Example: READ(IN).
OUT; Default value is 5. OUT refers to the output file "WASP.OUT."
OUT may also represent the integer 5. WASP.OUT is a sequential formatted
file. Example: WRITE(OUT).
RESRT; Default value is 9. RESTRT refers to the file containing a
snapshot of final conditions. This file may then be used as initial
conditions in the next run. RESTRT is a sequential formatted file.
Example: WRITE(RESTRT).
SCRN; Default value is 6. Implemented for the benefit of the PC
version, SCRN is designed to give screen messages to user indicating
stage of simulation and execution. SCRN may be helpful to both the PC
and mainframe user because it can act as a diagnostic file. SCRN can
illustrate where program termination occurred. To examine SCRN type of
list "SCREEN.OUT." "SCREEN.OUT is a sequential formatted file. Example:
READ(SCRN).
328
-------
Figure 54 is a flow chart of WASP3 illustrating the functional relation-
ships among the subroutines. The main program opens files, calls the input,
simulation, and output subroutines, and closes files. The input subroutines
are called sequentially, as shown. Subroutine EULER controls the actual
simulation, calling DERIV each time step to recalculate mass derivatives.
The output subroutines are called sequentially as shown after the simulation
is completed. The utility subroutines can be called by the other subroutines
as needed.
3.3.4.2 Common block
****** WASP COMMON BLOCK ******
The WASP program requires two "include" common blocks that are brought
into the program during compilation of the program. These common blocks are
the WASP DRIVER common block (WSPCMN.F4P) and the KINETIC subroutine common
block (TOXIWSPB.CMN or EUO3WSPB.CMN). The WASP DRIVER common block consists
of five distinct groups: parameters, integers, real numbers, labelled files
and intermediate files. The parameter statement found at the top of the WASP
DRIVER common block dimensions arrays variables. The common block included
into the WASP DRIVER program depends on the model: TOXIWASP or EUTRWASP.
The batch command files that are supplied with the distribution tapes or
diskettes will include the appropriate common block for TOXIWASP or EUTRWASP.
COMMON BLOCKS
TOXIWSP3.CMN
EU03WSP3.CMN
See note below.
EU03WSPB.CMN
NOTE: If the user selects to compile and link edit
WASP3V2 without using the batch command files EUTRO
COMP.COM or TOXICOMP.COM, he must either:
- copy TOXIWSP3.CMN to WSPCMN.F4P when compiling WASP
for organic toxics, or
- copy EU03WSP3.CMN to WSPCMN.F4P when compiling WASP
for eutrophication simulation.
The common block used for the Eutrophication kinetic
subroutine.
TOXCMN. F4P
The common block used for the Toxics kinetic subroutine.
The following is a listing of the three common blocks,
329
-------
ae O o
£5 Q 5 £ i
it: o: os H- <
a: x x 2 c
m o o u. co
1 1 1 1
-SETCA
t
«
••
^
•«
-»•
£
•«•
2
2
2
C
a
(/
•<
$
<
Ul
(0
1
ft
0
5
•
r
>
5
i
»
^ 3 *
E&g
to w ^
1 1
L-WMESS
3
a.
3
O
S Q.
0) LJ
Ol
P 3
CL W
"5
rt
_c
«o r
^- »
CO {
O CO '
«r <
S ^
1
s.
Intermedic
Results
• l>
> O QJ
o.>ui
CO ^Q
Q
imulation
Utilities
to
o •<* <
L a. 3
2 2 2
t * ^
1 1
H- a.
^ 3 ^5
o a. oa
1 1
rO
j
cs 04 <; oo
Q «- P4 Q.
>- (O »- (O
§ ^ 1 1
1 1 1 1
00 < •*
§ § 5 5 £
S S S S g
1 1 1 1 1
in «o < r* o> o »-
a. a. «o a. a. — «-
CO CO CO CO CO CO CO
1101^1^
i i i i i i i
I
o
(0
CT>
2
I
in
a>
M
CP
•H
330
-------
C ++++++++++ FILE WSPCMN.F4P ++++++++++
C
C COMMON BLOCK FOR THE
C IBM PC VERSION OF WASP
C
C ASSIGN SY=SYSTEMS, SG=SEGMENTS, CS=CONSTANTS, PR=PARAMETERS
C BC=BOUNDARY CONG'S, WK=LOADS, TF=TIME FUNCTIONS
C MP=MAX PRINT REG'S, MD=MXDMP, MB=MAX NO. BREAKS OR TF'S
Q* ***********************************************************************
INTEGER SY, SG, S2, CX, PR, BC, WK, TF, MP,MB,MD,MDU,MB1
INTEGER MV,M30,M50,M70,M72,M73,M75
PARAMETER (SY=2, SG=80, S2=SG+SG, CX=85, PR=21, BC=20, WK=10,
. TF=6, MP=50, MB=40, MD=8, MDU=MD*SG, MB1=MB+1, MV=MD*SG*MP,
. M30=2*BC*SY, M50=2*WK*SY, M70*S2+1, M72=S2+1, M73=2*TF, M75=2*MB)
C
REAL NVOLT,NRT,NOT,NBCT,NWKT,NFUNT,NFT,NTB,NTW
REAL MVOL,MR,MQ,MBC,MWK,MFUNC,NPSWK
INTEGER IN,HYDRO,AUX,FRQ,RESTRT,SCRN,OUT,SYSBY,RBY,QBY
LOGICAL*4 ANCHOR
REAL*8 AIMASS,AOMASS,RIMASS,ROMASS,XLMASS,XKMASS,XBMASS, XMASSO
REAL*8 CD
Q**********************************************************************V
C INTEGERS
COMMON /INTGR/ IN,ICRD,OUT,AUX,RESTRT,HYDRO,SCRN,
NOSYS,NOSEG,ISYS,ISEG,ISIM,LISTG,LISTC,NPRINT,
INITB,IPRNT,IDUMP(8,2),IDISK,IREC,MXDMP,IDFRC(1 9),
NBCPSY,NWKPSY,SYSBY(SY),RBY(SY),QBY(SY),NEGSLN,
IR(S2),JR(S2),IQ(S2),JQ(S2),IBC(SY,BC),IWK(SY,WK),
IVOPT,NOV,IROPT,NOR,IQOPT,NOQ,IBCOP(SY),NOBC(SY),
IWKOP(SY),NOWK(SY),NOPAM,NCONS,NFUNC,
ITIMR,ITIMV,ITIMQ,ITIMF(TF) ,ITIMB(SY,BC) ,ITIMW(SY,WK) ,
ITCHCK, MXITER,INPERR,FRQ
C REALS
COMMON /REAL/ ANCHOR,T1MB,DT,TZERO,SCALT,TEND,PRNT,OMEGA,
CD(SY,SG),C(SY,SG),CMAX(20),CMIN(SY),
PARAM(SG,PR),CONST(CX),
BVOL(SG),BR(S2),BQ(S2),BBC(SY,BC),BWK(SY,WK),BFUNC(TF),
MVOL(SG),MR(S2),MQ(S2),MBC(SY,BC),MWK(SY,WK),MFUNC(TF),
NVOLT,NRT, NOT, NTF, NBCT(SY,BC),NWKT(SY,WK),NFUNT(TF),
NTB(TF) ,NTW(TF)
C LABELLED
COMMON /PDP/ MXSYS,MXSEG
331
-------
COMMON /MASS/ AIMASS,AOMASS,RIMASS,ROMASS,XLMASS,XKMASS,XBMASS,
XMASSO
COMMON /CPRINT/ PRINT(20),TPRNT(20),ADFAC,TPRINT
COMMON /DAYIND/ DAY,LDAY,NDAY,NEWDAY,DQTIME,DRTIME,DWKTIM
COMMON /NPSCOM/ NPSWK(SY,WK),INPS(WK),NWKS,NOWKS,LOPT
INTERMEDIATE FILES
COMMON /SCRTCH/ FILE30(MB,M30),FILE50(MB,M50),FILE70(MB,M70),
FILE72(MB,M72),FILE73(MB,M73),FILE75(M75,1),
FILE80(SY,20),NBRK30(BC),NBRK50(WK),NBRK70(1),
NBRK72(1),NBRK73(TF),NBRK75(1)
COMMON /DUMP/ DTIME(MP),DVAR(MV,SY),DVOL(MP,SG)
C
C +-H-+++++++ END OF FILE WSPCMN.F4P +++++-H-+++
C
332
-------
c
c
c*
c
c
c
c
EU03WSP3.CMN
IBM 3033 VERSION OF WASP
LAST REVISED 03/06/85
C
C
C
C
ASSIGN SY=SYSTEMSf SG=SEGMENTS, CS=CONSTANTS, PR=PARAMETERS
BC=BOUNDARY CONG'S, WK=LOADS, TF=TIME FUNCTIONS
MP=MAX PRINT REG'S, MD=MXDMP, MB=MAX NO. BREAKS OR TF'S
********************************************************************
INTEGER SY, SG, S2, CX, PR, BC, WK, TF, MP,MB,MD,MDU,MB1
INTEGER MV,M30,M50,M70,M72,M73,M75
PARAMETER (SY=8, SG=30, S2=SG+SG, CX=75, PR=15, BC=40, WK=20,
. TF=14, MP=50, MB=50, MD=4, MDU=MD*SG, MB1=MB+1, MV=MD*SG*MP,
. M30=2*BC*SY, M50=2*WK*SY, M70=S2+1, M72=S2+1 , M73=2*TF, M75=2*MB)
PARAMETER (SY=8, SG=50, S2=SG+SG, CX=75, PR=15, BC=50, WK=50,
. TF=14, MP=50, MB=60, MD=4, MDU=MD*SG, MB1=MB+1, MV=MD*SG*MP,
. M30=2*BC*SY, M50=2*WK*SY, M70=S2+1, M72=S2+1, M73=2*TF, M75=2*MB)
it*******************************************************************
REAL NVOLT,NRT,NQT,NBCT,NWKT,NFUNT,NFT,NTB,NTW
REAL MVOL,MR,MQ,MBC,MWK,MFUNC,NPSWK
INTEGER IN,HYDRO,AUX,FRQ,RESTRT,SCRN,OUT,SYSBY,RBY,QBY
LOGICAL*4 ANCHOR
REAL*8 AIMASS,AOMASS,RIMASS,ROMASS,XLMASS,XKMASS,XBMASS,XMASSO
REAL*8 CD
********************************************************************
INTEGERS
COMMON /INTGR/ IN,ICRD,OUT,AUX,RESTRT,HYDRO,SCRN,
NOSYS,NOSEG,ISYS,ISEG,ISIM,LISTG,LISTC,NPRINT,
INITB,IPRNT,IDUMP(8,2) ,IDISK,IREC,MXDMP,IDFRC( 1 9),
NBCPSY,NWKPSY,SYSBY(SY),RBY(SY),QBY(SY),NEGSLN,
IR(S2),JR(S2),IQ(S2),JQ(S2),IBC(SY,BC),IWK(SY,WK),
IVOPT,NOV,IROPT,NOR,IQOPT,NOQ,IBCOP(SY),NOBC(SY),
IWKOP(SY),NOWK(SY),NOPAM,NCONS,NFUNC,
ITIMR,ITIMV,ITIMQ,ITIMF(TF),ITIMB(SY,BC),ITIMW(SY,WK),
ITCHCK,MXITER,INPERR,FRQ
REALS
COMMON /REAL/ ANCHOR,TIME,DT,TZERO,SCALT,TEND,PRNT,OMEGA,
CD(SY,SG),C(SY,SG),CMAX(20),CMIN(SY),
PARAM(SG,PR),CONST(CX),
BVOL(SG),BR(S2),BQ(S2),BBC(SY,BC),BWK(SY,WK),BFUNC(TF),
MVOL(SG),MR(S2),MQ(S2),MBC(SY,BC),MWK(SY,WK),MFUNC(TF),
NVOLT,NRT, NQT, NTF, NBCT(SY,BC),NWKT(SY,WK),NFUNT(TF),
NTB(TF) ,NTW(TF)
LABELLED
COMMON /POP/ MXSYS,MXSEG
333
-------
COMMON /MASS/ AIMASS,AOMASS,RIMASS,ROMASS,XLMASS,XKMASS,XBMASS,
XMASSO
COMMON /CPRINT/ PRINT(20),TPRNT(20),ADFAC,TPRINT
COMMON /DAYIND/ DAY,LDAY,NDAY,NEWDAY,DOTIME,DRTIME,DWKTIM
COMMON /NPSCOM/ NPSWK(SY,WK),INPS(WK),NWKS,NOWKS,LOPT
INTERMEDIATE FILES
COMMON /SCRTCH/ FILE30(MB,M30),FILE50(MB,M50),FILE70(MB,M70),
FILE72(MB,M72),FILE73(MB,M73),FILE75(M75,1 ) ,
FILE80(SY,20),NBRK30(BC),NBRK50(WK),NBRK70(1) ,
NBRK72O ) ,NBRK73(TF) ,NBRK75(1 )
COMMON /DUMP/ DTIME(MP),DVAR(MV,SY),DVOL(MP,SG)
33H
-------
C TOXIWSPB.COM, 1/28/85
REAL KAHL,KNHL,KBHL,KOXL,KBACWL,KBACSL,MWTG
REAL KAHG, KNHG,KBHG,KOXG,KBACWG,KBACSG,K02G,K02L,K20
REAL INDEXW,INDEXS,KOC,KOW,KP,KB, KVOG,TKEL,JL,IL
REAL LATG,KDPG,KDPL,LIGHTN
C
DIMENSION EBHG(3,1),ENHG(3,1),EAHG(3,1 ),QUANTG(3,1),
KAHG(3,1),KBHG(3,1),KNHG(3,1),EOXG(3,1),KOXG(3,1),KBACWG(3,1),
KBACSG(3,1),QTBAWG(3,1),QTBASG(3,1),TEMPM(SG),DEPTHG(SG),
VELOC(SG),ALPHA(3),BIOTMG(SG),K02G(SG),PHG(SG),WS(SG),
OXRADG(SG) ,WINDG(SG) ,TYPEE(SG) ,TOTKG(SG) ,ACBACG(SG)
DIMENSION POHG(SG) ,OCS(SG), BACTOG(SG),BIOMAS(SG),CMPETG(SG)
SIMENSION DISPV(SG),KP(SG),PCTWA)SG),FRW(SG),DSPSED(SG)
DIMENSION WOL(SG),BVOLO(SG),RVOL(SG),BMASS(SG),VOLKG(SG)
C
C CONSTANTS
C
C HYDROLYSIS
EQUIVALENCE
(CONST(1),EBHG(1,1)), (CONST(4),ENHG(1,1)),
(CONST(7)fEAHG(1,D), (CONST(1 0) ,KAHG(1 ,1) ) ,
(CONSTO3) ,KBHG(1 ,1)), (CONST(1 6) ,KNHG( 1 ,1 ) )
C
C OXIDATION
EQUIVALENCE
(CONST(25),KBACWG(1,1)), (CONST{28),QTBAWG(1,1)),
(CONST(31),KBACSG(1,1)), (CONST(34),QTBASG(1,1))
C
C PARTITIONING
EQUIVALENCE (CONST(37),KOC), (CONST(38),KOW),(CONST(39),OCB),
(CONST(40),ALPHA(D)
C
C VOLATILIZATION
EQUIVALENCE
(CONST(43),MWTG),(CONST(44),HENRYG),(CONST(45),VAPRG),
(CONSTU6) ,KVOG) , (CONST(47) ,SOLG), (CONST(48) ,ESOLG),
(CONST(49),EVPRG),(CONST(50),EHENG),(CONST(51),WIND),
(CONST(52),K02L),(CONST(53),DUMMY6)
C
C PHOTOLYSIS
335
-------
EQUIVALENCE (CONST(54),KDPG),
(CONST(55),RFLATG),(CONST(56),CLOUDG),(CONST(57),LATG),
(CONST(58),DFAOG),(CONST(59),QUANTG(1 ,1))
C
C SPECIAL PRINT OPTIONS
EQUIVALENCE (CONST(62),XJTR),(CONST(63),CTRIG),(CONST(64),DTOPT) ,
(CONST(65),TDINT)
C
C INTERNALLY SAVED CONSTANTS
EQUIVALENCE (CONST(67),BURY),(CONST(68),KDPL),
(CONST(69,KB),(CONST(70),TEMPN),(CONST(71),TKEL),
(CONST(72),PNEXT(,(CONST(73),TCOUNT),
(CONST(74),TMARK),(CONST(75),XJSTR)
EQUIVALENCE (CONST(76),PH),(CONST(77),POH),(CONST(78),LIGHTN) ,
(CONST(79),INDEXW),(CONST(SO),INDEXS),(CONST981),BOTLIT),
C . (CONST(82),TIMCHK),(CONST(83),MOQS),(CONST(84),NOWKS),
(CONST(85),TMASS)
C
C PARAMETERS
C
EQUIVALENCE (PARAM(1,1),TEMPM(1)),(PARAM(1 ,2),DEPTHG(1)),
(PARAM(1,3),VELOC(1)),(PARAMd,4),WINDG(1)),(PARAM(1,5),
TYPEE( 1 )),(PARAM( 1,6),BACTOG( 1 )),(PARAM( 1,7),ACBACG(1)),
(PARAMd ,8),BIOMASS(1) ),(PARAMd ,9),BIOTMG(1) ),
(PARAM(1 ,10),POHG(D), (PARAMd, 11),OXRADG(D),
EQUIVALENCE
(PARAMd ,12) ,OCS(1 ) ), (PARAMd ,13) ,PCTWA(1 ) ),
(PARAMd ,14),DSPSED(1) ),(PARAMd ,15),PHG(1) ),
(PARAM(1 ,17),CMPETG(1 )),(PARAM(1 ,16),WS(1 )),
(PARAMd ,18) ,TOTKG(1) ),(PARAMd ,19),DISPV(1) ),
C
EQUIVALENCE (PARAM(1,20),VVOL(1)),(VVOL(1),BVOLO(1)),
(WOL(1),RVOL(1) )
EQUIVALENCE (PARAMd ,14) ,VOLKG(1 ) ), (PARAMd ,21) ,BMASS(1 ) )
EQUIVALENCE (PARAMd ,1 2) ,KP(1 )),( PARAMd , 1 3 ) ,FRW(1 ))
EQUIVALENCE (PARAM( 1 ,3),BO2G(1 )),
C
EQUIVALENCE (IDUMP(1,1),11),(IDUMP(1,2),J1)
C
c
336
-------
c
C THIS IS THE INCLUSION 'EUTRO.COM1
C
COMMON/EUTRO1 /
F,
C3,
GP,
.
H,
C4,
10,
DO,
I,
C5,
KA,
ON,
CN,
C6,
KE,
OP
CS,
C7,
C1
C8
,
,
SA,
C2
C9
TN
9
9
9
COMMON/EUTR02/
K20,
C16,
DZ1 ,
GZ2,
SKE,
TIP,
N02
C10,
C17,
DZ2,
IAV,
SK9,
TON,
C1 1,
C18,
DIP,
IKE,
SOD,
TOP,
C1 2,
C19,
GPP,
ITO,
SR9,
TSI,
C13,
DPP,
GP1 ,
NH3,
STP,
VEL,
C14,
DP1
GP2
NO3
SUM
VOL
,
9
,
,
9
C15
DP2
GZ1
SAL
TIN
ZOO
9
9
9
1
9
9
COMMON/EUTR03/
FLUX,
REAK,
SK78,
SR63,
SR84,
BBOD,
GIT1 ,
PHYT,
SK8P,
SR64,
TEMP,
BODS,
GIT2,
RADJ,
SR17
SR7P,
FLOW,
PSED,
IBOT,
RESP,
SR5P,
SR73,
WIND,
EXCH
IMAX,
SK17,
SR53,
SR74,
UBOD,
ITMP
SK58
SR54
SR8P
OPO4
9
1
9
t
t
ITOT
SK68
SR6P
SR83
CBOD
9
9
,
9
9
COMMON/BUT RO4/
PFLUX ,
CCHL2 ,
DOMAX,
HGRAZ ,
ASSIM,
BFLUX,
CHLA1 ,
DOMIN ,
KESHD,
CCHL1 ,
PEXCH,
CHLA2 ,
DTD AY,
PTIME,
SK228,
TFNH4,
DEATH,
RATIO,
KOREA,
SK210,
DEL02 ,
DUMMY,
RESP2,
WINDF
SR822
DERIV
FRPIP
RNUTR
r
t
9
1
9
TFPO4
DODEF
GRAZP
SK140
9
9
9
COMMON/EUTRO5/
SK16P,
SR11P,
SR1 33,
SR80P,
TNLIP,
SK180,
SR1 1 3 ,
SR134,
STP20,
XEMP1 ,
SK19P,
SR114,
SR15P,
SW1 6A ,
XEMP2,
SK19Z,
SR12P,
SR1 8P ,
TCHLA,
XEMP3,
SR10P,
SR1 2 3 ,
SR183,
TEMPI ,
XEMP4,
SR103
SR124
SR184
TEMP 2
ZRESP
9
9
9
9
9
SR104
SR13P
SR190
TEMP3
LIMIT
9
9
9
9
COMMON/EUTRO6/
CHLA1 X,
GPMDP2,
RLIGHT,
SK1213,
SK1814,
CHLA2X,
GZMDZ1 ,
RTOXG1 ,
SK1 3P1 ,
SK1913,
FXNAVG,
GZMDZ2,
RTOXG2 ,
SK13P2,
SK1918,
GITMAX,
HGRAZ E,
SEDSEG,
SK1314,
SR10PU,
GITMX1 ,
PNH3G1 ,
SEDVLS,
SK14P1 ,
SR103U,
GITMX2
9
GPMDP1
9
PLNH3G2 ,
SK1013
9
SK14P2,
SR1 1PU,
SK1 1 1 3
SK1516
SR1 1 3U
9
t
COMMON/EUTRO7/
SR1 2PU,
SR15PG,
SR53UN,
SR1 23U,
SR1615,
SR6PUN,
SR1 3NF,
SR18PU,
SR63UN,
SR13ON
SR183U,
SR7PUN,
SR13PU,
SR19PA,
SR73UN,
SR133U,
SR19PB,
SR8PUN,
SR1413,
SR5PUN ,
SR83UN,
337
-------
c
c
TCHLAX, TZOOPL, XDUM89, XDUM95, XEMPRC, ZGRAZE, ZRESP1,
ZRESP2, BOTBOD, DEPTHM, WINDSG, VELSGM, TRANDP,
TEMPSG, SR1821, SK2118, SK1921, PSEDIM,
BSEDIM, AVDEPE, AVVELE, CPOREA, EXPRED, EXPREV
LOGICAL SEDSEG, SW1 6A
REAL AVDEPE,AVVELE,CFOREA,
EXPRED, EXPREV,KOREA,REAK,
DIP,TRANDP,WINDF
REAL NH3,NO3,LIMIT,No2,K2013C,K2013T,NOTLIM,K1320C,K1320T
,K2014C,K2014T
REAL K1C,K1T,LGHTSW,IS1 ,KMNG1 ,KMPG1 ,KMSI,K1RC,K1RT,K1D,KMPHYT
,NCRB,K2C/K2T,IS2,KMNG2,KMPG2,K2RC,K2RT,K2D,KMCG,KMAZP1,K3RC
,K3RT,K3D/K4RC,K4RT,K4D,K58C,K58T,K68C,K68T,K78C,K78T,K1013C
,K1013T,K1113C,K1113T,K1213C,K1213T,K1 314C,K1314T,KNIT
,K140C,K140T,KN03,K1516C,K1516T,KDC,KDT,KBOD,ITOT,NITFIX
,KCLTX1,KCLTX2
REAL KPZDC,KPZDT,KOPDC,KOPDT,KONDC,KONDT,KUSDC,KUSDT,KDSC,KDST
REAL KE(5),TEMP(4),DEPTH(SG),TYPEE(SG),BOTSG(SG),VELSG(SG)
,TMPSG(SG),KESG(SG),RLGHTS(SG,2),EDIF(SG),SOD1D(SG),FPIPWC(SG)
,FNH4(SG),FPO4(SG)
REAL KESHD,IAV,IMAX,IO,KA,K20
REAL BCT(MP)
EQUIVALENCE (CONST(1 )
, (CONST(4),PHIMX )
, (CONST(7),IS1 )
EQUIVALENCE
(CONSTd 0) ,K1RC )
, (CONSTd 3),KMPHYT)
, (CONSTd 6) ,OCRB )
, (CONSTd 9 ),FPIPSL)
, (CONST(22),FSON )
, (CONST(25),K1013C)
EQUIVALENCE
(CONST(28),K1320T)
, (CONST(31),KNIT )
, (CONST(34),KDT )
, (CONST(37),SVPN )
, (CONST(40),SCOUR )
, (CONST(43),KOPDC )
, (CONST(46),KONDT )
,K1C) , (CONST(2),K1T) , (CONST(3),LGHTSW)
, (CONST(5),XKC ) , (CONST(6),CCHL )
, (CONST(8),KMNG1 ) , (CONST(9),KMPG1 )
(CONSTd 1) ,K1RT )
(CONST(14),PCRB )
(CONSTd 7 ),NUTLIM)
( CONST ( 20 ),FSOP )
(CONST{23) ,K58C )
(CONST(26),K1013T)
(CONST(29) ,K2014C)
(CONST(32) ,KBOD )
(CONST(35) ,SVP1 )
( CONST ( 38 ),SVBOD )
(CONST(41) ,KPZDC )
(CONST ( 44 ),KOPDT )
(CONST(47) ,KDSC )
, (CONSTd 2) ,K1D )
, (CONSTd 5 ),NCRB )
, (CONSTd 8), FPIPWX)
, (CONST(21),FSIP )
, (CONST(24) ,K58T )
, (CONST(27),K1320C)
, (CONST(30) ,K2014T)
, (CONST(33),KDC )
, (CONST(36) ,SVPP )
, ( CONST ( 39 ) ,SEDVEL)
, (CONST (4 2) ,KPZDT )
, ( CONST ( 45 ),KONDC )
, (CONST(48) ,KDST )
338
-------
c
c
EQUIVALENCE
(CONST(49). ,KMCG
, (CONST(52),AZP1
, (CONST(55) ,K3RT
EQUIVALENCE
(CONST(59)
EQUIVALENCE
(PARAM(1 ,1 )
. , (PARAMd ,3)
, ,{PARAM(1 ,5)
. , (PARAMd ,9)
EQUIVALENCE
(PARAMd ,12), FNH4(1) )
(PARAM(1 ,14) ,RLGHTS)1 ,1 )) ,
NPSWK COVERED PARAM (1,16)
(CONST(50),CGC )
(CONST(53),KMAZP1)
(CONST(56),K3D )
(CONST(51)
(CONST(54)
(CONST(57)
,CGT
K3RC
SVZ1
(CONST(74) ,T16A) , (CONST(75) ,TIMCHK)
,DEPTH(1 ) )
,BOTSG(1) )
,TMPSG(1 ) )
,EDIF(1) )
( PARAM( 1,2) ,T YPEE( 1 ) )
(PARAM(1 ,4) ,VELSG(1) )
(PARAM(1 ,7),KESG(1) )
(PARAMd ,10),SOD1D(1) )
(PARAMd ,11) ,FPIPWC(1) ),
, (PARAMd ,13), FP04(D),
(PARAMd ,15) ,RLGHTS(1
THROUGH PARAM(SG,20)
2) )
339
-------
3.3.4.3 Subroutine Descriptions--
WASP3 is a modular program. Its many subroutines can be grouped
into the functional categories of "input," "process," "output," and
"utility," as in Figure 54. Data are shared among the subroutines
primarily through the WASP COMMON.
MAIN
The WASP3 main program is the control module. It assigns input and
output unit numbers, and operates the calling sequence for the input,
simulation, and output subroutines.
Input Subroutines
WASP1
WASP1 opens the input and output units, then reads Data Group A for
model identification and system bypass options. Information is printed and
values and arrays are initialized.
WASP2
WASP2 reads Data Group B for either bulk exchanges or sets of dispersion
coefficients, cross-sectional areas, and characteristic lengths. The latter
are converted to bulk exchanges, and information is stored in memory and
printed.
WASP 3
WASPS reads Data Group C for volumes. If indicated, volumes are read
from restart file "ICRD." Information is stored in memory and printed.
WASP4
WASP4 reads Data Group D for advective flows, which are converted to
internal units of million cubic feet per day. Information is stored in
memory and printed, if indicated, WAS4A is called to read flows from a
hydrodynamic file created by DYNHYD3.
WAS4A
If indicated, WAS4A opens the hydrodynamic file "SUMRY2.OUT" created by
DYNHYD3, and reads some basic hydrodynamic network information in either a
formatted or unformatted mode. WAS4A then reads the junction to segment
correspondence, sets the WASP time step, and prints information.
340
-------
WASP5
WASPS reads Data Group E for boundary concentrations for each" model
system. Information is stored in memory and printed.
WASPS
WASPS reads Data Group F for waste loads for each model system. Infor-
mation is stored in memory and printed.
WAS6A
If indicated, WAS6A opens the unformatted loading file "NPS.DAT" created
by a runoff model and stored in the sequence illustrated in Table 22. The
runoff day corresponding with the initial WASP simulation day is read. Input
segment numbers corresponding to each runoff load are read. Actual runoff
loads from the file are printed as specified. Finally, the file is posi-
tioned properly to begin the WASP simulation.
TABLE 22. CONTENTS OF "NPS.DAT"
Record
Number Contents of Record
1 NWKS, MDUM, MDUM, MDUM
2 ((NPSWK(I,J),1=1,NOSYS),J=1,NWKS)
3 ((NPSWK(I,J),1=1,NOSYS),J=1,NWKS)
N+1
Variable
NWKS
MDUM
NPSWK
NO SYS
I
J
N
( (NPSWK (I
Type
1*4
1*4
R*4
1*4
1*4
1*4
—
, J) ,1=1 ,NOSYS) ,J=1 ,NWKS)
Definition
The number of runoff loads
Dummy variable, not used
Runoff loads, averaged over day, in Ib/day
Number of water quality variables
Water quality variable counter
Runoff load counter
Number of days for which loads are
(or systems)
available
34-1
-------
WASP7
WASP7 reads Data Group G for parameters for each segment, it then reads
Data Group H for constants. Finally, it reads a specified number of kinetic
time functions. Information is stored in memory and printed.
WASP9
WASP9 reads Data Group J for initial concentrations in all segments for
each model system. Versions 2 and 3 of WASP expect the first data record to
be a descriptive "header" card, if not, WASP9 uses functions CHRDEC and
CHRDIG to convert the line to input concentrations expected by the original
WASP. If indicated, initial concentrations are read from restart file "ICRD."
Information is stored in memory and printed. WASP9 finally reads Data Group
K for maximum and minimum concentrations for each model system.
WAS10
WAS10 reads Data Group L for constant or variable print intervals.
Next, either eight system-segment pairs are read for intermediate printout
during the simulation, or a model system is read for a global mass balance
check. Information is stored and printed.
WAS1 1
WAS11 reads Data Group M for integration control information, including
the starting and ending time for the simulation, a series of time step sizes,
the negative solution option, and the advection factor, information is
stored in memory and printed.
Process Subroutines
Once input data groups A-M are read, control is passed to EULER to
perform the simulation.
EULER
EULER is the heart of the simulation, stepping through time performing
a first-order EULER integration. First, counters and time functions are
initialized to TZERO with help from subroutine TINIT. initial printouts are
set up with a call to WAS13, then initial mass derivatives are computed with
a call to DERIV. A fatal input error condition is checked for, then the
integration proceeds, time step by time step.
For each time step, EULER loops through each system and segment, com-
puting the new mass as follows:
new mass = old mass + mass derivative . time step
342
-------
Each new concentration is set to the new mass divided by the new volume, and
the mass derivative is reset to zero. If the negative solution option is
"0," any negative concentrations are replaced by one-half of the old mass
divided by the new volume. Next, EULER increments the time and adjusts the
new day counter if necessary. If it is the proper time, EULER calls WAS13 to
produce intermediate printouts and trigger storage of all display variables
(by returning IDISK = 1 ) . New mass derivatives are obtained with a call to
DERIV. Volumes are stored if IDISK = 1. The final task for each time step
is to check for a new time step and for the end of the simulation. New time
steps are periodically set by calling WAS14.
When the final time for the simulation is detected, EULER triggers a
final storage of display variables, then stores final volumes and concentra-
tions in file "RESTRT." Control is then passed back to MAIN.
DERIV
DERIV is called by EULER to calculate mass derivatives, it first checks
and obtains new flows and volumes from a hydrodynamic file by calling DHYD1
or DHYD2. It then obtains the kinetic derivative by calling WASPB. Finally,
it obtains the transport and loading derivatives by calling WAS12.
DHYD1 and DHYD2
One of these subroutines may be called by DERIV to obtain new hydro-
dynamic information from the hydrodynamic file "SUMRY2.OUT," created by
DYNHYD3. These subroutines are equivalent, except that DHYD1 reads an
unformatted file while DHYD2 reads a formatted file.
For the first time step, DHYDx reads the basic hydrogeometry and ini-
tializes its arrays. Hydrodynamic junction to water quality segment corre-
spondence is established, and flow directions are fixed. Upstream and sea-
ward boundaries are set up, and boundary concentrations are located for each.
The hydrodynamic file is positioned properly in time, and flows for the first
time step are printed.
For each time step throughout the simulation, DHYDx is called and reads •
new flows and volumes from SUMRY2.OUT. These are scaled and converted to
internal WASP3 units. New boundary flows are set up. If the end of the
hydrodynamic file is properly detected, it is reset to its beginning point,
and the simulation proceeds. If the file end is improperly detected in the
middle of a read, the simulation is aborted.
WAS1 2
WAS1 2 is called by DERIV to obtain the transport and loading derivatives.
Upon entry to WAS12, only the kinetic portion of the mass balance derivative
has been evaluated by WASPB. WAS12 calculates the mass derivatives due to
advective flow, dispersive exchange, point source waste loading, and runoff
343
-------
loading, and adds them to the kinetic derivative. WAS12 goes through the
following steps:
a. Using the IQ and JQ vectors as drivers, WAS1 2 computes advective
transport. Variable flows are updated by calling WASPS if necessary, and
volumes are adjusted for continuity. For each system, variable boundary
concentrations are updated by calling WAS8A if necessary. For each flow,
Q, proper upstream and downstream concentrations are assigned by calling
WA12A. The advected concentration CSTAR is determined, and mass derivatives
for the downstream and upstream segments are adjusted by + Q.CSTAR.
b. Using the IR and JR vectors as drivers, WAS12 computes dispersive
transport. Variable exchanges are updated by calling WASPS if necessary.
For each system and each exchange flow, R, proper upstream and downstream
concentrations Q.^ and C1 are assigned by calling WA12A. Mass derivatives
for the downstream and upstream segments are adjusted by _+ R . (C2-C-] ).
c. Using the IWK vector as a driver, WAS12 computes point source
loading. For each system, variable loadings are updated by calling WAS8A
if necessary. For each load L (in Ib/day), the mass derivative for the
affected segment is adjusted by + L/62.4.
d. Using the INPS vector as a driver, WAS12 computes diffuse source
loading if appropriate. New loads are read from file NPS.DAT at the beginn-
ing of each new day. For each load L' (in Ib/day), the mass derivative for
the affected segment is adjusted by + L'/62.4.
WA12A
WA1 2A is called by WAS1 2 to determine the proper upstream and downstream
concentrations C2 and C^ for advective flow from segment JQ to segment IQ or
dispersive exchange between segments JR and IR. For flows or exchanges with
a downstream boundary, the proper boundary concentration is located for C-|.
For flows or exchanges with an upstream boundary, the proper boundary concen-
tration is located for ۥ
WASPB
WASPB is the user-specified water quality subroutine that calculates the
kinetic mass derivative and stores the proper display variables for later
printout. WASPLB may call several other subroutines. These are discussed
below for eutrophication and toxic chemical subroutines.
WASPS
WASPS is called by WAS1 2 to update the piecewise linear functions of
time, if any, for exchange coefficients, advective flows, and kinetic time
functions. This means computing new slopes and intercepts, and setting a
variable to indicate the next simulation time that the functions are to be
31414
-------
updated. The following convention is used for the i^h update.
slope = f(t)i+1 _ f(t)j
intercept =
next update time =
WAS8A
WAS8A is used to update the piecewise linear functions of time, if any,
for boundary conditions and forcing functions. This means computing new
slopes and intercepts for any system or state variable that requires an
update, and setting a variable to indicate the next simulation time that the
piecewise linear functions are to be updated. The same conventions used in
WASPS are used in WAS8A for computing slopes and intercepts.
WAS1 3
WAS1 3 is called every print interval by EULER to print intermediate
concentrations or mass checks on a designated constituent. At this time, the
solution stability is checked by comparing the maximum concentrations speci-
fied by the user with calculated concentrations. If any concentrations
exceed the maximum, the simulation is aborted.
WAS14
WAS1 4 is called by EULER to adjust the integration step size (time step)
as specified by the user in Data Group M.
TIN IT
TINIT is called by EULER at the beginning of the simulation to adjust
time functions to the initial time TZERO. TINIT checks and adjusts time
functions for exchanges, flows, kinetic time functions, boundary concentra-
tions, and loads.
TOPT
TOPT can be called by the user WASPB subroutine to maximize the time
step subject to the flow and dispersion stability constraints. This should
reduce numerical dispersion, but is not unconditionally stable. The time
step calculated by TOPT is 0.5 days will fall between 0.01 and 0.5 days.
345
-------
Output Subroutines
Once the simulation is complete, control is passed to the output sub-
routines to print tables, time plots, and spatial plots.
WAS16
WAS16 reads Data Group N system by system to determine what tables the
user wants printed. Designated state variable concentrations and display
variables are retrieved from memory and printed at all print intervals covered
by the simulation. There is no limit to the number of tables that can be
specified. The total mass in each system is calculated and printed at each
print interval following the tables.
WAS17
WAS17 reads Data Group 0 system by system to determine what time plots
the user wants printed. Designated state variable concentrations and display
variables are retrieved from memory and plotted at all print intervals covered
by the simulation. There is no limit to the number of time plots that can be
specified.
WAS19 (including STR, PLOT, BLKPLN)
WAS19 reads Data Group P to determine what spatial plots the user wants
printed. Designated state variable concentrations and display variables are
retrieved from memory and plotted for all segments at designated times.'
Observed data can be read and included on the plots. There is no limit to
the number of spatial plots that can be specified.
FREQ (including ORDER)
FRBQ is called if the switch ISTAT is activated in the users WASPB
subroutine. The unformatted file "FREQ.TMP" must be produced by the WASPB
subroutine during the simulation. A set of three records should have been
stored at regular intervals throughout the simulation, as specified in Table
23. FREQ reads the detailed concentration time history for the two designated
segments, computes and prints descriptive statistics, then prepares and
prints cumulative probability tables.
Utility Subroutines
Several utility subroutines can be called to help perform routine tasks.
346
-------
TABLE 23. CONTENTS OF "FREQ.TMP*
Record
Number
1
2
3
•
•
•
•
Variable
TZERO
TIME
ICOUNT
JTR
JSTR
CCKK)
CC2(K)
TZERO,
ICOUNT
ICOUNT
Type
R*4
R*4
1*4
1*4
1*4
R*4
R*4
Contents of Record
TIME, ICOUNT, JTR, JSTR
, TIME, (CC1(K), K=1,4)
, TIME, (CC2(K), K=1,4)
Definition
Initial simulation time, days
Simulation time for this group of records, days
The sequence number for this group of records
The segment number for the first set of concen-
trations
The segment number for the second set of concen-
trations
Concentrations of four constituents in segment JTR
at this simulation time
Concentrations of four constituents in segment
JSTR at this simulation time.
BRKERR
BRKERR prints an error message to output file and screen concerning
the number of data points in a time function; the simulation is aborted.
CHRDEC
CHRDEC is a real function that converts a character string to its
real equivalent.
347
-------
CHRDIG
CHRDIG is an integer function that converts a character to its integer
equivalent.
FMTER
FMTER prints an error message to output file and screen concerning input
data formats; the simulation is aborted.
SCALP
SCALP multiplies a real vector by a scale factor.
SETCA
SETCA sets a character array to a specified character value.
SETIA
SETIA sets an integer array to a specified integer value.
SETRA
SETRA sets a real array to a specified real value.
SETXA
SETXA sets a double precision array to a specified double precision
value.
WERR
WERR writes error messages for improper segment designations and missing
boundary conditions; the simulation is aborted.
WMESS
WMESS prints a message when stability criteria are violated; the simula-
tion is aborted.
348
-------
Eutrophication Kinetic Subroutines
The WASP3 eutrophication kinetics are calculated through a special
WASPB subroutine structure, illustrated in Figure 55. These subroutines
combine biological and chemical constants with environmental parameters to
determine transformation rates among the eight eutrophication systems (state
variables). From these rates and the concentrations passed by WASP, kinetic
mass derivatives are calculated and passed back to WASP where they are inte-
grated along with the transport and loading derivatives every time step.
EU03IN
EUTRWASPB
EU03CMN
-|EU03S4|
- EU03S8
- EU03S3,
- EU03S7
-|EU03S1 |
-|EU03S2|
- EU03S5
- EU03S6
-|EU03K2|
-|EU03SX|
EU03DU
Figure 55. Eutrophication subroutine structure.
WASPB (EUTRWASPB)
EUTRWASPB serves as the main program for the kinetic portion of
EUTRWASP, calling other subroutines when appropriate. Initialization is
performed during the first time step by calling EU03IN. Kinetic time
functions are updated throughout the simulation. For each segment, ambient
concentrations and environmental conditions are determined, then mass
derivatives are obtained with successive calls to EU03S4, EU03S8, EU03S3,
34-9
-------
EU03S7, EU03S1, EU03S2, EU03S5, and EU03S6. At print intervals, state
variable and display variable concentrations are stored by calling EUO3DU.
Finally, EU03SX is called to calculate the exchange of dissolved phases
between water column and benthic segments and adjust the derivatives.
EU03IN
EU03IN is called during the first time step only to initialize para-
meters, counters, and functions for the simulation. For the phytoplankton
system, initial and boundary concentrations are converted from the input
units of ug-Chla/L to the internal units of mg-CRB/L. Sedimentation and
scour velocities are converted to ft/day, and water column-benthic exchange
coefficients are converted to bulk exchanges in internal units of MCF/day.
Finally, benthic fluxes of NH4 and P04 are converted to internal loadings in
mg/L . MCF/day.
EU03S4
EU03S4 calculates the phytoplankton kinetics, and is called first be-
cause it affects all the other systems. For water column segments, the
growth rate is first calculated. The maximum growth rate is adjusted for
temperature, then reduced according to ambient light conditions using either
the Dick Smith or DiToro formulation. Ammonia preference is calculated, then
the growth rate is further reduced if nitrogen or phosphorus is in limited
supply. Respiration, death, and settling rates are calculated, and, finally,
the mass derivative.
EU03S8
EU03S8 calculates the sources and sinks of organic phosphorus and
computes the mass derivative.
EU03S3
EU03S3 calculates the sources and sinks of inorganic phosphorus and
computes the mass derivative.
EU03S7
EU03S7 calculates the sources and sinks of organic nitrogen and computes
the mass derivative.
EU03S1
EU03S1 calculates the sources and sinks of ammonia nitrogen and
computes the mass derivative.
350
-------
EU03S2
EU03S2 calculates the sources and sinks of nitrite plus nitrate nitrogen
and computes the mass derivative.
EUO 3S5
EU03S5 calculates the sources and sinks of carbonaceous biochemical
oxygen demand and computes the mass derivative.
EU03S6
EU03S6 calculates the sources and sinks of dissolved oxygen and computes
the mass derivative. The reaeration rate is obtained for surface water
segments by calling EU03K2.
EU03K2
EU03K2 calculates the ambient reaeration rate based on temperature,
wind speed, water velocity, and water depth. The current-driven portion
of this rate is calculated using the Covar method, which chooses among
three formulas based upon velocity and depth. The oxygen saturation
level is finally calculated as a function of water temperature.
EU03DU
EU03DU is called every print interval to store state variable and dis-
play variable concentrations. First the display variables are calculated,
then the simulation time is stored in memory. Address counters for the
storage arrays are calculated, and four variables are stored in memory for
each system.
EU03SX
EU03SX calculates the dispersive exchange of dissolved phases between
water column and benthic segments, and adjusts the mass derivatives accord-
ingly. If no benthic segments are present, this calculation is skipped.
Finally, additional ammonium and phosphate fluxes as specified by the user
are added, and derivatives are adjusted.
Toxic Chemical Kinetic Subroutines
The WASP3 toxic chemical kinetics are calculated through a special
subroutine structure, illustrated in Figure 56. These subroutines combine
chemical and environmental parameters to produce first-order rate constants
and, from chemical concentrations passed by WASP, calculate kinetic
351
-------
derivatives. These derivatives are passed back to WASP where they are
integrated along with the transport and loading derivatives every time step.
TOXIWASPB
TOXCMN
TOXINIT
TOXIFORD
- TOXIVOLT
- TOXIREOX
- TOXIPHOT
TOXISEDW TOXIDU
TOXISETL
Figure 56. Toxics subroutine structure.
WASPB (TOXIWASPB)
TOXIWASPB serves as the main program for the kinetic portion of TOXIWASP,
calling other subroutines when appropriate, initialization is performed
during the first time step by calling TOXINIT. As the simulation progresses,
the proper time- and space-variable environmental and chemical characteris-
tics are calculated, then passed to TOXIFORD. Kinetic derivatives are calcu-
lated based on first-order rate constants returned from TOXIFORD. These
derivatives are then adjusted for settling, erosion, and percolation by
calling TOXISETL. Further adjustments in the derivatives due to pore water
mixing and sediment-water exchange are calculated by calling TOXISFJDW.
Variables are periodically dumped to a save file and intermediate parameters
and results are printed by calling TOXIDUMP. Finally, the time step is
optimized by calling TOPT, if the user chooses.
TOXINIT
TOXINIT is called during the first time step only to initialize para-
meters and functions for the chemical simulation. The top sediment layer for
the special print segment is identified. Effective partition coefficients
for each segment are calculated from either the organic carbon or octanol-
water partition coefficient, the spatially variable sediment organic carbon
fractions, and the target organism organic carbon content. For benthic
segments, the units of biomass are adjusted and porosity is calculated. The
352
-------
active bacterial population is calculated for all segments. Initial and
reference bed volumes are saved, values are initialized to 0, and CMAX(1) is
set to assure the first-order decay assumption. Finally, TOXINIT checks for
proper segment alignment, with assigned numbers increasing sequentially from
water surface to bottom benthic segments.
TOXIPORD
TOXIFORD, a modification of the EXAMS subroutine FIRORD, calculates
total first order chemical transformation rates for each segment as the
simulation progresses. The total first-order rate for each segment is the
summation of the transformation (including degradation or transfer) rates
due to five processes: hydrolysis, oxidation, bacterial degradation, volati-
lization, and photolysis. These individual rates are calculated from ambient
environmental and chemical characteristics passed from TOXIWASPB.
Whenever total rates are to be recalculated during a simulation, TOXI-
WASPB calls TOXIFORD once for each segment. TOXIFORD first calculates the
volatilization transfer rate of dissolved chemical from surface water seg-
ments by calling TOXIVOLT. Next, the photolysis rate constant is calculated
for water segments by calling TOXIPHOT. Then, for each species of the chemi-
cal (dissolved, sediment-sorbed, and biosorbed), first-order transformation
rates are calculated for photolysis, hydrolysis, oxidation, and bacterial
degradation. Finally these individual rates are summed to give a total
first-order chemical disappearance rate, which is passed back to TOXIWASPB.
TOXIVOLT
When called by TOXIFORD, TOXIVOLT computes the volatilization transfer
rate constant for a surface water segment using a two-film model of movement
of toxicant across the air-water interface. Liquid phase resistance is
computed from oxygen reaeration rates modified by the chemical molecular
weight. Gas phase resistance is computed from wind speed and Henry's Law
constant, which is supplied by the user or calculated from vapor pressure and
solubility data. The volatilization rate is computed from the air and water
phase resistances and the depth of the surface water segment.
TOXIPHOT
When called by TOXIFORD, TOXIPHOT computes the photolysis transformation
rate constant for a water segment. TOXIPHOT accepts a measured (clear day)
photolysis rate constant at a specified reference latitude as input data.
Next, this rate constant is corrected for the latitude, cloud cover, and
light extinction in the water column. The rate is further modified by a
time-varying input function to approximate seasonal changes in incident light
intensity.
353
-------
TOXIREOX
TOXIREOX is call by TOXIFORD for surface water segments to calculate
reaeration velocities. These are used in TOXIVOLT for calculating voleitili-
zation rates. For the first time step only, TOXIREOX calculates average
flow-induced reaeration rates by the Covar method (Covar, 1976) using average
segment velocities and depths. In subsequent time steps, TOXIREOX calculates
time-varying wind-induced reaeration rates. The reaeration rate returned to
TOXIFORD is either the flow-induced rate or the wind-induced rate, whichever
is larger. TOXIREOX is slightly modified from the HSPF subroutine OXREA.
TOXISETL
TOXISETL is called by TOXIWASPB for each segment and each time step to
calculate settling of chemical and suspended sediment from the water column,
erosion of chemical in the bed, and percolation of dissolved chemical verti-
cally through the bed. Concentration derivatives are adjusted within TOXI-
SETL. First, settling rates are calculated from spatially variable settling
velocities, segment depths, concentrations of sorbed chemical and suspended
sediment. Erosion is calculated from spatially variable yearly depletion
rates from the bed sediment surface, along with sediment density and sorbed
chemical concentration. Bed sediment segments are assumed to maintain their
physical characteristics, such as density, porosity, and organic content.
Vertical pore water percolation is calculated from spa-
tially variable vertical flow rates, along with porosity and dissolved con-
centrations. Positive flow is upward, and negative flow is downward. It
should be noted that downward percolation will eventually transport the
chemical out of the bottom benthic segment.
TOXISEDW
TOXISEDW is called by TOXIWASPB for surface benthic segments each time
step to calculate dispersive exchanges of chemical between the bed and the
water column. Concentration derivatives are adjusted within TOXISEDW. The
two mechanisms are pore water diffusion and local surface sediment equili-
bration with the water column. Pore water diffusion is calculated from
spatially variable diffusion coefficients, surface areas, characteristic
mixing lengths, and sediment porosity. Sorption-desorption of chemical
between overlying water and the benthic surface is calculated using sediment
turnover rates and chemical partition coefficients. Because local equili-
brium is assumed, sorption-desorption is controlled by the fraction of under-
lying sediment brought into contact with the overlying water per unit time.
This fraction is related to the pore water diffusion rate by a spatially
variable multiplier supplied by the user. For immobile, armored stream
reaches, the multiplier may be 0, whereas for reaches vigorously mixed by
physical or biological processes, the multiplier may be 1 , with high pore
water dispersion coefficients as well.
354
-------
TOXIDUMP
At specified intervals, TOXIWASPB calls TOXIDUMP to prepare or print
output from the simulation. Three kinds of output are handled. The first is
the standard WASP dump of select variables to a save file at fixed intervals.
Eight variables are dumped for "System 1": total chemical concentration
(mgc/Lip), dissolved chemical concentration (mgc/l^) , sediment-sorbed chemical
concentration (mgc/kgs), biosorbed chemical concentration (ugc/gb), chemical
fraction dissolved, chemical fraction sediment-sorbed, chemical mass in seg-
ment (kg), and chemical mass lost through volatilizatiog or burial (kg).
Eight more variables are dumped for "System 2": total sediment concentration
(rngs/I^), segment depth (ft), the total transformation rate (per day), the
photolysis rate, the hydrolysis rate, the biodegradation rate, the oxidation
rate, and the volatilization rate (all specific rates in units of per hour).
The second kind of output is event-triggered. When the total chemical
concentration exceeds a reference value at a selected segment, total chemical
concentrations are printed for every segment every 3 hours until the concen-
tration again falls below the reference.
The third kind of output is the dump of chemical and sediment concentra-
tions at a selected water segment (and its top benthic segment) to a save
file every 3 hours. This file is processed by TOXIPREQ after the simulation
to yield statistical information, including a cumulative frequency table.
Concentrations analyzed include total chemical, dissolved chemical, sediment-
sorbed chemical, and biosorbed chemical.
TOXIFREQ (now designated FREQ)
After completion of the simulation, TOXIFREQ processes a file of chemi-
cal concentrations at a water and a benthic segment, producing statistical
tables. A save file of concentrations written every 3 hours by TOXIDUMP is
first ordered by TOXIORDR. Next, the statistics are computed, including
minimum, maximum, and mean; various percentiles; standard deviation,- skew-
ness; and kurtosis. This table is printed, then a cumulative frequency table
is prepared, with concentrations corresponding to ascending even probability
values (0.0, 0.02, 0.04,..., 0.98, 1.00). This table is printed, and a plot
file is prepared.
3.3.4.4 Overlay Structure—
The size and structure of the WASP program mandated the use of an
overlay structure. The overlay procedure facilitated implementation on
the personal computer and small mainframe environment.
The purpose of the WASP overlay structure is to insert only the needed
portions of the model into memory during simulation, when code is no longer
needed, it will be replaced with new required code. Figures 57, 58, and 59
illustrate the overlay structure for WASP3, EUTRWASP, and TOXIWASP, respec-
tively, in a PC environment.
355
-------
MAIN WERR WMESS SETCA SETRA SETXA
SETIA SCALP FMTER BRKERR FILEOC
CHRDEC CHRDIG
EULER DERIV TOPT
WASPS WAS8A
-WASP1
-WASP2
-WASP3
-WASP4-WAS4A
-WASPS
-WASP6-WAS6A
-WASP7
-WASP9
-WAS1 0
-WAS1 1
-DHYD1
-DHYD2
-SWFLOW
-WAS1 2-WA1 2A
-TINIT
-WAS1 3
-WAS1 4
-WASPB
-WAS1 6
-WAS1 7
-WAS1 9
-PLOT
-BLKPLN
-STR
Figure 57. PC overlay structure for WASP3.
356
-------
MAIN WERR WMESS SETCA SETRA SETXA
SETIA SCALP FMTER BRKERR FILEOC
CHRDEC CHRDIG
EULER DERIV TOPT
WASPS WAS8A
-WASP1
-WASP 2
-WASP 3
-WASP4-WAS4A
-WASPS
-WASP6-WAS6A
-WASP7
-WASP9
-WAS1 0
-WAS1 1
-WAS1 6
-WAS1 7
-WAS1 9
-DHYD1
-DHYD2
-SWFLOW
-WAS1 2-WA1 2A
-TIN IT
-WAS1 3
-WAS1 4
-WASPB
*
-PLOT
-BLKPLN
-STR
-EU03IN
-EU03DU
-EU03SX
-EU03S1
-EU03S2
-EU03S3
-EU03S4
-EU03S5
-EU03S6-EU03K2
-EU03S7
-EUO 3S8
Figure 58. PC overlay structure for EUTRWASP.
357
-------
MAIN WERR WMESS SETCA SETRA SETXA
SETIA SCALP FMTER BRKERR FILEOC
CARDEC EHRDIG
EULER DERIV TOPT
WASPS WAS8A
-WASP1
-WASP2
-WASP3
-WASP4-WAS4A
-WASPS
-WASP6-WAS6A
-WASP7
-WASP9
-WAS1 0
-WAS1 1
*
-WAS1 6
-WAS1 7
-WAS1 9
-DHYD1
-DHYD2
-SWFLOW
-WAS1 2-WA1 2A
-TINIT
-WAS1 3
-WAS14
-WASPB
*
-PLOT
-BLKPLN
-STR
-INIT
-TOXIDU
-SETTLE
-SEDWAT
-FIRORD
-PHOT01
-VOLAT
-REDX
Figure 59. PC overlay structure for TOXIWASP.
358
-------
APPENDIX A
Symbols for Section 1 .2
A = cross-sectional area, ft2.
o
af = frictional acceleration, ft/sec .
a £ = gravitational acceleration, ft/sec .
A^ = regression coefficients for tidal heights, ft.
A = surface area, ft^.
a . = wind stress acceleration along axis of channel, ft/sec .
b = width, ft.
Cjj = drag coefficient (= 0.0026) , unitless.
g = acceleration of gravity = 32.2 ft/sec^.
H = water surface elevation, head, or height above an arbitrary
datum, ft.
i = channel or link number, unitless.
l^ = length of channel i, ft.
n = Manning roughness coefficient (usually between 0.01 and 0.10),
sec.m~1/3.
Q = flow,
R = hydraulic radius (approximately equal to the depth) , ft.
S = water surface slope, ft/ft.
t = time, hr or sec.
T = the boundary shear stress, Ib /ft-sec^.
U = velocity along the axis of channel, ft/sec.
U = the water velocity (magnitude = U, direction = 9), ft/sec.
359
-------
Ui = velocity in channel i, ft/sec.
U^ = the velocity in channel i at time t, ft/sec.
v = water volume, ft^.
Vf
W = the wind speed (relative to the moving water surface) measured
at a height of 1 0 meters above water surface, ft/sec.
observed wind velocity at a stationary location, ft/sec.
x = distance along axis of channel, ft.
y = tidal elevation above or below the model datum, ft.
y^ = mean depth of channel i, ft.
At = the time step, sec.
Ax^ = the channel length, ft.
p = the density of air, lbm/ft .
oj = tidal frequency, 2tf/ tidal period, hr~1 .
360
-------
APPENDIX B
Symbols for Section 1.3
A = cross-sectional area, L2.
C = concentration of the water quality constituent, ML~^.
Ex,Ey,Ez = longitudinal, lateral, and vertical diffusion coefficients,
L = length units.
i = length of the segment, L.
M = mass units.
Q = volumetric flow = A . U . L3T~1 .
X
Qji = flow, defined as positive when leaving segment j , and negative
when entering j,
R = dispersive flow = E.A,
X,
SB = boundary loading rate (including upstream, downstream, benthic,
and atmospheric) , ML~^T~1 .
SK = total kinetic transformation rate; positive is source, negative
is sink, ML~^T~^ .
S, = direct and diffuse loading rate, ML T~1 .
S™ = total source/sink rate = SL + SB + SK, ML^T"1 .
T = time units.
t = time, T.
U ,U ,U = longitudinal, lateral, and vertical advective velocities, LT~1 .
x y z
V. = volume of segment j = A- . JL , L^.
W. = point and diffuse loads = V-S, • , MT~1 .
D J -ijj
361
-------
At = the time step, typical between 15 minutes and a half day, T.
v = numerical weighting factor between 0 and 1, unitless.
362
-------
APPENDIX C
Symbols for Section 1.4
A.. = cross-sectional area between segments i and j, ft2.
aNQ = nitrogen to carbon ratio, mg N/mg C.
a,*/} c = oxygen to carbon ratio for nitrate uptake, mg C>2/mg C.
3
aoc = the oxygen to carbon ratio, mg 02/mg C.
aQN = oxygen to nitrogen ratio, mg (>2/mg N.
ap£ = phosphorus to carbon ratio, mg P/mg C.
bl «• benthic layer, unitless.
BODU5 = ratio of the ultimate to 5-day carbonaceous biochemical
oxygen demand, unitless.
= the internally computed 5-day CBOD, mg/L.
= constituent concentration advected between i and j, mg/L.
CJ = concentration of the water quality constituent in segment
j, mg/L.
Cl = chlorides concentration, mg/L.
Cpi,Cpj = the particulate material concentrations in the benthic
layer and water column respectively, mg/L.
= concentration of phosphorus sorbed to suspended solids,
mgP/Kg SS.
cwi'('wi = **ie dissolved concentrations in the benthic interstitial
waters and overlying water column respectively, mg/L.
DIP, DIN = available nutrients for growth, dissolved inorganic
phosphorus (orthophosphate) and dissolved inorganic
nitrogen (ammonia plus nitrate), mg/L.
363
-------
DIP1
D0sat
Eij
f
fDIP
fDOP
fNH
the new dissolved inorganic phosphorus resulting from the
previous integration step, mg/L.
dissolved oxygen saturation, mg C>2/1 .
death rate, day'1.
the natural logarithm = 2.71828, unitless.
the diffusive exchange rate between dissolved concentrations
in the interstitial water and the overlying water column,
f t2/day.
r\
diffusive exchange coefficient, cm /day.
dispersion coefficient between segments i and j, m
fraction of daylight, unitless.
the dissolved inorganic phosphorus pool, unitless.
the dissolved organic phosphorus pool, unitless.
the ammonia nitrogen pool, unitless.
pOP
pwc
G(N)
1max
H
(or d in
Figures)
the organic nitrogen pool, unitless.
the fraction of the total inorganic phosphorus assigned to
the sorbed or particulate phase, unitless.
the particulate organic phosphorus pool, unitless.
fraction particulate inorganic phosphorus, unitless.
the light attenuation factor given by G(I) = g(I,f ,H,ke),.
unitless.
the nutrient limitation factor given by G(N) =
g(DIP,DIN), unitless.
specific phytoplankton growth rate, day" .
maximum Specific Growth Rate @ 20°C, day"1.
the total water column depth, ft.
benthic layer depth, ft.
depth of the j segment, ft.
364
-------
I = incident solar radiation, ly/day.
Ia = the average daily solar radiation, ly/day.
Io = the incident light intensity at the surface, ly/day.
Io(t) = instantaneous surfae solar radiation, ly/day.
k = reaeration rate @ 20°C, day"1.
3.
K-j = reaeration rate coefficient at 20°C, day.
aJ
K=-i(T) = reaeration rate coefficient at ambient segment temperature,
D day-1.
KBOD = half saturation constant for oxygen limitation, mg O2/L.
Kc = phytoplankton self-light attenuation; the extinction
coefficient per unit of chlorophyll, m^/mg chlorophyll-a.
kd = deoxygenation rate @ 20°C, day"1.
kjjg = organic carbon (as CBOD) decomposition rate, day" .
K = extinction or light attenuation coefficient, ft"1 .
G
K@ = the total extinction coefficient, computed from the sum
of the non-algal light attenuation, K , and the self-
shading attenuation due to ambient phytoplankton population,
ft-1.
= half saturation constant for nitrogen, yg N/1 .
= half saturation constant for phosphorus, pg p/1 .
= half saturation constant for phytoplankton limitation,
mg C/£ .
= half saturation constant for oxygen limitation, mg
= Michaelis constant for denitrification, mg 02/& •
k_ND = organic nitrogen decomposition rate, day"1.
k_,kw = first order reaction rates associated with the particulate
and dissolved phases respectively, day"1.
Kpjp = partition coefficient for particulate phosphorus, mgP/Kg SS.
kpzD = anaerobic algal decomposition rate, day"1.
365
-------
k_.. = the effective algal settling or loss rate, day~1.
s i j
kiD = a non-predatory death rate, representing the effect of
parasitization, day~1.
k1R = algal endogenous respiration, day" .
k1R(T) = the algal respiration rate at 20°C, the temperature at
which the field samples were incubated, day"1.
k1R(20°) = the endogenous respiration rate at 20°C, day"1.
k58 = dissolved organic phosphorus mineralization at 20°C, day"1.
= particulate organic phosphorus mineralization rate at
20°C, day-1.
= denitrification rate § 20°C, day""1.
= organic nitrogen mineralization rate @ 20°C, day"1.
*1314 = nitrification rate § 20°C, day"1.
Jlji = characteristic mixing length between segments i and j, ft.
Pc = the phytopiankton biomass in carbon units, mg/L.
PIP1 = the sorbed inorganic phosphorus resulting from the previous
integration step, mg/L.
Pj = phytoplankton population, cells/A .
Qji = advective flow between segments i and j, defined as
positive when leaving segment j, and negative when
entering, ft3/hr.
R.. = dispersive flow between segments i and j, ft3/hr.
S = concentration of suspended solids, Kg/L.
= kinetic transformations within segment j, mg/L/day.
S-jj = reaction term, cells/i.day.
t = time, hr.
T = ambient water temperature, °C.
TIP = the total inorganic phosphorus, mg/L.
vs = the net settling velocity of particulates across the
water column-benthic interface, ft/day.
366
-------
vs
-------
APPENDIX D
Symbols for Section 1 .5
A = pre-exponential, or "frequency factor", unitless.
A. . = benthic surface area, L .
A.• = cross-sectional area between segments i and j, L2.
n
A = surface area of water segment, L .
BJ = concentration of biomass in segment j, kg-biomass/L.
B" = concentration of biomass in water in segment j.
BJ = Bj/n-j, kgb/Lw.
bl = benthic layer, unitless.
C = chemical concentration, ML~3.
c = subscript for chemical, unitless.
= concentration of biosorbed chemical in segment j, mgc/L.
= concentration of biosorbed chemical in biota in segment j,
clij = Cbj/Bj ' mgc/kgb.
CG = cloud cover, tenths of sky (1-10).
C. • = constituent concentration advected between i and j, ML"3.
C-j = concentration of total chemical in segment j, mgc/L.
<'PO4 = dissolved inorganic phosphorus concentration, yg/L.
C1 = sorbed chemical concentration, MM~1 ,. ..
Cs-j = concentration of sorbed chemical in segment j, mgc/L.
Cg.; = concentration of sorbed chemical on sediment in
segment j. Cgj = CSj/Sj , mgc/kgs.
C1 = dissolved chemical concentratin, ML . .
368
-------
GWJ = concentration of dissolved chemical in segment j , mgc/L.
CJfi = concentration of dissolved chemical in water in segment j
cwj = cwj/nj' mgc/L,,.
D = average depth of the water segment, m.
d = optical path, cm/cm.
dp = particle diameter, mm.
Ea = Arrhenius activation energy, kcal/mole.
K- _ = diffusive exchange coefficient, cm /sec.
Eji = dispersion coefficient between segments i and j, such as
cm^/sec, m^/hr, or
= the intensity of environmental property affecting process
"k" , such as light intensity or bacterial population.
fB = fraction of population actively degrading organic
compound, unitless.
^ocB = organic carbon fraction of biomass, unitless.
focs = organic carbon fraction of sediment, unitless.
frfcl = fraction particulate in the sediment layer, unitless.
fip = the spatially variable proportionality constant between pore
water dispersion and sediment mixing (0-1), unitless.
g = acceleration of gravity = 981 cm/sec2.
H = Henry's Law constant, atm-m^/mole.
h = benthic layer depth, ft.
i = benthic segment, unitless.
I , = average light intensity of wavelength k, E/cm^-sec.
I = average light intensity within water segment, E/cm^-sec.
I = surface light intensity, E/cm^-sec.
j = water segment, unitless.
^a'^b = specific acid and base catalyzed rate constants, respectively/
molar"1 . hr~1 .
369
-------
ka^ = specific sunlight absorption rate for phase i, E/mole-hr
or (E/L)/(mole/L)/hr.
KQ^ = net biodegradation rate constant in benthic segment, hr™1.
KB = net biodegradation rate constant in water segment, hr"1.
k, = desorption rate constant, hr~1 .
Ke = spatially variable light extinction coefficient, m~1.
K,, = net hydrolysis rate constant, hr~1 .
kp = second order biodegradation rate constant for phase i
in benthic segments, ml/cell-hr.
kg = second order biodegradation rate constant for phase i
in water segments, ml/cell-hr.
k^ = second order oxidation rate constant for chemical phase i,
L/mole-hr.
k^ = secnd-order rate constant for process k.
k = neutral rate constant, hr~1 .
K = net oxidation rate constant, hr"1.
KQC = organic carbon partition coefficient, (l^/kg^).
= organic phospho'rus decomposition rate, day" .
= temperature corrected reaeration velocity, m/hr.
Kpg = partition coefficient of chemical on biomass, I^/kgb.
KpQ = first order photolysis rate coefficient at reference light
intensity, hr~1.
Kps = partition coefficient of chemical on sediment in segment j,
K = net volatilization rate constant, hr .
kv = conductivity of the chemical through the water segment,
m/hr.
= reaeration velocity at 20°C, m/hr.
[L] = fraction of reference light IG in segment (Ijn/Ic)' unitless.
Lc = latitude correction factor, calculated internally, unitless,
370
-------
A.J_J = characteristic mixing length between segments i and j, ft.
MW = molecular weight of the compound, g/mole.
n.. = average porosity o segments i and j, L:L. L .
In
nj = porosity or volume water per volume segment j ,
p = sediment wet weight to dry weight ratio, M (sediment +
water), M~1 (sediment).
= bacterial population density in segment, cell/ml.
P^ = transformation product for process k, unitless.
Q-ji = advective flow between segments i and j , defined as
positive when leaving segment j , and negative when
entering, L^T""1 .
Q . = pore water flow generated by sediment compaction, L^T~1 .
Q = pore water flow from compaction, L^T~1 .
Qips = "Q-10" temperature correction factor for biodegradation
in benthic segments, unitless.
QTw = "Q-10" temperature correction factor for biodegradation
in water, unitless.
R = ideal gas constant = 8.206 x 10"^ m3-atm/mol°K.
RQ.. = pore water diffusive exchange flow, L T~ .
RQ = gas phase resistance, hr/m.
R. . = dispersive flow between segments i and j, L T~1 .
RL = liquid phase resistance, hr/m.
[RC^l = molar concentration of oxidant, moles/L.
S = sediment concentration, ML~3.
s = subscript for sediment, unitless.
S? = sediment concentration per unit pore water, ML~ .
Sj = concentration of sediment in segment j , kgs/L.
S = concentration of sediment in segment j , mgs/L.
371
-------
Sj = concentration of sediment in water in segment j,
Sj = Sj/n-j,
S,. = kinetic transformations within segment j , ML~^T~1 .
T = ambient temperature in segment, °C.
t = time, T.
T. . = sediment turnover rate, MT~1 .
t., = average tortuosity of benthic segments i and j , L . L~1
ij Welter
t.. = average tortuosity of segments i and j, L fc L~1 .
Tfc = water temperature, °K.
V = volume of the water segment, m3.
V = average segment velocity, ft/sec.
V- = volume of segment j, L .
Vs = Stokes velocity for particle with diameter dp and density
pp, m/day.
W = wind speed at 10 cm above surface, m/sec.
W =5 time-varying windspeed at 1 0 cm above surface, m/sec.
WAT = water vapor exchange velocity, m/hr.
Wfi. = boundary loads into segment j , MT .
we = water column subscript, unitless.
W-. = deposition velocity, LT .
WT • = point and diffuse loads into segment j , MT~1 .
VJ
w0 = scour velocity, LT~1 .
t\
wsedij = sediment velocity in bed, positive leaving j, negative
entering j, LT~1 .
wgij = settling velocity in water, positive leaving j, negative
entering j, LT~1 .
Wz = wind speed at height z, m/sec.
Yfc = yield coefficient for process k, unitless.
372
-------
z = measurement height, m.
a^ = fraction of chemical in phase i, unities.
Op = probability of deposition upon contact with the bed,
unitless.
a.j = dissolved fraction of the chemical, unitless.
a1fa2,oi2 = fraction of chemical in each phase, unitless.
£fc = molar absorptivity of wavelength k, m 10-L/cm . mole.
eOPD = temperature coefficient, unitless.
P = absolute viscosity of water = 0.01 poise (g/cm2-sec)
at 20°C.
v = numerical weighting factor, 0-0.5, unitless.
PB = bulk density, kg (sediment and water)/L.
Ps = sediment density * 2.7 kg/Ls.
Pw = water density a 1 kg (water)/Lw.
<|>£ = reaction yield fraction for chemical in phase i, unitless,.
373
-------
REFERENCES
Alexander, M. 1980. Biodegradation of Toxic Chemicals in Water and Soil.
In: Dynamics, Exposure, and Hazard Assessment of Toxic Chemicals, R.
Hague, editor. Ann Arbor Science, Ann Arbor, MI.
Ambrose, R.B. 1986. Modeling Volatile Organics in the Delaware Estuary.
U.S. EPA, Athens, GA. Submitted to JEED, American Society of Civil
Engineers.
Athonisen, A.C., et al., 1976. Inhibition of Nitrification by Ammonia and
Nitrous Acid. Journal Water Pollution Control Federation, Vol. 48.
No. 5. pp. 835-852.
Banks, R.B. and F.F. Herrera. 1977. Effect of Wind and Rain on Surface
Reaeration. Journal of the Envir. Engr. Div., ASCE, Vol. 103, No. EE3,
Proc. Paper 13013, pp. 489-504.
Bannister, T.T. 1974a. Production Equations in Terms of Chlorophyll Concen-
tration, Quantum Yield, and Upper Limit to Production. Limnol. Oceanogr.
19:1-12.
Bannister, T.T. 1974b. A General Theory of Steady State Phytoplankton Growth
in a Nutrient Saturated Mixed Layer. Limnol. Oceanogr. 19:13-30.
Bella, D.A. and W.J. Grenney. 1970. Finite-Difference Convection Errors.
Journal of the Sanitary Engineering Division, ASCE, Vol. 96, No. SA6,
pp. 1361-1375.
Berner, R.A. 1974. Kinetic Models for the Early Digenesis of Nitrogen
Sulfur, Phosphorus, and Silicon in Anoxic Marine Sediments. In: The
Sea, Vol. 5, ed. E.D. Goldberg. J. Wiley and Sons. New York.
Bowie, G.L., W.B. Mills, D.B. Porcella, C.L. Campbell, J.R. Pagenkopf, G.L.
Rupp, K.M. Johnson, P.W.H. Chan, S.A. Gherini and C.E. Chamberlin. 1985.
Rates, Constants, and Kinetics Formulations in Surface Water Quality
Modeling. Second Edition. U.S. EPA, Athens, GA. EPA-600/3-85-040.
Burns, L.A., D.M. Cline, and R.R. Lassiter. 1982. Exposure Analysis Modell-
ing System (EXAMS): User Manual and System Documentation, U.S. EPA,
Athens, GA. EPA-600/3-82-023.
Covar, A.P. 1976. Selecting the Proper Reaeration Coefficient for Use in
Water Quality Models. Presented at the U.S. EPA Conference on Env.
Simulation and Modelling.
Delos, C.G. , W.L. Richardson, J.V. DePinto, R.B. Ambrose, p.W. Rodgers, K.
Rygwelski, J.P. St. John, W.L. Shaughnessy, T.A. Faha, and W.N. Christie.
1984. Technical Guidance Manual for Performing Waste Load Allocations,
Book II. Streams and Rivers, Chapter 3, Toxic Substances. U.S. EPA,
Washington, DC. EPA-440/4-84-022.
374
-------
Di Toro, D.M., D.J. O'Connor, and R.v. Thomann. 1971. A Dynamic Model of the
Phytoplankton Population in the Sacramento San Joaquin Delta. Adv. Chem.
Ser. 106, Am. Chem. Soc. , Washington, DC., pp. 131-180.
Di Toro, D.M. and J.P. Connolly. 1980. Mathematical Models of Water Quality
in Large Lakes, Part 2: Lake Erie. EPA-600/3-80-065. pp. 90-101.
Di Toro, D.M. and W.F. Matystik. 1980. Mathematical Models of Water Quality
in Large Lakes, Part 1: Lake Huron and Saginaw Bay. EPA-600/3-80-056.
pp. 28-30.
Di Toro, D.M., J.J. Fitzpatrick, and R.V. Thomann. 1981, rev. 1983. Water
Quality Analysis Simulation Program (WASP) and Model Verification Program
(MVP) - Documentation. Hydroscience, Inc., Westwood, NY, for U.S. EPA,
Duluth, MN, Contract No. 68-01-3872.
Eppley, R.W. and P.R. Sloane. 1966. Growth Rates of Marine Phytoplankton:
Correlation with Light Absorption by Cell Chlorophyll-a. Physiol. Plant.
19:47-59.
Feigner and Harris. 1970. Documentation Report — FWQA Dynamic Estuary
Model. U.S. Department of the interior, Federal Water Quality Adminis-
tration.
Felmy, A.R., D.C. Girvin, and E.A. Jenne. 1984. Minteq - A Computer Program
for Calculating Aqueous Geochemical Equilibria. For U.S. EPA, Athens GA,
Contract GB-03-3089.
Foree, E.G. and P.L. McCarty. 1970. Anaerobic Decomposition of Algae.
Environ. Sci. & Technol. 4(10), pp. 842-849.
Hendry, G.S. 1977. Relationships Between Bacterial Levels and Other Charac-
teristics of Recreational Lakes in the District of Muskoka. Interim
Microbiology Report, Laboratory Services Branch, Ontario Ministry of the
Environment.
Henrici, Arthur T., 1938. Seasonal Fluctuation of Lake Bacteria in Relation
to Plankton Production. J. Bacteriol., 35:129-139.
Herbes, S.E. and L.R. Schwall. 1978. Microbial Transformation of Polycyclic
Aromatic Hydrocarbons in Pristine and Petroleum-Contaminated Sediments.
Appl. and Environ. Microbiology, Volume 35, No. 2. pp. 306-316.
Hutchinson, G.E. 1967. A Treatise on Limnology. Vol. II. Introduction to
Lake Biology and Limnoplankton. Wiley. New York. pp. 306-354.
Hyer, P.V., C.S. Fang, E.P. Ruzecki, andW.J. Hargis. 1971. Hydrography
and Hydrodynamics of Virginia Estuaries, Studies of the Distribution of
Salinity and Dissolved Oxygen in the Upper York System. Virginia
Institute of Marine Science.
375
-------
Jewell, W.J. And P.L. McCarty. 1971. Aerobic Decomposition of Algae.
Environ. Sci. Technol. 1971. 5(10). p. 1023.
JRB, Inc. 1984. Development of Heavy Metal Waste Load Allocations for the
Deep River, North Carolina. JRB Associates, McLean, VA, for U.S. EPA
Office of Water Enforcement and Permits, Washington, DC.
Karickhoff, S.W., D.S. Brown, and T.A. Scott. 1979. Sorption of Hydrophobic
Pollutants on Natural Sediments. Water Res. 13:241-248.
Karickhoff, S.W. and K.R. Morris. 1985. Sorption Dynamics of Hydrophobic
Pollutants in Sediment Suspensions. Environ. Toxicology and Chem.
4:469-479.
Kok, B. 1960. Efficiency of Photosynthesis. in: W. Ruhland (Edison),
Hanbuch der Pfanzenphysiologie. Vol 5, Part 1. Springer, Berlin, pp.
563-633.
Larson, R.J. G.G. Clinckemaillie, and L. VanBelle. 1981. Effect of Temper-
ature and Dissolved Oxygen on Biodegradation of Nitrilotriacetate.
Water Research, Volume 15. pp. 615-620.
Liss, P.S. 1973. Deep-Sea Research. Volume 20. pp. 221-238.
Lowe, W.E. 1976. Canada Centre for Inland Waters 867 Lakeshore Road, Bur-
lington, Canada L7R 4A6. Personal communication.
Lund, J.W.G. 1965. The Ecology of the Freswhater Phytoplankton. Biol. Rev.
40. 231-293.
Mabey, W.R., J.H. Smith, R.T. Podell, H.L. Johnson, T. Mill, T.-W. Chou,
J. Gates, I.W. Partridge, H. Jaber, and D. Vandenberg. 1982. Aqucitic
Fate Process Data for Organic Priority Pollutants. SRI International.
EPA 440/4-81-014.
Mackay, D. and P.J. Leinonen. 1975. Rate of Evaporation of Low-Solubility
Contaminants from Water Bodies to Atmospheres. Environ. Sci. Technology.
7:611-614.
Manhattan College Course. Notes for Summer Institute in Water Pollution.
1977.
Menon, A.S., W.A. Gloschenko, and N.M. Burns. 1972. Bacteria-phytoplankton
Relationships in Lake Erie. Proc. 15th Conf. Great Lakes Res. 1972:
94:101. Inter. Assoc. Great Lakes Res.
Mill, T., W.R. Mabey, P.C. Bomberger, T.W. Chou, D.G. Herdry, and J.H. Smith.
1982. Laboratory Protocols for Evaluating the Fate of Organic Chemicals
in Air and Water. U.S. EPA. Athens, GA. EPA-600/3-82-0220.
Miller, G.C. and R.G. Zepp. 1979. Effects of Suspended Sediments on
Photolysis Rates of Dissolved Pollutants. Water Research 13:453-459.
376
-------
Mills, W.B., D.B. Porcella, M.J. Ungs, S.A. Gherini, K.V. Summers, Lingfung
Mok, G.L. Rupp, G.L. Bowie, and D.A. Haith. 1985. Water Quality Assess-
ment: A Screening Procedure for Toxic and Conventional Pollutants, Parts
1 and 2. EPA-600/6-85-002a and b.
Nriagu, J.O. 1972. Stability of vivianite and Ion-Pair Formation in the
System Fe,(PO4)p-H^P04HpO. Geochim. Cosmochim Acta. 36. p. 459.
O'Connor. D.J. and R.V. Thomann. 1972. Water Quality Models: Chemical,
Physical and Biological Constituents. In: Estuarine Modeling: An
Assessment. EPA Water Pollution Control Research Series 16070 DZV,
Section 702/71. pp. 102-169.
O'Connor, D.J. , J.A. Mueller, and K.J. Farley. 1983. Distribution of Kepone
in the James River Estuary. Journal of the Environmental Engineering
Division, ASCE. 1 09(EE2):396-41 3.
Paris, D.F., W.C. Steen, G.L. Baughman and J.T. Barnett, Jr. 1981. Second-
Order Model to Predict Microbial Degradation of Organic Compounds in
Natural Waters. Applied and Environmental Microbiology. 4(3):603-609.
Rao, S.S. 1976. Observations on Bacteriological Conditions in the Upper
Great Lakes. 1968-1974. Scientific Series. No. 64. Inland Waters
Directorate CCIW Branch, Burlington, Ontario.
Rao, P.S.C. and J.M. Davidson. 1980. Estimation of Pesticide Retention and
Transformation Parameters Required in Nonpoint Source Pollution Models.
Environmental Impact of Nonpoint Source Pollution. Ann Arbor Science,
Ann Arbor, MI. pp. 23-67.
Raymont, J.E.G. 1963. Plankton and Productivity in the Oceans, pp. 93-466.
Pergamon. New York.
Rhee, G.Y. 1973. A Continuous Culture Study of Phosphate Uptake, Growth
Rate, and Polyphosphates in Scenedemus sp. Journal Phycol. 9:495-506.
Riley, G.A., H. Stommel and D.F. Bumpus. 1949. Quantitative Ecology of the
Plankton of the Western North Atlantic. Bull. Bingham Oceanog. Coll.
12(3) :1-169.
Roesch, S.E., L.J. Clark, and M.M. Bray. 1979. User's Manual for the
Dynamic (Potomac) Estuary Model. U.S. EPA. Annapolis, MD. EPA-903/9-79-
001 .
Smith, J.H., W.R. Mabey, N. Bohonos, B.R. Hoh, S.S. Lee, T.W. Chou, D.C.
Bomberger and T. Mill. 1977. Environmental Pathways of Selected Chemi-
cals in Freshwater Systems. Part I: Background and Experimental Proce-
dures. U.S. EPA. Athens, GA. EPA-600/7-77-113.
Smith, R.A. 1980a. The Theoretical Basis for Estimating Phytoplankton
Production and Specific Growth Rate from Chlorophyll, Light and Tempera-
ture Da,ta. Ecological Modeling. 10. pp. 243-264.
377
-------
Smith, R.A. I980b. Private Communication of correlation functions for
nitrite + nitrate and inorganic sediment in letter to S. Freudberg,
Metropolitan Washington Council of Governments, December 30, 1980.
Steele, J.H. 1962. Environmental Control of Photosynthesis in the Sea.
Limnol. Oceanogr. 7:137-150.
Strickland, J.D.H. 1965. Chemical Oceanography, Production of organic
Matter in the Primary Stages of the Marine Food Chain. Vol. 1. p. 503.
J.P. Riley and G. Skivow, eds. Academic, New York.
Thomann, R.V. 1975. Mathematical Modeling of Phytoplankton in Lake Ontario,
1. Model Development and Verification. U.S. EPA, Corvallis, OR.
EPA-600/3-75-005.
Thomann, R.V., R.P. Winfield, D.M. DiToro, and D.J. O'Connor. 1976. Mathe-
matical Modeling of Phytoplankton in Lake Ontario, 2. Simulations Using
LAKE 1 Model. U.S. Environmental Protection Agency, Grosse lie, MI,
EPA-600/3-76-065.
Thomann, R.V., R.P. Winfield, and J.J. Segna. 1979. Verification Analysis
of Lake Ontario and Rochester Embayment Three Dimentional Eutrophication
Models. U.S. EPA, Grosse lie, MI, EPA-600/3-79-094.
Thomann, R.V. and J.J. Fitzpatrick. 1982. Calibration and Verification of a
Mathematical Model of the Eutrophication of the Potomac Estuary. Pre-
pared for Department of Environmental Services, Government of the Dis-
trict of Columbia, Washington, D.C.
Tsivoglou, E.E. and J.R. Wallace. 1972. Characterization of Stream Reeiera-
tion Capacity. U.S. EPA. Washington, DC EPA-R3-72-012.
Warburg, 0. and E. Negelein. 1923. Uber den einfluss der Wellenlange auf
den Energieumsatz bei der Kohlensaureassimilation. A. Phys. Chem.
106:191-218.
Ward, D.M. and T.D. Brock. 1976. Environmental Factors Influencing the
Rate of Hydrocarbon Oxidation in Temperate Lakes, Applied and Environ-
mental Microbiology 31(5):764-772.
Wetzel, R.G. 1975. Limnology. W.B. Saunders Co. Philadelphia. 743 pp.
Whitman, R.G. 1923. A Preliminary Experimental Confirmation of the Two-
Film Theory of Gas Absorption. Chem. Metallurg. Eng. 29:146-148.
Wischmeier, W.H. and D.D. Smith. 1965. Predicting Rainfall—Erosion Losses
from Cropland East of the Rocky Mountains. Agriculture Handbook 282.
U.S. Department of Agriculture. Agriculture Research Service.
Zepp, R.G. And D.M. Cline. 1977. Rates of Direct Photolysis in Aquatic
Environment. Environ. Sci. Technol. 11:359-366.
378
-------
Zison, S.W., W.B. Mills, D. Demer, and C.W. Chen. 1978. Rates. Constants,
and Kinetic Formulations in Surface Water Quality Modeling. U.S. EPA,
Athens, GA. EPA-600/3-78-105.
OOVINNMINT PMNTHM OWCf: 1986-6«f6-116 40632
379
-------